2 re 
* ~~ el Pe Der Hem . 
ATP WIN Rete i 5 Fetal thn te hse Mel mow es 
Se eh iia tel 
ne Rat jou 


* ——— onthe ON er 
* eh ete etn ye tein Oatites © - 

wi Ge ~m ~ ee ee) o 2 

fret tert ~ ea ee be 

£ Rent FeGatr OO pee 
ae ooo 


ad allt a, ak 
CR SDD Wala he Rete’ 
SES ed . 


_—. 3° = (aad ere sting Tal) i be ee . : 

Lae Sane meee BES oy: he 1 Wager a . meter: Se a ee ee 
4 we 

. g i ee A a taste te ketal 


+4 


So ee 2:2 “_ 4 i — et pe ee ee eee De bos ee ote i+ ae o 
2 FRAG MRR 


oe 
erg a? 


oS 
Sy 


er 


a ane at 


f 
%B, 
%, 


Font 
rae i * oy. 
Srosck a iy 
Aa aa hk 
: S Eth 
yy yraa\ a Pot it 
ar at 
i rear 


i J 
wae 
Fagot 


Bont x geese. ke 
Ta ol i y SSN ane. 
ASG yet ts i v7 Ne? 


wy 


itp 
~~ 


Spe 
irked 


soho 
< 
ee 


Ea these 
Sci 
“SSienoee 
te 
Ay 
% 
ty 
. 
mM 


aie 


& 
nike 


ae 


ba 


pes 
ean 
fi an of a ie 


Ho re hee | eee 


i. 


1} 
Lew 
Sy) Laat 
PO. hr, 
Wetman a7 
“See 


“1G 
aT “ 
BPN Grete, ha 

z is 
i 


an 
‘| 


Ey ae 
Tee 22 
. ry z. 3] 


Mi, 3 
ed 


Agr 


he 
ah, 


= 


ae Qe 
IN 


= 
fest 
ee 


Tay, 


Si ae | OC 


dy 
“lly Say. Mo 44 ra eee oe ~< 


a he 2 
ia roo a ~ 


$1,207, 208 | ALBANY, 


The University of the 


_ rs PAGE 

ool 8 ae en oe 7 
ats. Pee scope “of, the 

ee oe feo vce 9 
of the State Mus- 

ny Meet boy 2k ers 10 
“Brezent condition and activi- 

gf the M Se ee) 
en ions. be- 
to the State Muséum .. 
pment publications ..... 


; on. geological sur- 


Soe me Set Bee > oe ww 6 6 Bhs es 


eT eee we ek te ate SH 


‘ 2 
rr _ of the Zoologi ists ee 
= the Arcbebiogixt and . 


— 


New York State Mustum._ 
jJoun M. CLARKE, aces AUG — 19 1S 


2 wYork State Museur Bulletin 


"Entered as seoond-class matter Novethber 27, 1915, at the. Post Office at Albany, N.Y, 
under the actiof August 24, rof2 


Published monthly by The University of the State of New York 


N; Y. Marce-Arrit, 195 


State of New York . 


BUREAU or 


LibRakt 


IRIEENTH REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR OF 
| laa STATE MUSEUM AND SCIENCE — 
DEPARTMENT wat 9 


THE SEVENTY-FIRST REPORT OF THE STATE " MUSEUM, 


REPORT OF THE STATE PALEONTOLOGIST FOR 10917 


PAGE 


- Foliation of the Gneissoid Sye- 


nite-granite.Complex of Lewis 
County, New York. Ay oF. 
BUDDINGTON 4%... Fes eS 10i 
Geology of ‘the Lake Clear 
Region. Haroip L. ALLING 111 
Geological Map of the Peninsula 
pe reé, P.Q. and Its Islands. 
MeCiaren. 147 
Réné Just Hay and His In- 
finence.. H. P. WHirLock = 2149 
Crystallographic . Studies of 
Barite; _ tt. P. WHITLOCK... 157 
Champlain’ 3 Assault onthe Fort- 
ified —Fown. of the Oneidas, 
P6E5.q ARTHUR C, PARKER. . 165 
On the Genetic Significance of 
Ferrous’. Silicate Associated 
with the Clinton Iron Ores. 
se VERS Ree aT. 175 
Radium and Uranium: Their 
Ores s-and . Occurrerice ~ in 
“Natures; R.A F. PENROSE jR. 199 


Index... 2... Ae SE ator cae 209 


ALBANY — 


5; pe, ge gS. sr 
AN ETHNOLOGY 


THE UNIVERSITY OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK 
Regents of the University — 
: With years when terms expire 


i936 Biniy T- Saree LL.B. LL.D. Chancellor - Palmyra 
1927 ALBERT VANDER VEER M. By: M. A. Ph.D. LL.D. 
lee) ys Vice Chancellor _ Albany 


1922 Poleien a nee MA. LL.D. - - - Brooklyn . 
1930 Wiutam Norrincnam M.A. Phil D. a, D.. — Syracuse 
To2t FRANCIS. M. (CARPENTER - - - —- —- - — = Mount Ki 
1923. Asram I. -E.xus LL.B. LL.D. DCL: - -— New York 
1924 ADELBERT Moor «LL. D.- = —= = = Balas 
Le 5 CHARLES B: ALEXANDER a - ‘LL.B. LED; 
litt}D. _- - = + - - = - - -> — New Yorks 
IQIO ) Joun Moors LLP SS =. aoe ee 
1928 WaLter GuEsT ance B.A. LL. D. - — Ogdensburg 
r920 James Byrne B.A. LL.B. LL.D. —- = = New York 
1929 kesosiva L. BRIDGMAN” M.A. -— = = = Bracken | 


ee , President of the University and Contes of Rincation 


» Joun: H. FINLEY M.A. ‘Lia L.H.D. 


Deputy Commissioner and Assistant ci iaisionaa for Elementary Education ue) 


|  THomas E. Finecan. M.A. Pad. D. LL.D, 


~ “ Assistant Sceases anak and Dirdetor-at Professional Education 
_ Aucustus S. Downinc M.A. L.H.D. LL.D. 
oe Hesiptany Comeiiones for Secondary Education 


‘Cuaries F, WHEELOCK io prowe Pe BS 


Director of State Library 


Sia is Wyer, JR, M.LS. 


Director of Seance and State Museum 


Jou: M. CLarKe DSc. LID: 
Chiefs and Directors of Divisions 


4; pieacisteaion Hrram C. CAsE | 
_. Agricultural and Industrial Education, Lewis A. WiLson 
_. Archives and History, James Suttivan M. A. Ph.D. : 

Attendance, James D. SutuivaN i ea ea 
Educational Extension, Wiui1am R. Watson BS. $ 
Examinations and Inspections, GrorcEe M. Witry M A. 
‘Law, Frank B. Grpert B.A., Counsel Fe 
“Library School, Frank K. WALTER M. A. MLS. | 
School Buildings and Grounds, Franx H. Woop M.A. 

School Libraries, SHERMAN Wittiams Pd. D. 
Visual Instruction, Arrrep W. Asprams Ph.B. ad 


Lass ris 
a et = or SS 


The University of the State of New York 
State Museum, June 20, 1918 
Dr John H. Finley 
President of the University 


sir: I have the honor to transmit to you, in accordance with 
the requirements of the statute, the annual report of the Director of 
the State Museum for the year past, and to recommend that this 
be published as a bulletin of the Museum. 


Very respectfully 


Joun M. CLARKE 


Director 
THE UNIVERSITY OF THE STATE OF NEW YORE 
THE STATE DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION 
Approved for publication this 24th day of June 1918 
& 
. 
> ead 


President of the University 
[5] 


ZF 


State Museum Bulletin 


Entered as second-class matter November 27, 1915, at the Post Office at Albany, N. Y., under 
the act of August 24, I912 


Published monthly by The University of the State of New York 


Nos. 207, 208 AE BAIN YEON Y: MARCH-APRIL 1918 


The University of the State of New York 


New York State Museum 


JoHn M. CLARKE, Director 


FOURTEENTH REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR OF 
THE STATE MUSEUM AND SCIENCE 
DEPARTMENT -: 


INCLUDING THE SEVENTY-FIRST REPORT OF THE STATE MUSEUM, THE THIRTY- 
SEVENTH REPORT OF THE STATE GEOLOGIST AND THE REPORT OF 
THE STATE PALEONTOLOGIST FOR 1917 


Regents Committee on the State Museum 


Charles B. Alexander M.A. LL.D. Litt.D., Tuxedo 
Herbert L. Bridgman M.A., Brooklyn 
Walter Guest Kellogg B.A., Ogdensburg 


INTRODUCTION 


This report covers all divisions of the scientific operations and 
museum work under the supervision of The University of the State 
of New York and has reference to the progress made therein during 
the fiscal year 1916-17. It constitutes the seventy-first consecutive 
annual report of the State Museum, the thirty-seventh annual report 
of the State Geologist (consecutive since 1881) and the report of the 
State Paleontologist for 1917. It is introductory to all memoirs 
and bulletins issued by this Department during the year named. 

The subjects presented in this report are considered under the 
following captions: 

I Legal Status and Scope of the State Museum 
II Codification of the State Museum Law 
III Present Condition and Activities of the Museum 
IV Condition of the Scientific Reservations Belonging to the 
Museum 
V Department Publications, 
VI Report of the Geological Survey 


zl 


8 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


VII Report of the State Botanist 
VIII Report of the State Entomologist 
IX Report of the Division of Zoology 
X Report of the Division of Archeology and Ethnology 
XI Staff of the Department 
XII Accessions to the Collections 
XIII Scientific Papers 
XIV Appendixes (to be continued in subsequent volumes) 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 9 


[ 
LEGAL STATUS AND SCOPE OF THE STATE MUSEUM 


The broad scope of the State Museum was clearly and succinctly 
defined in the Education Law (as amended in 1910) under article 3, 
which relates to the objects and functions of the University. Section 
54 of the law reads as follows: “ All scientific specimens and collec- 
tions, works of art, objects of historic interest and similar property 
appropriate to a general museum, if owned by the State and not 
placed in other custody by a specific law, shall constitute the State 
iMuseum: 2): . Lhe State Museum shall include the work of 
the State Geologist and Paleontologist, the State Botanist and the 
State Entomologist, who, with their assistants, shall be included in 
the scientific staff of the State Museum.” 

This definition of scope is broad and clear. It is the specific 
expression of the intent of the people of the State to constitute and 
maintain not alone a state museum of science, but a state museum 
of art, a state museum of history and a state museum which may 
depict any other field of civic and educational concern which in the 
judgment of the Regents of the University, would be justified by 
public interest. The spirit of the law where its sentences bear upon 
the creation of a museum of art and a museum of history is so obvious 
as to be constructively a command. The wish of the people and the 
desire of the Board in regard to this expansion of the actual museum 
nearer to the ideal of the museum expressed in the law have become 
a matter of record. It is then to be understood that the existing 
science museum of the State represents the development of only one 
phase of what should be, and what within the implied intention of 
the law is to be, the State Museum. 


ite) NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


II 
CODIFICATION OF THE STATE MUSEUM LAW? 


(Laws of 1910, Chapter 140, as amended to July 1, 1914) 

§ «3 [State Museum: Department of the University]. The 
[State Library and] State Museum shall be [al departments] of the . 
University. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1091, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 10; originally revised from L. 1889, ch. 529, tit. 1, § 16. 

§ s4 How constituted. All scientific specimens and collections, 
works of art, objects of historic interest and similar property appro- 
priate to a general museum, if owned by the State and not placed 
in other custody by a specific law, shall constitute the State Museum, 
and one of its officers shall annually inspect all such property not 
kept in the State Museum rooms, and the annual report of the 
Museum to the Legislature shall include summaries of such property, | 
with its location, and any needed recommendations as to its safety 
or usefulness. The State Museum shall include the work of the 
State Geologist and Paleontologist, the State Botanist and the State 
Entomologist, who, with their assistants, shall be included in the 
scientific staff of the State Museum. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1092, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892; 
ch. 378) § 22, as amended by L. 1893, ch. 488; L. 1896, ch. 493. 

§ 55 Collections made by the staff. Any scientific collection 
made by a member of the Museum staff during his term of office 
shall, unless otherwise authorized by resolution of the Regents, 
belong to the State and form part of the State Museum. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1093, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
claia78) S23: 

§ 56 Indian collection. There shall be made, as the Indian 
section of the State Museum, as complete a collection as practicable 
of the historical, ethnographic and other records and relics of the 
Indians of the State of New York, including implements or other 
articles pertaining to their domestic life, agriculture, the chase, war, 
religion, burial and other rites or customs, or otherwise connected 
with the Indians of New York. 


Source. Education L. 1909, § 1095, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
chi 378).8 24; originally revised trom. 1889) ch. 520) tite tm siee 


1 The ‘‘ Sources ”’ indicated in connection with this codification of the Museum 
Law have been supplied by courtesy of Frank B. Gilbert, Esq. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 II 


§ (27 Indian Law (L. 1909, ch. 31) Custody of Indian wampum. 
The University of the State of New York, which was duly elected 
to the office of wampum-keeper by the Onondaga nation on February 
26, 1898, and which by unanimous action of its Regents on March 
22, 1898, accepted such election as authorized to do by law, and 
which accepted the custody of the wampums as formally transferred 
to the Chancellor as part of the exercises and with the unanimous 
approval, both of the election and transfer, by the council of the 
Five Nations held in the senate chamber of the Capitol at Albany 
on June 22, 1898, by duly chosen representatives of all the original 
nations of the Ho-de-no-sau-nee, shall hereafter be recognized in all 
courts and places, as having every power which has ever, at any 
time, been exercised by any wampum-keeper of the Onondaga nation, 
or of any of the Ho-de-no-sau-nee, otherwise known as the Five 
Nations, or the Six Nations. or the Iroquois, and shall keep such 
wampums in a fireproof building, as public records, forever, and is 
hereby authorized to secure by purchase, suit, or otherwise, any 
wampums which have ever been in the possession of any of the 
Ho-de-no-sau-nee, or any preceding wampum-keeper, and which are 
now owned by any of them or to which any of them is entitled, or 
to which it is entitled, in law or in equity; and to maintain and carry 
on suit to recover any of such wampums in its own name or in the 
name of the Onondaga nation at any time notwithstanding that the 
cause of action may have accrued more than six years, or any time, 
before the commencement of any such suit. 

§ (159 Conservation Law (L. 1911, ch. 647) License to collect 
- or possess for propagation, scientific or exhibition purposes. The 
commission may issue a license revocable at its pleasure to any 
person, permitting the holder to collect or possess quadrupeds, birds, 
birds’ nests or eggs for propagation, scientific or exhibition purposes. 
Before such license is issued, every applicant, except a game protector, 
duly chartered museum or society incorporated for scientific or 
public exhibition purposes, or an officer thereof, must file written 
testimonials from two well-known scientific men; pay one dollar for 
the license and file a bond in the penal sum of two hundred dollars 
with two responsible sureties, to be approved by the commission, 
conditioned that he will not violate the provisions of this article or 
avail himself of the privileges of said license for purposes not herein 
set forth. Persons receiving such license must report the result 
of operation thereunder annually to the commission, at the expiration 
of the license. Such license shall be in force for one year only from 


12 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


the date of issue and shall not be transferable. [Amended by 
L. 1913, ch. 508, in effect May 14, 1913.] . 

§ 1115 Transfers from State officers. The librarian of any 
library owned by the State, or the officer in charge of any state 
department, bureau, board, commission or other office may, with 
the approval of the Regents, transfer to the permanent custody of 
the State Library or Museum any books, papers, maps, manuscripts, 
specimens or other articles which, because of being duplicates or for 
other reasons, will in his judgment be more useful to the State in the 
State Library or Museum than if retained in his keeping. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1025, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
Cheysy7.8) aNi20: 

§ 1117 Public and free [libraries and] museums. All provisions 
of this section and of sections 1118 to 1134, inclusive, shall apply 
equally to libraries, museums, and to combined libraries and museums, 
and the word “‘ library ”’ shall be construed to include reference and 
circulating libraries and reading-rooms. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1027, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 35. 

§ 1118 Establishment. By a majority vote at any election, any 
city, village, town, school district, or other body authorized to levy 
and collect taxes, or by vote of its common council, or by action of a 
board of estimate and apportionment or other proper authority, any 
city, or by vote of its trustees, any village, may establish and main- 
tain a free public library [museum], with or without branches, either 
by itself or in connection with any other body authorized to maintain 
such library [museum]. Whenever twenty-five taxpayers shall so 
petition, the question of providing library [museum] facilities shall 
be voted on at the next election or meeting at which taxes may be 
voted, provided that due public notice shall have been given of the 
proposed action. A municipality or district named in this section 
may raise money by tax to establish and maintain a public library 
[museum] or libraries [museums], or to provide a building or rooms 
for its or their use, or to share the cost as agreed with other municipal 
or district bodies, or to pay for library [museum] privileges under a 
contract therefor. It may also acquire real or personal property 
for library [museum] purposes by gift, grant, devise or condemnation, 
and may take, buy, sell, hold and transfer either real or personal 
property and administer the same for public library [museum] pur- 
poses. A board of supervisors of a county may contract with the 
trustees of a public library [museum] within such county or with 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 13 


any other municipal or district body having control of such a library 
[museum] to furnish library [museum] privileges to the people of the 
county, under such terms and conditions as may be stated in such 
contract. The amount agreed to be paid for such privileges under 
such contract shall be a charge upon the county and shall be paid 
in the same manner as other county charges. [Amended by L. rot, 
ch. 815.] 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1028, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 36, in part, as amended by L. 1895, ch. 859, § 5; L. 1902, ch. 185; 
L. 1909, ch. 606; originally revised from L. 1889, ch. 529, tit. 3, § 4. 

Reference. Establishment of free libraries by municipalities, General Municipal 
Law, § 79. 

Qualifications of voters. Voters upon the question of providing or maintaining 
a library should possess the same qualifications as voters at district meetings. 
Rep’t of Atty. Gen. (1903) 397. 

Contract with city library. Board of supervisors (prior to the amendment of 
I91t) has no authority under this section to contract with a city library for the 
use of such library. Rep’t of Atty. Gen. (Ig1I) IIo. 

§ r119 Acceptance of conditional gift. By majority vote at 
any election any municipality or district or by three-fourths vote of 
its council, any city, or any public library [museum] in the University, 
or any designated branch thereof, if so authorized by such vote of a 
municipality, district, or council, or of any combination of such 
voting bodies, may accept gifts, grants, devises or bequests for public 
library [museum] purposes on condition that a specified annual 
appropriation shall thereafter be made, by the municipality or 
district or combination so authorizing such acceptance, for main- 
tenance of such library [museum] or branches thereof. Such accept- 
ance, when approved by the Regents of the University under seal 
and recorded in its book of charters, shall be a binding contract, and 
such municipality and district shall levy and collect yearly the 
amount provided in the manner prescribed for other taxes, and 
shall maintain any so accepted gift, grant, devise or bequest, intact 
and make good any impairment thereof. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1029, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 36, as amended by L. 1895, ch. 859; L. 1902, ch. 185; L. 1907, 
ch. 606; originally revised from L. 1889, ch. 529, tit. 3, § 4. 

Appropriation of a fixed sum continues as an annual appropriation. Rep’t of 
Atty. Gen. (1903) 514. 

§ 1120 Subsidies. By vote similar to that required by sections 
1118 and 1119 money may be granted toward the support of libraries 
[museums] not owned by the public but maintained for its welfare 
and free use; provided, that such libraries [museums] shall be subject 


I4 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


to the inspection of the Regents and registered by them as main- 
taining a proper standard, that the Regents shall) certity whar 
number of the books circulated are of such a character as to merit a 
grant of public money, and that the amount granted yearly to 
libraries [museums] on the basis of circulation shall not exceed 
ten cents for each volume of the circulation thus certified by the 
Regents. 

Source. Education L. 19c9, § 1031, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 37, in part, as amended by L. 1900, ch. 481. 

§ 1121 Closing of museum; admission fee during certain hours. 
The trustees of any institution supported under this chapter by 
public money, in whole or in part, may, so far as consistent with 
free use by the public at reasonable or specified hours, close any of 
its museum collections at certain other hours, for study, to meet the 
demands of special students or for exhibition purposes, and may 
charge an admission fee at such hours, provided that all receipts 
from such fees shall be paid into the treasury and be used for the 
maintenance or enlargement of the institution. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1031, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 37, in part, as amended by L. 1900, ch. 481. 

§ 1122 Taxes. Taxes, in addition to those otherwise author- 
ized, may be voted by any authority named in section 1118 and for 
any purpose specified in sections 1118 to 1120 inclusive, and shall, 
unless otherwise directed by such vote, be considered as annual 
appropriations therefor till changed by further vote, and shall be 
levied and collected yearly, or as directed, as are other general taxes; 
and all money received from taxes or other sources for such library 
[museum] shall be kept as a separate tibrary [museum] fund and 
expended only under direction of the library feneseninL trustees on 
properly authenticated vouchers. 

Source. Educaticn L. 1¢09, § 1032, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
One Bye) § Sse 

§ 1123 Trustees. Free public libraries [museums] established 
by action of the voters or their representatives shall be managed by 
trustees who shall have all the powers of trustees or other educational 
inst.:tutions of the University as defined in this chapter; provided, 
unless otherwise specified in the charter, that the number of trustees 
shall be five; that they shall be elected by the legal voters, except 
that in cities they shall be appointed by the mayor with the consent 
of the common council, from citizens of recognized fitness for such 
position; that the first trustees determine by lot whose term of office 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9I7 15 


shall expire each year and that a new trustee shall be elected or 
appointed annually to serve for five years. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1033, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892,, 
ch. 378) § 39. 

§ 1124 Incorporation. Within one month after taking office 
the first board of trustees of any such free public library [museum] 
shall apply to the Regents for a charter in accordance with the vote 
establishing the library [museum]. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1034, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 


ch. 378) § 40. 
Reference. Application for, and grant of charter, Education Law, §§ 60-62. 


§ t125 Use of free public libraries [museums]. Every library 
[museum] established under section 1118 of this chapter shall be 
forever free to the inhabitants of the locality which establishes it, 
subject always to rules of the library [museum] trustees, who shall 
have authority to exclude any person who wilfully violates such 
rules; and the trustees may,.under such conditions as they think 
expedient, extend the privileges of the library [museum] to persons - 
living outside such locality. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1035, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 42, as amended by L. 1895, ch. 859. 

§ 1126 Reports. Every library or museum which receives state 
aid or enjoys any exemption from taxation or other privileges not 
usually .accorded to business corporations shall make the report 
required by section 58 of this chapter, and such report shall relieve 
the institution from making any report now required by statute or 
charter to be made to the Legislature, or to any department, court 
or other authority of the State. These reports shall be summarized 
and transmitted to the Legislature by the Regents with the annual 
reports of the State Library and State Museum. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1036, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
en. 378) § 41. 

§ 1127 Injuries to property. Whoever intentionally injures, 
defaces or destroys any property belonging to or deposited in any 
incorporated library, reading-room, museum or other educational 
institution, shall be punished by imprisonment in a state prison for 
not more than three years, or in a county jail for not more than one 
year, or by a fine of not more than five hundred dollars, or by both 
such fine and imprisonment. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1037, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 


ch. 378) § 43. 
Reference. Removal of books in libraries and injuries to books, works of art, 


etc. in libraries and museums, a misdemeanor, Penal Law, §§ 1427, 1428. 


16 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


§ 1128 Detention. Whoever wilfully detains any book, news- 
paper, magazine, pamphlet, manuscript or other property belonging 
to any public or incorporated library, reading-room, museum or 
other educational institution, for thirty days after notice in writing 
to return the same, given after the expiration of the time which by 
the rules of such institution, such article or other property may be 
kept, shall be punished by a fine of not less than one nor more than 
twenty-five dollars, or by imprisonment in the jail not exceeding six 
months, and the said notice shall bear on its face a copy of this section. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1038, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 44. 

§ 1129 Transfer of libraries. Any corporation, association, 
school district or combination of districts may, by legal vote duly 
approved by the Regents, transfer, conditionally as provided in 
section 1119 of this article, or otherwise, the ownership and control 
of its library, with all its appurtenances, to any municipality, or 
district, or public library [museum] in the University, or any desig- 
nated branch thereof, and thereafter such transferee shall be entitled 
to receive any money, books or other property from the State or 
other sources, to which the transferring body would have been 
entitled but for such transfer, and the trustees of body making the 
transfer shall thereafter be relieved of all responsibility pertaining to 
property thus transferred. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1039, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 45, as amended by L. 1907, ch. 606. 

§ 1130 Local neglect. If the local authorities of any library 
[museum] supported wholly or in part by state money, fail to provide 
for the support and public usefulness of its books [collections], the 
Regents shall in writing notify the trustees of said library [museum] 
what is necessary to meet the State’s requirements, and on such 
notice all its rights to further grants of money [or books] from the 
State shall be suspended until the Regents certify that the require- 
ments have been met; and if said trustees shall refuse or neglect to 
comply with such requirements within sixty days after service of 
such notice, the Regents may remove them from office and thereafter 
all [books and other] library [museum] property wholly or in part 
paid for from state money shall be under the full and direct control 
of the Regents who, as shall seem best for public interests, may 
appoint new trustees to carry on the library [museum], or may store 
it, or distribute its books [collections] to other libraries [museums]. 


Source. Education L. 1909, § 1040, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 46. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 iG 


§ 1131 Loans of books [collections] from state. Under such 
rules as the Regents may prescribe, they may lend from the State 
Library [museum] duplicate department, or from books [collections] 
specially given or bought for this purpose, selections of books 
[collections] for a limited time to any public library [museum] in 
this State under visitation of the Regents, or to any community 
not yet having established such library [museum], but which has 
conformed to the conditions required for such loans. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1051, revised from former Con. Sch. L. (L. 1894, 
ch. 378) § 47. 

§ 1132 Advice and instruction from State Library [museum] 
officers. The trustees or librarian [director] or any citizen interested 
in any public library [museum] in this State shall be entitled to ask 
from the officers of the State Library [museum] any needed advice 
or instruction as to a library building, furniture and equipment, 
government and service, rules for [readers] selecting, buying, cata- 
loging, [shelving] lending [books, or] any [other] matter pertaining 
to the establishment, reorganization or administration of a public 
library [museum]. The Regents may provide for giving such advice 
and instruction either personally or through printed matter and 
correspondence either by the State Library [museum] staff or by a 
library [museum] commission of competent experts appointed by 
the Regents to serve without salary. The Regents may, on request, 
select or buy books [collections], or furnish them instead of money 
apportioned or may make exchanges and loans through the duplicate 
department of the State Library [museum]. Such assistance shall 
be free to residents of this State as far as practicable, but the Regents 
may, in their discretion, charge a proper fee to nonresidents or for 
assistance of a personal nature or for other reason not properly an 
expense to the State, but which may be authorized for the accom- 
modation of users of the library [museum]. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1042, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 48. 

§ 1133 Apportionment of public library [museum] money. 
- Such sum as shall have been appropriated by the Legislature as 
public library [museum] money shall be paid annually by the treas- 
urer, on the warrant of the comptroller, from the income of the United 
States deposit fund, according to an apportionment to be made for 
the benefit of free libraries [museums] by the Regents in accordance 
with their rules and authenticated by their seal; provided, that none 
of this money shall be spent for books [collections] except those 


18 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


approved or selected and furnished by the Regents; that no locality 
shall share in the apportionment unless it shall raise and use for the 
same purpose not less than an equal amount from taxation or other 
local sources; that for any part of the apportionment not payable 
directly to the library [museum] trustees the Regents shall file with 
the Comptroller vouchers showing that it has been spent in accord- 
ance with law exclusively for books [collections] for free libraries 
[museums] or for proper expenses incurred for their benefit; and that 
books [collections] paid for by the State shall be subject to return to 
the Regents whenever the library [museum] shall neglect or refuse 
to conform to the ordinances under which it secured them. 

Source. Education L. 1909, § 1043, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 50. ; 

§ 1134 Abolition. Any library [museum] established by public 
vote or action of school authorities, or under section 1118 of this 
chapter, may be abolished only by a majority vote at a regular annual 
election, ratified by a majority vote at the next annual election. If 
any such library [museum] is abolished its property shall be used 
first to return to the Regents, for the benefit of other public libraries 
[museums] in that locality, the equivalent of such sums as it may have 
received from the State or from other sources as gifts for public use. 
After such return any remaining property may be used as directed 
in the vote abolishing the library [museum] but if the entire library 
[museum] property does not exceed in value the amount of such 
gifts it may be transferred to the Regents for public use, and the 
trustees shall thereupon be free from further responsibility. No 
abolition of a public library [museum] shall be lawful till the Regents 
grant a certificate that its assets have been properly distributed and 
its abolition completed in accordance with law. 


Source. Education L. 1909, § 1044, revised from former Univ. L. (L. 1892, 
ch. 378) § 51, as amended by L. 1895, ch. 859. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 19 


IEE 


PRESENT CONDITION AND ACTIVITIES OF THE MUSEUM 


The outstanding problem of the Museum is to adjust the growing 
collections to fixed limitations of space. In this there is the ever 
present danger of overcrowding, curtailing proper aisle space and 
providing for freedom of movement over the floors on the frequent 
occasions when the halls are thronged. Facing this problem, the 
effort to meet it is by turning from the use of more floor space to the 
utilization of the walls. Naturally the procedure grows increasingly 
difficult, but the life of the Museum depends upon ignoring such 
limitations even if we have to suspend collections from the rafters. 
A finished museum is a dead one; this Museum can not die as long 
as the scientific corps behind it is pursuing its work and acquiring 
new factors in the natural resources of the State. 

It is perfectly evident that before long, certainly in the clearer 
light of the new order and more elevated ideals about to come, a 
more adequate provision must be made for the housing of the State 
Museum. It has lived decorously in the Education Building, but 
under restraint. It needs its own house, its own atmosphere and 
the fair chance to pursue its many activities and realize its own 
ideals. 

Light screens. The control of the light in the great main hall 
which receives its illumination only through skylights has been a 
difficult problem to solve. This we believe to have been now well 
taken care of by the installation throughout of panels specially 
prepared of mercerized fabric vanes working together after the 
mode of a Venetian blind and each panel easily adjustable from 
beneath by compensating cords. The design is one furnished and 
controlled by the Simon Ventilighter Company of New York, which 
has installed the entire equipment. The zoology wing, which is 
lighted in parts from the sides, has been equipped by the same 
company with adjusted blinds of similar design which operate after 
the style of curtains, not so easy to operate as the others, but with 
reasonable effectiveness. 

Decoration of the Iroquois halls. There has been installed over 
each of the arched main entrances to the Iroquois halls a lunette 
representative of New York Indian life and tradition. At the east 
entrance is the very effective ‘‘ Sun Worshipers ”’ and over the west 
arch ‘‘ The Coming of Hiawatha.’’ These paintings are by David 


20 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


C. Lithgow and the former is a splendid example of Mr Lithgow’s © 


workmanship. Each of these pictures measures fourteen feet 
across the base and fills the entire spring of the arch.’ 

The extensive walls within the Iroquois halls have also been 
decorated throughout in conventional Indian designs which add 
greatly to the attractiveness of the Iroquois exhibits and relieve the 


bald expanse of monochrome surface with which they were sur- ~ 


rounded. The cost of this decoration has been borne by Mrs 
Frederick F. Thompson. 
Seneca bark lodge. The full-size bark lodge, such as was used 


by the Seneca Indians in precolumbian days, has been built in the ~ 


small room at the east of the Iroquois chambers on the west mezza- 
nine. This construction, erected by matching and tying, that is to 
say, without nails, was put together by a Seneca Indian of the Cat- 
taraugus reservation, now in France as a lieutenant in the United 
States Army. The elm bark required for the construction was 
obtained by Indians of Wiscons’n. The lodge stands fully equipped 
as in the ancient days and helps New York people to understand the 
fact that our Indians did not dwell in tents or wigwams. This 
lodge has also been provided by the generosity of Mrs Thompson. 
The Arnold collection of birds eggs. Mr Benjamin W. Arnold 
of Albany has presented to the Museum his very extensive collection 
of birds eggs, the results of a lifelong active interest in this field of 
‘study. Through this gift he has equipped the Museum with a 
collection in oology which must be reckoned as one of the most 
ample and complete known. ‘The scope of the collection is general 
but the North American birds are represented by about 1000 species, 
while the collection abounds in representatives from the rest of the 
world, especially from the West Indies, South America, the South 
Atlantic islands, New Zealand and the countries of Europe. There 
are about 15,000 eggs in this collection. On receipt of the gift the 
Regents of the University, in recognition of its interest and worth 
and in Mr Arnold’s attainments of ornithology, recorded an expres- 
sion of their appreciation of Mr Arnold’s consideration and conferred 
on him the title of honorary curator of ornithology. 
_ The collection was received in perfect order, completely labeled. 
Preparations were at once made, under Mr Arnold’s supervision, for 
its installation. It was decided to arrange it along the walls of the 


1Mr Lithgow did the writer the honor to base his conception for the Sun 
Worshipers on a sketch entitled ‘‘ The Vision of Ongwe”’ which was printed in 
““ Sketches of Gaspé.” 


jouvd yeinut vloreosn |, 


ery 


a 
2 
ee 
aoe 
ee} 
jie 
Beate wh 
came ae et 


a 
RRM RR wee 


ee Rv ieee oe 


ea 


be 
Se ese oa 


ia 
we 
* 
9 
a 
a 
m 
ch 
ae. 


ABE 


ee 
uae cine Ame 
od 
wean 
Ci 


agne 
- 


A 
£ She eaee 


ay 


a 
cues: 


Ser 
AS 


beieratonort 
ee 
in 


opm 


Sasi 


Ree Eee pee 
meer 


eas ae 
& BR CSM GREE BA. & 


ah me * , 
ae be * 


4 
i 
| 
a 
: 
3 
: 


ee er eee cers 


Cayuga mural panel 


UOIVAOOOP PLADUL YIM ‘AHOLS YMVYO TA 


/ 
| 
| 


S78) 


’ 
r 
. =a 
j 
~ ‘ E 
= Fa A = 
¥ f Bs 
. fara = 
a 
~ 
Ss pire B . 
’ 
+ } s 
At - * > x 
ra 

A .. . 

? 

7 

* ' 
ss / = < 
» ? ? j; ; : 
- i * 

‘ . =“) y 1] 

ane . ‘ 


Corridor in Iroquois hall, with mural decoration 


ot 


oe 


isin = 
Teas, pte 


+ 


pena 
we 
A 


oa % 


Seneca Lodge seen through the arch 


als 


h 


. 


juois 


East end of Iroc 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 21 


paired corridors leading from the main hall to the rotunda into the 
zoology hall, that is, next adjoining the Fuertes bird paintings. The 
cases which have now been constructed and put in place are keyboard 
cases equipped with inside steps and supported by wooden bracket. 
These line both walls of each corridor. 

The work of installing the specimens has proceeded to a point at 
which it may be said that about one-half the collection is now 
exposed to view. It is planned to give exhibition space to as many 
of these specimens as practicable and at the same time to protect 
their delicate coloration from fading by excluding practically all 
the daylight and displaying them under electric lamps. The lighting 
device for this purpose has been installed and the display is of 
great effectiveness because of the extraordinary variant combinations 
of color patterns on the most graceful of all shapes. The collection 
attracts because of its beauty. 
ts, Other exhibits in zoology. A habitat group of the otter anda 
very effective reproduction of the burrow-nest of the bank swallow 
with its birds, have been located and installed by the members of 
the zoology staff. Recently there have been acquired the materials 
necessary for habitat group of the timber wolf (eight animals) and 
of the beaver (seven animals). These will be completed as oppor- 
tunity affords; but the enlistment of Sherman C. Bishop, zoologist, 
in the U. S. Navy and of the taxidermist, Arthur Paladin, in the 
New York State Guard, will of necessity delay the work. 

The George Lasher Taylor collection of fossils. The collection of 
fossils from the various formations in the Schoharie valley, left by 
the death of Mr Taylor, has been presented to the Museum by his 
mother, Mrs Joseph Taylor of Schoharie. It consists of about 600 
specimens from this classic region for Paleozoic fossils. 

Indian basketry. The museum has received from Mrs Frederick 
F. Thompson a gift of forty-two Indian baskets from the western 
tribes, which are very acceptable for illuminating comparatively the 
basketry. weave and motives among the Iroquois. These baskets 
are listed as follows: 


t Salish baby basket 
1 Havasupai water bottle 

2 Havasupai bowl baskets 

t Navaho sacred basket 

t Poma conical basket 

4 Poma bowl baskets (one very modern) 
5 Pima large bowl baskets 


22 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


4 Tlinkit baskets (three with covers) 

t Apache basket (storage) 

t Tlinkit bowl basket 

8 Salish baskets (various shapes and sizes) 
t Salish harvesting basket 

t Klamath three strand basket 

t Hat creek basket 

t Salish twilled fish or burden basket 
t Hopi basket 

t Apache bowl 

1 Russian basket top 

t Eskimo covered basket 

t Tlinkit or Salish basket or hat 

t British Columbia basket 

t Navaho gambling tray 

1 Tlinkit wallet 

t Salish basket (large, covered with old design) 


Mushroom exhibit. The series of restoration of mushrooms 
constituting the Charles H. Peck testimonial collection has been 
completed and now represents about sixty species of the common 
edible and noxious kinds. The beauty and accuracy of this collec- 
tion attract general attention and interest. 

Other exhibits. There has recently been added to the collection 
in industrial geology a series of seventy-two examples of American- 
made dyes received from the Schoellkopf Aniline & Chemical Works 
of Buffalo, N. Y. There is also in the course of assemblage a historic 
exhibit which will bring together items of interest associated with 
the development of geological science in this State, such as the 
mineral collection made by Governor DeWitt Clinton, the specimens 
gathered in the Agricultural and Geological Survey of Rensselaer 
County (1818) by Amos Eaton and Joseph Henry, the hammer used 
by James Hall in the Fourth District Survey, etc. 

several temporary exhibits have been shown at various times 
during the year: . 


t Color designs by the children of the elementary schools of Paris 
2 Indian paintings by David C. Lithgow 

3 Butterflies and moths 

4 Collection of American plows 

5 Early American metal lamps 

6 English sailor jugs 


‘pazIqryXo MOU 9SOY} JO Bz aIB DIO, “UOTJOOT[OO PlOULY oY} WOT sd30 JO osed 


qunout jo o[A4js ol} MOYS 0} !S88o9 JO UOTJOOT[OO P[OULY OY} WOT OSV’) 


| ». @- BS'2. is: CO OQVAM _* 
SAMA RB EOMBeODANOMOe 


ee re 


LE Tm > B\O m\nr\iolannlqmnic, Gal Pi PP Iw 


SUIOOIYSNUL PUeYOIV\, OU] 


4 


\ 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 ; 23 


Bird day. The State Bird Day is proclaimed each year by the 
Museum and its observation is widely celebrated throughout the 
schools and other communities of the State. The creation of this 
annual observance is in accordance with a logical outcome from the 
encouragement which has been given by the Museum to the study 
of the birds through its publications. It may be noted in this 
connection that these publications, namely ‘“‘ Birds of New York”’ 
in two quarto volumes and the portfolio of plates taken from the 
publication, are in constant and increasing demand. Up to this 
time we have distributed nearly four million colored plates of the 
New York birds. 

The New York State Archeological Association. In the last 
- report mention was made of the organization of a chapter of this 
association in Rochester, known as the Lewis H. Morgan Chapter. 
This branch of the association has a present membership of 125 
and is very active in its researches, the present officers being Alvin 
H. Dewey, president, and W. H. Cassabeer, secretary. Recently a 
chapter has been organized at Cooperstown which will interest 
itself in the archeology of the upper Susquehanna region. This isa 
vigorous young organization which calls itself the Leatherstocking 
Chapter. It now has a membership of 35. Its officers are David 
Rewer president, and R. D. Spraker, secretary: ‘The relation of 
the State Museum to this association is that of parent organization 
with the purpose of making the relations of the two of mutual benefit. 

Retirement of Herbert P. Whitlock, Mineralogist. The appoint- 
ment of Mr Whitlock to the position of curator of mineralogy in 
the American Museum of Natural History has made necessary 
his resignation from his equivalent duties here. Mr Whitlock has 
been a member of this staff for fourteen years and in that time has 
rendered admirable service in his department, which is reflected 
both in the Museum arrangements and in the quality of his published 
investigations. 

Restoration of invertebrate fossils. To rehabilitate the inverte- 
brate life of the State as represented in the fossiliferous rocks requires 
an exact understanding of structures, combined with unusual artistic 
skill. Itisarare combination; having found it, it is of first importance 
to take advantage of it. This Museum possesses a wealth of inver- 
tebrate fossils, in proportion to the wealth of the State itself in these 
regards. It is eminently appropriate to the Museum that it enter 
somewhat extensively upon this effort to poe these back to life as 
far as can reasonably be done. 


24 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


There has recently been completed a group representing the 
remarkable associates of marine life known as the Naples fauna of 
the Upper Devonian as it lived in the seas of western New York. 
The assemblage of restorations is worked out with close attention to 
original structure as far as these can be made out from the study of 
allied living species and are presented as an underwater scene which 
has been effectively rendered by Mr Henri Marchand. The species 
represented in this submarine group are.the following: 


Fishes 


Rohvard tai clay My side vy o mine suis) Clarice nasa 4 
Cephalopods 

Manticoceras thy nich os toma) Clarkes ae I 

Orthoceras bebry x Hale ee I 
Mollusks 

Grammysita elliptica Hall, 2. 3 
Starfishes 

Urasterella ys o.oo elo a ee er I 

Lepidastereltla ¢yalum Clarke. (0) E 

Kl asaniia am iia isp inawedemiaiamnar a ae gh: I 

Clarkeaster pliers pinios us Rucdemann a ee I 


Crinoids 


Halloecrinus -orimat 1s sapmatis pela I 
Corals 

Plumalina plumearive Hall oe ee r 
Siphonophore 

Plat, Op Sion em ay ic Taya, bh oyorayaa) Clankeu e) an te 
Sponges 

Hydnoceras tuber os umpComadenry ee I 

H. leg atuime Hall’ & Clarke wi eee ae 4 
Seaweed 

‘Fhamnocladus 0. 0e' oo /s05 2 eee ae 4 


The water fowl of Bonaventure island.' With the assistance of — 
the zoology department of the Victoria National Museum at Ottawa, 
the Director has acquired a series of the water fowl now breeding 
on the Bonaventure island in the Gulf of St Lawrence, one of the 
last resorts of these birds on the Atlantic coast. It seemed well to 
take advantage of the opportunity afforded just at this time by a 
special study of the habits of these birds being made through the 


1Since this was written the Provincial Parliament of Quebec has constituted tre 
Perce Rock, Bonaventure Island and the Bird Rocks into a single great reserve 
of waterfowl (March 17, 1919). 


puvyosvypy Aq svos (UUIUOAC]) OSL}I0g OY} Jo of] ou, 


PP Vas 


a Serr RN a ane one mente 


YSyavjs puev s[e10o9 “YSy-YUr ‘SpoaM-ves ‘soysy :dno1s ofl, osv41Og oyy Jo sprejod 


Details of Portage life group: nautilus, glass-sponge and starfish 


New i beh aN Mp Suir sow yn p) 


OSpo] YOOI OF poyoryye ysyseys :dnoss oft] osv4sIOg oyy JO [Ivjoc] 


j d starfish 


sea-lily an 


Details of the Portage life group 


Detail of Portage life group: glass-sponges 


* ‘ 7 
2 ‘ 
: 
i! : ‘ 
if . m U 
‘ 1 A 4 
' 
5 
i 
4 
: 
. ; 
” 
; 
4 r # t 
: a ; 
7 , 
4 ca 
I . ) ‘ 
‘ 
; 
. 
; \ 
. y 
’ : 
' oy] sf 
; 
A i * 4 if | 
_ ‘ 
4 + 
’ f ; “4 
J =) 
| = 
fi , [ 
> 
. / v a 
; 
; ‘ 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 25 


agency of the Canadian federal zoologists. In this connection it 
may be explained that there are in the Gulf of St Lawrence two 
colonies of these water fowl, consisting of the following birds: gannet, 
kitttwake, brunnich murre, razor-billed auk, puffin, guillemot and 
one or two others which nest together on widely separate islands; 
Bonaventure, which lies 4 miles off the coast of Percé, and the “‘ Bird 
rocks’ the northernmost part of the Magdalen islands, 120 miles 
out to sea, eastward of the former colony. Of these two colonies 
the remoter one, that on the “ Bird rocks,’ has for many years 
been regarded as the larger and undoubtedly it was so until the 
pillage of the birds and their nests substantially reduced the census 
of the population. The Bonaventure island colony is now undoubt- 
edly the larger and is the annual resort of many thousands of birds 
for nesting purposes. 

Close inshore from Bonaventure island and at the point of the 
Percé peninsula is an insulated rock mass known as the Percé rock. 
On its summit is a colony different from the other two and consisting 
of two species; the herring gull and the crested cormorant. We 
owe to the questioned habits of the cormorant the earnest effort 
that has been, and is still being made, to rescue and conserve all 
these three nesting places in the hope and with the reasonable expec- 
tation of bringing them under federal protection: a procedure which 
must be made effective soon if the bird colonies are not to suffer 
serious destruction. The sporting fisherman of the Gaspé salmon 
streams made formal complaint to the government that the cor- 
morant was destroying the young of the salmon, in consequence of 
which complaint an order was issued that the cormorant should be 
destroyed. In protest thereto, and as a more conservative pro- 
cedure, the order was held in abeyance until the scientific bird 
students of the Dominion could make full investigation of the 
indictment against the cormorants. Through several recent seasons 
the accomplished observers of the Canadian Natural History Depart- 
ment studied this problem, making intensive and complete examina- 
tions of the stomach contents of the cormorants during the entire 
period of the breeding and maturing season and after introspective 
scrutiny returned the verdict: no cause of complaint. These inves- 
tigations on the habits of the cormorants led to closer study of the 
habits of other members of these bird associations and colonies, and 
to the intensive feeling that these wonderful nesting places should 
be brought under official protection. Even though they may seem 
remote they are annually invaded in the most heartless and destruc- 
tive manner, and the mortality has grown rapidly with the increase 


26 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


in the population of the coasts. It is recognized that the better 
sense and the finer taste of the community requires that these beauti- 
ful creatures be protected from any such destruction as has already 
befallen the other nesting places of the gulf and other members of 
the bird fauna of the Atlantic coast. Lively interest in this pro- 
cedure has been taken by the Canadian Commission of Conservation, 
as well as by private individuals, and in such hands it seems pre- 
determined that the effort will come to a successful issue. Because 
of the interest which we have taken in this matter through many 
years of personal acquaintance and association with these colonies, 
it seems appropriate to introduce here some illustrations of the 
birds nesting on these extraordinary cliffs. 

What New York State is doing for science. It is probably true 
that very few of our citizens have had the opportunity to acquaint 
themselves with the ramifications of the State’s business throughout 
all the magnitude of the various interests of this Commonwealth 
and its people. ‘‘ This certainly is a wonderful State,” a visitor to 
the State Museum was recently overheard to remark after looking 
over some of the evidences there assembled of its natural resources; 
indeed so great a State is it that only great, elaborate and costly 
machinery 1s competent for the performance of its gigantic business. 
Its functions extend in every direction, cover seemingly every phase 
of our community relations wherein aid, supervision or expert 
counsel is required. | 

The purpose of this statement is to indicate how completely the 
state of New York cares for its scientific interests, and I presume 
what is true of science is equally true of its other concerns: educa- 
tional, charitable and corrective. The list that follows shows the 
detail into which the supervision and development of the scientific 
interests have now extended, and these functions reach not to super- 
vision alone, but to research, investigation and application. Itisa 
very noteworthy fact that there is little if any duplication in these 
activities; that is to say, no two departments are doing the same 
work. From my own long experience I know that this has not 
been the case for very many years. Only as the departmental 
activities |become more closely analyzed” and) periccrecmmac. 
the danger of overlapping or duplication become practically 
removed. i 

Perhaps a word of explanation is needed to explain certain 
instances that may seem to be duplications; for example, the State 
maintains an official entomologist. This official is attached to the 


Photo by P. A. Taverner 


Bonaventure island. The Gannet ledges. A group of young gannets. 


Photo by P. A. Taverner 


One thousand four hundred 


birds are shown in this view. 


Bonaventure island. The Gannet ledges. 


Photo by P. A. Taverner 


Bonaventure island. The Gannet ledges. Over 1000 gannets are 
shown in this view. 


(‘ 
4 


Photo by P. A. Taverner 


Bonaventure island. The Gannet ledges. A group of! | ks. 
Puffing, 


Pir 
ta ears 
vents 


¥ 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 27 


State Museum, which is itself a subsidiary of The University of 
the State of New York, and the work of the State Entomologist is 
to conduct researches upon insect habits and insect control and to 
make recommendations as to procedures in insect control though 
he is without statutory power to enforce his recommendations. The 
Department of Farms and Markets maintains, also, entomologists 
whose business it is toinspect nursery stock, orchards etc., for insect 
pests and to enforce against these the protective laws which the State 
has enacted. The latter is police work carried out under mandatory 
statutes. This is a philosophical and sound division; that is to say, 
the work of the State Entomologist is distinctively a university 
function and is therefore appropriately attached to The University 
of the State of New York, while the work of the entomological 
inspectors is not of this character. ‘This difference is recognized in 
the case of one or two other officials, where the application of the 
control required by the statute is left to one department but the 
necessary research and investigation in that field is regarded as an 
appropriate part of the university machinery. 

It is not likely that any scientific problem specially applicable to 
the interests of the State could arise, for which the present State 
machinery has not already made provision. The State, therefore, 
is admirably protected in this regard and this fact has come into the 
foreground in the present war crisis when every state community 
has been called upon to develop to the utmost its supplies of natural 
resources of every description, direct and indirect. Many of the 
states have organized special scientific research committees in con- 
nection with their state defense councils. New York has not done 
this because its present organization seems to cover the entire 
field. One exception may be made; we have no state weather 
service. Perhaps this is to be regretted. Certainly the farmers 
of the State do not carry on their agricultural operations with any 
large degree of reliance upon the reports distributed to them 
from the federal service, and New York might therefore well 
consider the propriety of supplying the agricultural interests with 
more definite information regarding probable and impending local 
weather conditions which it could readily acquire by the estab- 
lishment of a sufficient number of observation stations, doing their 
work under proper supervision and interpretation. 

The following list may be incomplete in some particulars, but it is 
sufficiently comprehensive as it stands to excite interest and give 
a reasonable feeling of pride in the efficiency of this phase of the 
State’s business, 


28 


SCIENCE 


Agricultural investigations and experiments. 


NemiculitumerimStmucuiO ntl rc. ee ener 
Agriculture, law administration. 

Animal diseases, inspection and Sentral of 
Antitoxins and serums. ci 3. t en nee 
Aquatic insects, ingediieation of sects Win yaph ee 
INS OCG DENG Ree Osteen ag ea ste ss ORE, Caleta tie eh Sane 
Archeology 
IBACteHIOlO Sy. ss laeid renee ele eee Je pe ean, ae 
Bicd Day. 42. vey: 
RG s WTOLECELOMMemenn le Multa eamunti can muewuae 


ot) «| fe) ime (elie! ie! va) le ie) fete.) @) el tele: feie\ ee: eh a j}ieiialste viel ours 


Botany. . 

Breeding ae fh. es 

Bridges, canal, consteuction aa Taepectoimne 
Campsinsectsscomtnolloka anes ee ee 
Cancerand) alliedudiseasessm ssa seein 
Cement testing.. 

Chemical inivestisations (dune ad beat 
ChenustayzoftoodSere nto) ae aren vee 
@lay sia Cecials etesbittaya enue) ci niees see 
ClaynproductOne src es RT Raine 
Construction of canal locks and storage 


Crops y protection iromminsectssae. see 


Disease, relation of insects to. 
Drainage and irrigation. 
Drugs and adulterations, onto can 


Dracss control of saleiok. 2. oe eee ee eee 
Dusts, dangerous, investigation of......... 
1Diaell oye Soaipelee ek Sa NPL me el eMm mcm) Amc SEL ee ES 
Engineering; all problems except highways. 
Hat OMMOlOS yikes pata i. AN mene eye nee at 
Epidemics, investigation of 
Faunal studies 


Phe) ed alselileljeiie)/ suis ecientel si 1s 


Cy 80 HOON IG OOOO) OG tee -Oaceeoo sy) oh 1G ho 


Fish and game protection 
lOna WSCC OR sir fe hse esto mc neke eA 
Foods and adulterations, control of........ 


PPO On OO Ch ON OS Oe Soi iG 


Forest insects, control of 


NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


DEPARTMENT 


Agricultural experiment stations 
Schools and colleges of agriculture 


. Farms and Markets 


Farms and Markets 


| Degecvinedt: of Health 


Department of Education 
Department of Education and Con- 
servation Commission 
Department of Education 
Department of Health 


. Department of Education 


Conservation Commission and De- 
partment of Education 


. Department of Education 
. Conservation Commission 


State Engineer 

Department of Education 

State Institute for the Study of 
Cancer and Allied Diseases 

Department of Highways 


State Board of Pharmacy 

Farms and Markets 

State School of Clay-working and 
Ceramics 

Department of Education 


State Engineer 
Department of Education and 
Farms and Markets 


. Department of Education | 
.. Conservation Commission 
. State Board of Pharmacy and 


Department of Health 
State Board of Pharmacy 
Department of Labor 
Board of Embalming Examiners 
State Engineer 
Department of Education 
Department of Health 
Department of Education 
Department of Education and 
Farms and Markets 
Conservation Commission 
Department of Education 


Department of Health and Farms 


and Markets 
Department of Education and Con- 
servation Commission 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR 1917 2¢ 

(A 
SCIENCE DEPARTMENT 
Forest preserve. : . Conservation Commission 
Forest trees, ditenace of Gine iplietee pest): . Conservation Commission 
Bonestiy anc TtOrestaviont i...) 6.4 2... Conservation and State College of 
Forestry 

orestsangd dandsy mle Nn Sal wa ia Conservation Commission 
EP puit msects, mvestigation Of.) 222.4). 4: Department of Education 


Department of Education and 
Farms and Markets 


amedcimest USe-Of 6.0. oan eee 


Fur-bearing animals, protection of......... Conservation Commission 
(G@eae iayel IS oe ee ade ier ee, pie Geena Mean es Conservation Commission 
aATMERCeMSUS eee | he cece tree ete URL one tzy « Conservation Commission 
GAME GRESOUVIC sis Sore te ey eee tg el 3 Conservation Commission 
Garden and field insects, control of........ Department of Education and 


Farms and Markets 


Garden development. . . Farms and Markets 


Gash nacunay) production: yy 45 ..... 4) oo: Department of Education 
Gases, dangerous, investigation of......... Department of Labor 
Geovra plaienmanmese la se ee eves lee es State Board of Geographic Names 


Geological maps... 


Geoloricalisurvey 3.601). .5. Ree nih ae. 
iodine COMSERUCHOM. 2c). ao nc ce ee ea 


. Department of Education 


Department of Education 
Department of Highways 


Iouseiold insects; control of? 22. .....5.%.. Department of Education 

NalnminealiCensest er. war heya horse oe oe wna Conservation Commission 

Hel GROLOSay gy NU eye ea nh te ak hak Se at Department of Education and Con- 
servation Commission 

Hydranlicideyelopiments 2 22/522 6 he: Conservation Commission 

lirammamtenmol Omar erie ean ke hc ed, oa eee ace oe Department of Health 

Indians, history and customs... . ...... Department of Education 

iiieastrialereolosy cs. Soe. as sks fhe seks Department of Education 

alancderivier Ow, COntrOl. sj 704.655. h 0s : State Engineer 

Inland waters, other than canal system. Conservation Commission 

linsamemcarc Olin 5.55 wank deh ons Sok Soa State Hospital Commission * 

Insecticides, use and supervision of........ Department of Education and 
Farms and Markets 

iimseciss controlkohk noxious. 92%. «40 4-045). Department of Education and 
Farms and Markets 

ihiseetsysbudy ol allitorms Of. 4: eee es ee Department of Education 

Liquors and adulterations, control of....... Department of Health 

Maitonant diseases a. 02. snvee oc ge. eek pela’ Institute for the Study of Malig- 
nant Diseases 

INS eCOlOeICANs 2 fen ae tora Ble Department of Education 

Maps of public sites and grants........... State Engineer 

Marine diSMERes.. Me ct cc wns ee vin eect Conservation Commission 

Medicine; control/of sale. 22. ..-0:..-.9- State Board of Pharmacy 

Ci aleiindtattie ya et is ne era caey tal sa usc Department of Education 

Mineral productionn a...) 5a5460 2... 250s. Department of Education 


Mineral waters (Saratoga Springs)......... Conservation Commission 
IME OSyes eee RT ene pi eh) cilia) Department of Education 


30 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


SCIENCE DEPARTMENT 
A Tein Set iNGeip ran Lad Tae 2 eo Oe A se ce Department of Education 
Mines and quarries, inspection of.......... State Industrial Commission 
Miminerelaims tiled) 5). .0 00 eS Secretamy ol state 
IMMosemibocombrol sy ce el Seiya nue pecs Department of Education 
VISTIROOTIS ice ylita ev ute pga con ives cos rt wel Department of Education 
Naturalimonuments) 2140 e45.75.... 4... _Departmenton edtteattenm 
Navigation, science and practice of, instruc- 

TEWONGT, SWAN er Atty a LO Yn aI Le A at IA New York State Nautical School 
Oilbonodtuetions cela ctu ie ny. iee Department of Education 
Omithology . 0-2). Oi kale se Department of Education 
IAlEOMLOLOSivg wate tae nic Nines apelin cm Lane Department of Education 
atl @l eave Mews tain eel Ach wile yn am pt ee Department of Health 
pharmeacetubical iolants| a ee ua eed sein Department of Education 
milan diseasesmstudy, and) controlioke. aes. Farms and Markets and Depart- 
| ment of Education 
Poisons, controlof sale of /)).)))4.).....4... tate Boardiof# Pharmacy, 
Pollution of the Bronx river, prevention of. Bronx Parkway Commission 
Rotalolexweaters a weiss ceca nt conan Department of Health 
Propagation of fshiandssame:. eee... oe. Conservation Commission 
Quarantine establishment................ Health Officer, Port of New York 
Ovwarimyaprocducts meq. Schule che ora ae Department of Education 
INCTORESEALION Den einen. Velma), vot ane Rite eee Conservation Commission 
RAVEL MIA PTOVEMeNt saci. seine eee. Conservation Commission 
River regulation by storage reservoirs...... Conservation Commission 
Rock testing iotroadumaterials.) yn. 7c Department of Highways 
Safety and health, tested and promoted.... American Museum of Safety 
Satlitatay, CMSIMCe HIM. lees cet lo anon ame Bis Department of Health 
Saratoga Springs, control and development 

DUC walk dare ee am SIL ASD RPO es a gE Men Cg a ee Conservation Commission 
SEROlOR fash ie eis cael Beli ne dnd ica eile itera Department of Health 
Sirallegte Stine aa ane nae ma ehinee eile Cea Ne ee se State School of Clay-working and 

: Ceramics 
Shell fish, propagation and protection of... Conservation Commission 
Mestineror rock anG@icement ial es eee Department of Highways 
Moposraphicsunveyine.). ne ieons ieee ee State Engineer 
Aer CULEUITS Sia eyes Lae anni raha Conservation Commission 
Trees, control of injurious insects on....... Department of Education 
WEILER MMSECES Rn Miata iceuoh i en aac ae a Department of Education 
WVAUEEI SUP Ply; peers Miswek te Mandan aye ae Conservation Commission 
Waters, impounding of, other than for canal 

SVS UCTIM = AOR TAU Utica tons oh oeainiey Mallayuneure Drag il Conservation Commission 
NVieters potable. cml a Niiieun ode ves sh ania Department of Health 
LON OLY Nahe ice A iat Ried: eit aA Department of Education 


Publications. Some of the present publications of the Museum 
are worthy of special notice. ‘‘ The Wild Flowers of New York,” to 
which reference has been made in a previous report, is now prac- 
tically completed, the color plates, 264 in number, have been made 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 31 


and the letter press is now printing. It is hoped to issue this book 
in two volumes in the course of the current calendar year and in 
view of its comprehensive character, elaboration and perfection of 
its plates, it seems well to interpolate here the introductory letter 
of communication which intimates the influences and causes leading 
up to the preparation of this monograph. 


The scientific survey of this State, established in 1836 under the title ‘‘ The 
Natural History of New York,’’ embraces in its monumental reports two volumes 
treating of the flora of the State. These volumes, prepared by the distinguished 
botanist, John Torrey, bear the inscription: Flora of the State of New York; 
Comprising Full Descriptions of all the Indigenous and Naturalized Plants hitherto 
Discovered in the State, with Remarks on Their Economical and Medical Properties 
(1843). The species described in this work were entirely of the phenogamous 
or flowering plants. Until that time no summary of the New York flora had 
been brought together; and the service rendered to the people of the State by 
the publication of this compendium was of a high order and was received with 
enthusiastic appreciation. Doctor Torrey’s books served the needs of the time 
and expressed the state of its knowledge of the New York flora. 

Seventy-five years have passed, and in that long stretch of time botanical 
science has grown widely and apace. The field of cryptogamous botany, that 
which deals with the flowerless plants, the mushrooms, mosses, lichens and their 
kind, was not entered in these early reports; it was obscure and little understood; 
its mostly inconspicuous growths did not attract the eye or invite the observer; 
nor were its important relations to the economy of the community even suspected. 

The early official botanical investigations of the State were formally terminated 
by the publication of John Torrey’s reports. Not till 1867 did the need of con- 
tinuous official attention to this department of science meet the recognition 
of the Regents of the University. In that year Charles Horton Peck was desig- 
nated to take charge of such botanical collections as had accumulated in the 
State Museum, and not long thereafter Mr Peck was officially appointed the 
State Botanist. To the botanical service of the State Mr Peck thereafter dedicated 
himself without reserve for the rest of his long life. He added much to the store 
of knowledge of the flowering plants, but the veiled world of the flowerless plants 
the more invited him and to it he specially gave his labors, leaving behind him 
a harvest of knowledge of them and a repute for his intricate researches which 
ranks him high on the roll of great botanists. Doctor Peck spared no effort, 
however, to increase the store of knowledge of all the flora of the State and he is 
the creator of the great state herbarium. After fifty years of unstinted devo- 
tion to his science and to his State, Doctor Peck fell asleep in honor, in the year 
EOQU7: 

Since the date of Torrey’s report, the flowering plants have been the subject 
of study in all parts of the Commonwealth. Botanical societies and local stu- 
dents have multiplied; records have grown; the demand for information has 
greatly increased; but there has been no reliable exposition of such information 
accessible to these students. 

It has been with this purpose of meeting a wide demand and of setting forth 
with such excellence as present knowledge and perfected modes of illustration 
could afford, that the present work, The Wild Flowers of New York, has been 


32 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


projected. The undertaking, bound to be an arduous one, has not been entered 
upon hastily. The advice of the leading botanists of this State and country was 
sought as to its timeliness, its scope, mode of presentation and illustration. 
The interested public will find it to be not a highly technical guide, couched in 
closely analytical descriptions, but a comparatively brief text, untechnical so 
far as the theme permits, accompanied by color illustrations taken from the 
growing plants. The present State Botanist, Dr Homer D. House, is the respon- 
sible author of the work; he has not only prepared the text and its arrangement, 
but has supervised in detail the color photography; he has accompanied the 
photographers into the field on every visit and has selected every subject which 
is here reproduced. 

The color illustrations must speak for themselves. They have been executed 
with most painstaking care by the quadricolor process, and the living and grow- 
ing plants have been reproduced in their colors as near to those of Nature as 
now seems possible. The Matthews-Northrup Company of Buffalo, and the 
Zeese-Wilkinson Company of New York are to be credited with the quality of 
the coloration and printing of these plates. 

As such, then, these volumes are given to the people of the State and as such, 
we believe, they would have this service rendered. 


The volumes of Museum Memoir 12, parts 1 and 2, constituting 
“ The Birds of New York” and the portfolios of color plates taken 
from these volumes, are in constant demand. Indeed, the demand 
does not diminish and becomes much freshened with the approach of 
every spring. From these facts it is obvious that the vanishing 
editions of this publication must be replenished in order to meet 
the call, not only from the citizens of this State, but from every 
quarter where the study of the birds and their protection is 
pursued. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I917 33 


IV 


THE SCIENTIFIC RESERVATIONS BELONGING TO THE 
STATE MUSEUM 


Three reservations are controlled by the State Museum and have 
been deeded to the institution by the generosity of citizens of the 
sine. ‘hese are: 

1 The Clark reservation near Jamesville, Onondaga county. 

2 The Lester ledge or Cryptozoon park, town of Greenfield, near 
Saratoga Springs. 

3 Starks Knob or the Northumberland volcano at Schuylerville. 

liehas mot been practicable to expend much money on the care 
and needed repairs of these reservations. A wardenship of the 
Clark reservation has been established by the appointment of C. E. 
Archambo as a deputy sheriff of Onondaga county, with power to 
prevent invasions and any form of vandalism so that this, which is 
the largest o° the reservations, covering something over t1oo acres, 
has been reasonably cared for. The donor has generously provided 
an effective entranceway of stone and has done her part. The 
place is much in need of proper fencing and of a limited amount of 
road construction. 

Two years ago the Lester park was monumented with explanatory 
tablets set on concrete foundations, but the growth of the vegetation 
requires annual care in order to keep well exposed the Cryptozoon 
pavement for which the reservation has been set apart. 

The Starks Knob reservation has received no attention whatever. 
It stands as when it was given and its boundary lines have not been 
monumented. This is in very special need of attention as well as 
protection to keep the stone, which is quite suitable for road mending, 
from being taken away. 


34 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


V 


DEPARTMENT PUBLICATIONS 


During the year the bulletins of the Museum have been issued as 
rapidly as circumstances permitted. They have the following 
numbers and titles: 

t90 The Mining and Quarry Industry of New York State. By 

D. H. Newland 

tot Geology of the Vicinity of Ogdensburg (Brier Hill, Ogdens- 

burg and Red Mills Quadrangles). By H. P. Cushing 

192 Geology of the Blue Mountain, New York, Quadrangle. By 

William J. Miller 

193 The Adirondack Mountains. By William J. Miller 

194 Household and Camp Insects. By Ephraim Porter Felt 

195 Postglacial Features of the Upper Hudson Valley. By H. L. 

Fairchild 

196 Director’s Report for 1916 

197 Report of the State Botanist for 1916. By Hi, Motes 

198 32d Report of the State Entomologist 1916. By E. P. Felt 
199 Key to American Insect Galls.' By E. P. Felt 

The State Museum Bulletin is now issued as a regular monthly 
periodical. This arrangement holds back in some degree the number 
of reports which can be issued in any one year, as it seems imprac- 
ticable with the present service to issue more than one a month, 
while it might be possible for the staff to prepare more than twelve 
2) WAL. : 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 35 


NEE 


REPORT ON THE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY 


Resurvey of war minerals supplies. Directly upon the entry of 
the country into the war an active canvass was made through the 
war minerals committee, organized by the National Research Coun- 
cil, to ascertain the available stocks of minerals in the country which 
are essential to war industries, the right of present production of 
these exigent supplies and the possibility of increasing them. Many 
minerals were imperatively needed, among them sulphur, manganese, 
graphite, of all of which our importation was very large and the 
domestic production relatively small; moreover, these large importa- 
tions were using important ship tonnage already gravely needed 
for other purposes. A general demand was sent out for a resurvey 
of domestic supplies of these and other minerals and a general speed- 
ing up of domestic production. Such service, it was found, could 
most effectively be made through state organizations, and immedi- 
ately upon the condition becoming evident, work was begun in 
New York and was extended to cover examinations of all the min- 
erals required. The pyrite deposits of northwestern New York were 
carefully studied by. A. F. Buddington and the report thereon pub- 
lished promptly as Bulletin 1 of the New York State Defense Council, 
entitled Report on the Pyrite and Pyrrhotite Veins in Jefferson and 
St Lawrence Counties. The zinc and pyrite deposits of the Edwards 
district in St Lawrence county were also examined with renewed 
care and a report on these issued as Bulletin 2 of the State Defense 
Council, The Zinc-pyrite Deposits of the Edwards District, New 
York, the work being done by David H. Newland, who had given 
close study to the important developments of the zinc industry in 
that region since its inception. The results of these examinations 
of sources of supply of sulphur and zinc have been of importance 
as new supplies of large moment were indicated and increased pro- 
duction has resulted. 

Contemporaneously with these undertakings a study was inaugu- 
rated of the manganese deposits of Columbia county, regarding 
which there were only historic records. It was nevertheless 
thought important to leave no stone unturned to locate any 
possible deposit of this kind. The early geologists in their reports 
of 1837-42 indicated the presence of this ore in that region; 
but the examination made under present auspices by Prof. Nelson 

2 


36 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


C. Dale, using surface and earth auger determinations, has shown 
that there is but little of the ore in occurrence there and what there 
is of it is of low grade. 

There has been a further demand for the mineral molybdenum, 
and as the occurrence of it was known in this State Mr Newland 
examined the locality in Westchester county with reference to 
possible production, but under existing conditions the supply does 
not seem to be available as it is too widely and minutely disseminated 
to make a practical working proposition. 

The study of the graphite was then taken up for revision. New 
York has for years been one of the largest producers of this mineral, 
but with the curtailment of the Ceylon importations it seemed quite 
imperative to locate additional supplies if this were possible. In 
this work Mr Newland, who has long experience with the practical 
side of graphite geology, was aided by Harold L. Alling, who has 
carried out his investigations with a fine degree of elaboration, 
involving the location, in some instances, of new deposits, in others 
Of imereased extent, of present ore bodies: Dhis’ report micemengeaa 
press under the title of Adirondack Graphite Deposits. 

As the items mentioned have suddenly become an important 
national war asset, there has been further effort to make precise 
valuations of supplies available for military requirements, and this 
phase of the work has been also in the general charge of the war 
minerals committee. It may be said that this committee was 
organized at the instance of the National Research Coumeige@minae 
Council of National Defense and is composed of representatives of 
the United States Bureau of Mines, United States Geological Sur- 
vey, Association of State Geologists and American Institute of 
Mining Engineers. 

Other lines of work im the museum! in the ditectiompongrme 
production of immediate needs are under way or in contemplation. 
There has been inaugurated a special study of the glass sands and 
refractory materials of the State in the hope of meeting the vastly 
increased demands of the glass manufacturers; and there is also 
operating a restudy of the salt supplies of the State with a reason- 
able expectation of providing knowledge which would help to meet 
the newer and more refined applications of sodium salts both for 
military and domestic purposes; for sodium must, in some degree 
at least, substitute potassium in such manufactures as glass and other 
compounds in which it has heretofore been thought that potassium 
was indispensable. Further investigations planned have special 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 BY. 


bearing upon the location of abrasive materials of various grades 
and the determination of the abrasive quality of materials here- 
tofore neglected. 

Inventory of road-making and concreting materials. A resurvey 
of the entire Atlantic seaboard from Maine to Texas, inaugurated 
by the geology committee of the National Research Council and 
which enlisted the services of a large number of experts, also involved 
the State of New York. A very large amount of careful detailed 
work was put upon this problem of bringing together for quick 
availability, classified records of the distribution of all materials 
suitable for the building of highways, for construction, whether of 
fortifications or buildings, and for cement and concrete work. ‘So 
far as New York is concerned, the work further involved the loca- 
tion, within the belt indicated, of every natural and artificial rock 
outcrop, every stone pile, every stone fence, bank of gravel or sand, 
with data of production, maps showing location, tables showing 
rates of transportation and routing, and all matter relating to quick 
assimilation of the material when needed. This report was duly 
produced in somewhat voluminous form and filed for access with 
the geology committee of the National Research Council. It has 
already proved of very high service, especially in the matter of 
- locating concrete materials, as since the completion of the work the 
national government has begun the building of concrete ships and 
concrete barges for the New York State barge canal, on a very 
large scale. The report promises to be serviceable in many other 
directions. 

Mining and quarry bulletin. The annual summary of the min- 
eral industries with production statistics for the calendar year 1916 
was not completed until late in the following year on account of the 
press of other matters. The report reveals a rather unsettled con- 
dition in many branches traceable to the disturbance of trade through 
the foreign situation, and unusual activity .1n certain restricted 
fields. In comparison with the more or less balanced development 
that has characterized the course of progress in preceding years, the 
trend was uneven and indicative of instability in the fundamental 
market situation. Still the value of the production of materials, 
estimated in terms of the crude ores and minerals at mine or quarry, 
amounted to $45,947,947, which was larger than that reported in 
any previous year. One of the items that helped to expand the 
total was zinc ore from the newly opened mines in St Lawrence 
county, which rapidly attained important rank in the industry. 


38 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Regular operations began in 1915, but last year was the first in which 
they were continuous for the twelvemonth. - Notable gains were 
reported also by the iron mines. 

The pyrite deposits. Supplementing the mention already made 
of the investigation of pyrite which was directed particularly to the 
commercial possibilities of the deposits, and the work done by 
Dr A. F. Buddington in the more promising of the known occur- 
rences in the western Adirondack region, it may be added that the 
geology of the ores and the problems presented by their gneiss had 
been studied previously by Prof. C. H. Smyth, jr, whose paper 
appeared in the issue of the Report of the Director of the New York 
State Museum for 1912. The present investigations showed that 
the more important deposits occur in groups and that these are 
arranged in long, narrow bands that follow the general structural 
trend, that is, have a. northeasterly strike: Seven such belucvare 
recognized, of which the more important ores (five in number) form 
a single zone 40 miles long and 3 to 4 miles wide that reaches from 
the vicinity of Antwerp and Theresa on the southwest to Pyrites 
near Canton on the northeast. The individual ore-bands consist 
of disseminations, bunches and veinlets of pyrite so as to give a 
more or less uniform content of the mineral, in a gangue of which 
chlorite is a distinctive ingredient. The bands and lenses attain a 
width up to 4o or 50 feet but usually are around ro to 20 feet. They 
have marked persistence on the surface, having been followed for 
distances of 1500 to 2600 feet in individual workings and so far as 
explored show a similar continuity in depth. Only a few of the 
bands have been actually exploited; those at Stellaville, Pyrites and 
the Cole mine near Gouverneur have yielded most of the ore that 
has been named im the past, Where are resounces, still avaueile 
undoubtedly to afford an output four or five times as large as the 
current supply. Since the report was issued, preparations awe 
been in progress to extend the production. The need for increasing 
the American supplies of the mineral has become especially urgent 
with the practical cessation of imports of the Spanish sand 
Canadian ores. 

_ Zinc-pyrite ores. In the Edwards district, St Lawrence county, 
long associated with the fibrous talc industry, occur bodies of admixed 


zinc blende and pyrite which lately have come into prominence. 


They have quite different features than the pyrite ores just described, 
consisting of lenses, bands and disseminations of the two sulphides 
in dolomitic hmestone. They also are smaller in size, the width not 
exceeding 15 feet as a maximum in the developed and exposed 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 39 


‘bodies. The ores are even, granular aggregates and very compact, 
lacking the usual character of vein fillings, rather resembling the 
country limestone in their textures. In the richer samples there is 
little else to be seen than sphalerite and pyrite. The proportions 
of the two minerals may vary widely in different deposits, but in 
the usual run there is more blende than pyrite. The occurrences, 
of which a dozen or more have so far been located, lie within the 
main belt of limestone in the stretch from Edwards to Sylvia lake, 
about to miles long. They are not alined or confined to any 
horizon, but seem to prefer the border zone, where the limestone 
is in contact with granitized quartz schists and gneisses and where 
the limestone is charged with siliceous environment. An investiga- 
tion of the deposits, of which the field work and geological studies 
were performed by D. H. Newland, with the cooperation of Prof. 
C. H. Smyth, jr, who has kindly undertaken the independent study 
of the origin of the ores, was so far completed that the general features 
of the occurrences and their economic relations could be appropri- 
ately treated in a report, which, as already stated, has been pub- 
lished. Professor Smyth’s contribution on the mineral relations 
and genesis of the ores has been practically completed. 

Manganese ores. In the reports of the First Geological Survey, 
1837-43, W. W. Mather makes mention of the presence of man- 
ganese ore in Columbia and Dutchess counties which at that time 
seems to have been the object of commercial mining. In his account, 
an estimate of the deposits places the available supply at a figure 
so large that it would be a valuable asset under the existing strin- 
gency in the market, particularly as the information is vouchsafed 
that the crude ores lend themselves readily to treatment for removal 
of the earthy impurities. Prof. Nelson C. Dale undertook an 
investigation during the past summer, which covered the principal 
localities mentioned in the early reports. Considerable difficulty 
was encountered at first in relocating some of the old mines, but 
after the nature of the deposits was once established the work was 
expedited. It was found that the ores are an earthy form of man- 
ganese (wad) and are restricted to certain upland swamps along a 
belt that extends north and south through Canaan, Hillsdale and 
Ancram townships. The manganese, apparently, has its source in 
the rocks on the higher ground, from which the drainage first enters 
the bogs where the minute quantity of the metal held in solution is 
precipitated, aiter a similar manner to the formation of ~ bor ”’ 
iron ore. ‘The deposits are restricted in area and thin, hardly justi- 
fying their development under present-day conditions. 


AO NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


AREAL GEOLOGY 


In the work directed toward the completion of the great geologica! 
map of the State on a scale basis of one mile to the inch, some progresS 
was accomplished although conditions made it obligatory to curtail 
the work somewhat and much of it was interrupted in the course 
of the season. Prof. H. P. Cushing, who has been connected with 
the areal survey of the Adirondacks for more than twenty years, 
completed his survey of the Gouverneur quadrangle and his final 
report is now in preparation. 

Gouverneur quadrangle. A report upon the progress of the work 
was made in 1916, in which the absence of large areas of intrusive 
rocks was commented upon, and at the same time the frequency of 
granite sills intruded into the Grenville strata was noted, and the 
contrast between this district, with its abundant and continuous 
Grenville exposures and lack of large bodies of intrusives, and the 
main Adirondack region to the east and south was set forth. The 
granite sills are regarded as upward protrusions from a large body 
of syenite below ground, which followed the Grenville structures 
as the lines of least resistance, and the contrast with the more easterly 
region is attributed to lesser altitude and erosion in the Gouverneur 
region. 

The most important result of the so17 field work wastme 
demonstration afforded of the closely folded structure of the Gren- 
ville rocks in the region, which le in a series of closely appressed, 
pitching, isoclinal folds. The relationships between the Grenville 
rocks and the granite sills suggest that the folding occurred before 
the intrusion of the sills. These matters will be discussed in detail 
in the final report. 

Lake Placid quadrangle. The final report on this field was com- 
pleted by) Prot Wo |. Miller and is mow im course on piimanmnies 

Schroon Lake quadrangle. This area was also completed during 
the summer of 1917, and its geology shows many features of much 
interest, as an unusually fine display of many types of Adirondack 
rocks occurs within the quadrangle. 

Grenville strata mappable as such occupy about 12 square miles 
of the quadrangle. The largest areas are in the vicinity of Minerva 
and Olmstedville. Many other masses are simply small and large 
inclusions in the syenite-granite series. All the usual types of 
Grenville, as well as some interesting structures were observed. 

The oldest intrusive of the region is the anorthosite, which exhibits 
two rather well-defined, mappable facies. Of these, the Marcy 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR 1917 AI 


anorthosite is usually very coarse grained, bluish gray, and highly 
feldspathic, though locally developed gabbroid facies are common. 
It makes up the greater bulk of the anorthosite, which occupies 
most of the northeastern half of the quadrangle. The other facies, 
known as Whiteface anorthosite, is usually medium grained, light 
gray, and more or less gabbroid. This is a broader development of 
the Marcy anorthosite. Many small and large inclusions of anor- 
thosite, chiefly the Whiteface type, occur in the syenite-granite 
series as far out as 7 or 8 miles from the main body of the anorthosite. 

Next in order of age is the syenite-granite series, which is clearly 
intrusive into both the Grenville and the anorthosite. It is wholly 
confined to the southwestern half of the quadrangle where the 
granite facies is the most prominent of all the rocks. 

A rock type of particular interest, called the Keene gnetss, is well 
developed, and observations within the quadrangle have thrown 
much light upon its origin. The two largest bodies mapped each 
occupy several square miles. This Keene gneiss is considered to 
have resulted from the actual digestion or assimilation of anortho- 
site by the syenite-granite magma. 

Gabbro stocks of the usual Adirondack kind are prominently devel- 
oped in the southwestern half of the quadrangle, but none occur 
within the great body of anorthosite. Each of the two stocks covers 
several square miles. 

Pegmatite and diabase dikes, both later than. the gabbro, are 
moderately represented. Also a few dikes of aplite occur, some of 
them younger than the gabbro and some probably older. | 

A small area of dolomitic limestone has long been known to occur 
in Schroon Lake village. It is probably of Little Falls (Upper 
Cambrian) age and about 135 feet thick. 

In 1916 an outlier of Potsdam sandstone was discovered from 
13 to 2 miles southwest of Schroon Lake village. It is about one- 
half of a mile long. 

In 1917 an area of about 2 acres of sandstone and dolomite, 
belonging to the Potsdam-Little Falls series, was discovered in the 
schroon valley 7 miles north of Schroon Lake village and one-fourth 
of a mile east of the border of the Schroon Lake quadrangle. 

Fifteen faults and zones of excessive jointing have been located, 
and these have notably influenced the topographic development. 
A number of conspicuous ridges and valleys with north-northeast 
strike have been determined by these fault zones of weakness in 
the rocks. 


42 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Pleistocene deposits are widespread, being especially thick in the 
more prominent valleys where the ancient rocks are in many places 
effectually concealed. The general movement of the great ice sheet 
was a little to the east of south across the quadrangle. 

Phelps quadrangle. This quadrangle was surveyed some years 
ago by D. Dana Luther, but as some refined points have come up 
for discussion and determination, certain of these were specially 
restudied by George H. Chadwick, whose report follows. Mr 
Chadwick’s determinations are supplementary to Mr Luther’s and 
will be utilized in the publication of this survey. 

The waterlime strata (Bertie and Akron) extend across the northern 
end of the quadrangle paralleling the railways, and have been 
washed fairly clear of drift by the glacial drainage that followed 
the Victor-Phelps channel. Good, continuous sections are scarce. 

The best exposure is the new quarry at Oaks Corners, near the 
east edge of the quadrangle. ‘This is, in fact, an unusually instructive 
locality. Basal layers of the Onondaga limestone cap the west wall 
of the quarry. At some points these: rest directly on the Silurian 
waterlimes, while at others within a few rods 2 or 3 feet of black- 
pebble conglomerate varying to a nearly pure coarse white sand- 
stone may intervene. The numerous fossil corals in these lentils 
indicate that they may be early Onondaga (Springvale?) rather than 
Oriskany. 

Remarkable evidence of pre-Onondaga weathering is seen in the 
underlying dolomitic waterlimes, while ‘‘ Oriskany ’’ sand is found 
infiltrating fissures in these beds even 25 feet below their present 
upper limit. The contrast with the Onondaga layers above is 
further emphasized by the development of a peculiar system of 
sloping joints in the weathered waterlimes, rendering them difficult 
to blast. 

No difficulty is experienced. at this quarry in identifying the 
minor subdivisions of the group that were instituted for the western 
sections (Bul. Geol. Soc. Amer. 28:173). The upper 14 feet of beds 
of geodic cavities and small Stromatopora are the Akron dolomite. 
Beneath are nearly 8 feet of hard, dark (“‘ black’) waterlime refer- 
able to the horizon of the Buffalo or Walliamsville cement bed, 
(“ Buffalo” is preoccup’ed) and nearly 4 feet of bluish, argillaceous 
limes representing the Scajaquada shale. Drillings in the quarry 
floor have shown that the latter division continues downward for 
another 4 or 5 feet and is then succeeded by the typical chocolate 
dolomite of the Falkirk division. After 6 or 8 feet farther, however, 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9Q17 43 


the latter gives way to s or 6 feet of beds of a light ashen color whose 
full significance is not yet understood. Analyses of the drill samples 
are being made to determine whether these are the gypseous shale of 
the Camillus, or the whitish beds of the lower Falkirk such as directly 
underlie the Onondaga limestone at Honeoye Falls. 

A preliminary reconnaissance of about 5 miles, from Oaks to 
northwest of Phelps Junction, seems to indicate great variations in 
the thickness of the interval between the Camillus and the Onondaga, 
with subtraction and addition of beds at both base and summit of 
the waterlimes. 

Richfield Springs quadrangle. The field work here was carried on 
by Mr C. A. Hartnagel and the area lies to the south of the Mohawk 
valley, including parts of Herkimer and Otsego counties, with a 
small strip of Montgomery county at the east. Mr Hartnagel 
makes the following provisional report on this work. 

The area studied includes formations of the Ordovician, Silurian 
and Devonian systems. 

The lowest formation in the quadrangle is the Trenton limestone, 
which extends as a spur from the Little Falls quadrangle. Above 
this is the Canajoharie shale. The relation of this shale to the 
Dolgeville beds has afforded some difficulty but present paleonto- 
logical studies by Dr Ruedemann give promise of clarifying the 
situation. 

Above the Canajoharie shale, especially well shown along Nowa- 
daga creek, is an excellent and what is probably the most complete 
section of the Utica shale in New York State. Not only is the 
transition from the Canajoharie favorably shown, but there are 
present several fossil zones and its very gradual change to the Frank- 
fort shale is exhibited in a very satisfactory way. 

Of the Silurian formations, the Oneida conglomerate, the several 
stratigraphic divisions of the Clinton formation and the Bertie 
waterlime, are present but have not been found in force east of this 
quadrangle. Five divisions of the Clinton formation are recognized 
in ascending order as follows: 


a Sandstones and shales. The sandstone greatly predominates. 
Much of it coarse, cross-bedded and of a red color 

'b Oolitic ore . 

c Green shale with fossils 

d “ Red flux’ ore — not well developed and rarely exposed 

e Gray sandstone 


The Vernon red shale which is found in the western half of the 


44 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


quadrangle comes to an end before Deck is reached, since here the 
Camillus rests upon the upper gray Clinton sandstone. 

The Camillus crosses the quadrangle as a well-defined formation 
and grades into the Bertie waterlime. 

The Cobleskill is present and here lithologically much like the 
Bertie. The presence, however, of characteristic fossils clearly 
defines its position between the Bertie and Rondout waterlimes. | 
The Rondout as a rule is not well or frequently exposed, due to its 
position at the base of the often steep-faced Manlius where there is 
always considerable talus material. 

Of the Lower Devonian formations, the Coeymans and Onondaga 
limestones are present in great force and for the most part are sepa- 
rated by only a few feet of Esopus grit. Only at one place was. an 
outcrop of the Oriskany observed, and here but a few inches thick. 
No outcrops of the New Scotland beds were observed but they 
undoubtedly extend into the quadrangle from the east, since a 
well-defined exposure is seen one-half of a mile east of the limits of 
the map. It is well established that neither the Becraft limestone 
nor the Schoharie grit extend as far west as this quadrangle. 

Above the Onondaga limestone the Marcellus black shale is well 
developed and about 25 feet from the base is found the Cherry 
Valley limestone, named from Cherry Valley which is located along 
the east boundary of the quadrangle. 

Above: the Marcellus black shale the transitional beds marking 
the gradual change from the Marcellus into the Hamilton beds, are 
included under the Cardiff shale. The overlying Hamilton beds, 
which are here undivided stratigraphically, are the youngest rocks 
within the district and form the high range of hills of the southern 
part of the quadrangle. 

Of particular interest is the glacial geology of this quadrangle, for 
here centers an area of drumlins second only in importance in this 
State to the drumlin region of western, New York. The outstanding 
feature of the drumlins is their direction, which is here east and west, 
while the western New York drumlins have a north and south 
direction. 


GLACIAL GEOLOGY 


Professor Fairchild spent the season in a general summary of his 
important study of postglacial continental uplift of northeastern 
America, the data for which are largely based on his long-continued 
studies in New York. In going farther afield for the application of 
his conclusions and accumulation of additional data, an extensive 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7~ A5 


area was covered by him, including Ontario, Quebec, from Lake 
Nipissing to Gaspé, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, Maine, New 
Hampshire, and a review of the Connecticut valley north of Green- 
field, Mass. 

With precision, or at least fair approximation, the amount of 
glacial depression of the land and postglacial uplift was determined 
at over 60 stations. The deltas built in the sea-level waters by 
south-leading streams were used as the main criteria. The result is 
given in a map of isobases, or lines of equal uplift, which shows the 
amount of land rise and the area affected. It is found that the 
center of the doming uplift is in Quebec, between James bay, and 
Quebec city, with a rise of over 1000 feet. It also appears that 
Newfoundland was the locus of a distinct ice cap and area of land 
oscillation. 

The detailed description of this study is published in the Bulletin 
of the Geological Society of America, volume 29; with abstracts in 
Science and in the Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences. 

The glacial survey of the Catskill mountains. Dr John Rach 
has been engaged for two years in the study of the glacial phenomena 
of the south and southwestern Catskills with the plan of continuing 
this work to its completion. Doctor Rich has now been commissioned 
as captain in the War Intelligence Office, and this service will doubt- 
less interfere with the progress of this undertaking during the term 
of the war. Captain Rich has reported the following with reference 
to his last year’s work. 

Reconnaissance mapping was carried southward along the south- 
eastern base of the Catskills and the valley of Rondout creek as 
far as Summitville, where strong terminal moraines and outwash 
plains mark the position of an important stand of the CE. 

The eastern base of the Catskills from High Point to Summitville 
is marked by numerous marginal drainage channels, sand plains and 
hanging deltas. At Napanoch is a large hanging delta built by a 
stream which flowed from Esopus valley through Peek-o-Moose 
gulf at the time the ice was banked high up on the eastern front of 
the range at High Point and a lake, with discharges at Sumn.tville, 

was held up in the Rondout valley. These conditions furnish data 
- for the determination of the slope of the ice tongue in the Hudson 
valley at the time the delta was building. 

An examination of the northwestern end of the northeastern 
range of the Catskills revealed the fact that a very heavy moraine is 
banked against the range near Broome Center, and that after the 


40 | NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


abandonment of the Grand Gorge outlet, the waters of the lake in 
the Schoharie valley found their next lower escape at an elevation 
of about 1210 feet to Catskill creek through the col 2 miles north of 
Franklinton. North of Broome Center, in the valley of Keyser kill, 
a splendid series of hanging deltas at various levels was built into a 
lake whose waters dropped through several stages down to the level 
of the Grand Gorge outlet. 


PALEONTOLOGY 


The Museum. Reference has been made to the installation of a 
group displaying the fauna of the Portage epoch rehabilitated with 
its organic parts. The success of this group is so striking and its 
purpose so satisfactorily accomplished that it is planned to present 
from time to time other rehabilitations of the several extinct faunas 
of our older rocks. 

The general systematic collections in paleontology having been 
fully installed, an additional effort has been made to facilitate its 
interpretation and educational worth. This has partly been done by 
installing a case carrying the legend, What 1s a fossil? In this is 
skilfully arranged a display of the various modes of fossilization, or 
preservation of fossils, with full explanatory labels, so that the 
student finds herein a complete visual introduction to this phase of 
paleontology. This work has been very successfully done by 
Winifred Goldring. | : 

Investigations. Doctor Ruedemann has continued his study of 
the Utica and Lorraine formations of the Mohawk and Black River 
valleys. Further study of sections of the Utica shale added more 
details to the establishment of three horizons in the Utica shale, 
while continued careful study of the section of the Lorraine gulf and 
the elaboration of the collections from our Lorraine beds brought 
out the fact that the Lorraine formation of New York consists of 
two distinct divisions, the lower Lorraine, corresponding to the 
Eden of the Ohio valley, and the upper Lorraine, corresponding to a 
part at least of the Maysville of the western Cincinnatian. Alto- 
gether we have been able to distinguish eight life zones in the Lorraine 
format.on of New York, the first three of which correspond respec- 
tively to the Economy, Southgate and McMicken zones of the Eden, 
the first or Fulton zone of the Eden being represented by the black 
shale that underlies the lower Lorraine. Zone 4 shows relationship 
to the Mount Hope beds of the Maysville, Zone 5a to the Fairmount 
and Zones 5b-8 to the Bellevue beds of the Maysville. 

The finding of many new species as well as of many forms hitherto 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQ17 47 


unknown to this State, in the Utica and Lorraine formations during 
the investigation of the stratigraphy of these formations, has led to 
a revision of the faunas which requires many new illustrations. 
Devonian crinoids. This work is progressing although it has 
been carried forward under some difficulties. The crinoids of the 
Devonian formations of New York constitute a very interesting and, 
for the most part, undescribed or imperfectly described group which 
has received too little attention. They have been heretofore studied 
casually but always with the purpose of covering the field exhaust- 
ively. This final form of the work is now in a fair degree toward 
completion. Miss Goldring has submitted the following statement 
as to the scope and condition of the work. 


Devonian Crinoids 

The descriptive part of the monograph on the Crinoids is very 
nearly completed. At the present time the descriptions include 131 
species and 8 varieties belonging to 53 genera, among which are 
14 new genera, 46 new species and 6 new varieties. The lists of 
the genera, species and varieties are given below. : 

With the completed drawings and diagrams and those still to be 
made, the descriptive part of the monograph will be illustrated with 
about 400 drawings, 25 diagrams and 8 photographs. Numerous 
text figures will be used to illustrate the general discussion. 


I List of Genera 


A Camerata 


1 Acacocrinus W. & Sp. 13 Hadrocrinus Lyon 

2 Acanthocrinus Roemer 14 Hystricrinus Hinde. 

3 Aorocrinus W. & Sp. 15 Lecocrinus gen. nov. 

4 Clarkeocrinus gen. nov. 16 Mariacrinus Hall 

5 Clonocrinus Quenstedt 17 Marsipocrinus Bather 

6 Cordylocrinus Angelin 18 Megistocrinus Owen & Shum. 

7 Corocrinus gen. nov. 19 Melocrinus Goldfuss 

8 Cyttarocrinus gen. nov. 20 Pterinocrinus gen. nov. 

9 Dimerocrinus Phillips 21 Rhodocrinus J. S. Miller 
10 Dolatocrinus Lyon 22 Sphaerotocrinus gen. nov. 
11 Gennaeocrinus W. & Sp. 23 Springerocrinus gen. nov. 
12 Gilbertsocrinus Phillips 24 Thammnocrinus gen. nov. 


25 Thylacocrinus O2hlert 
B Flexibilia 
Clidochirus A ngelin 


I 
2 Eutaxocrinus Springer 
3 Taxocrinus Phillips 


48 


C 


+ 
4+ OO ON Aw BW N 


— 


0 


NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Inadunata 
Anamesocrinus gen. nov. 12 Glossocrinus gen. nov. 
Ancyrocrinus Hall 13 Hallocrinus gen. nov. 
Arachnocrinus Meek & Worthen 14 Halysiocrinus Ulrich em. Bather 
Barycrinus Wachsnuth 15 Haplocrinus Ste:ninger 
Batherocrinus gen. nov. 16 Hypsocrinus Springer & Slocom 
Botryocrinus Angelin 17 Lasiocrinus Kirk 
Brachiocrinus Hall 18 Maragnicrinus Whitfield 
Catactocrinus gen. nov. 19 Myrtillocrinus Sandberger 
Corematocrinus gen. nov. 20 Poteriocrinus Miller 
Deltacrinus Ulrich 21 Schultzicrinus Springer 
Decadocrinus W. & Sp. 22 Symbathocrinus Phillips 

23 Stylocrinus Sandberger 
Incertae sedis ‘ 


Aspidocrinus Hall 
Edriocrinus Hall 


II List of Species and Varieties 


A Camerata 


ion 
OO ON AWB W ND H 


SS 
OO = 


| 
Oo ON AM BW 


W NHN DH NY HY NYY HY ND DN 
OO ON AM BW NY FO 


Acacocrinus pentadactylus (Grabau) n. com. 
Acanthocrinus spinosus (Hall) n. com. 
Acanthocrinus onondaga sp. nov. 
Aorocrinus armatus sp. nov. 

Aorocrinus cauliculus (Hall) 

Aorocrinus elegans sp. nov. 

Aorocrinus formosus sp. nov. 

Aorocrinus praecursor (Hall) 

Aorocrinus longidactylus sp. nov. 
Clarkeocrinus ruedemanni sp. nov. 
Clarkeocrinus schoharie sp. nov. 

Clonocrinus ? (Corymbocrinus?) macroptalus (Hal!) 
Cordylocrinus plumosus (Hall) 
Cordylocrinus ? ramulosus (Hall) 
Corocrinus ? calypso (Hall) n. com. 
Corocrinus ornatus sp. nov. 

Cyttarocrinus eriensis (Hall) n. com. 
Cyttarocrinus ? jewetti sp. nov. 
Dimerocrinus arborescens (Talbot) n. com. 
Dimerocrinus whitfieldi sp. nov. 
Dolatocrinus glyptus (Hall) 

Dolatocrinus glyptus var. intermedius (Hall) 
Dolatocrinus insignis sp. nov. 

Dolatocrinus liratus (Hall) 

Dolatocrinus lobatus sp. nov. 

Dolatocrinus marshi var. glaber var. nov. 
Dolatocrinus ornatus Meek 

Dolatocrinus speciosus (Hall) 
Gennaeocrinus carinatus Wood 
Gennaeocrinus carinatus var. crassicostatus var. nov. 


64 


Ne 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9Q17 


Gennaeocrinus eucharis (Hall) 
Gennaeocrinus kentuckiensis (Shumard) 
Gennaeocrinus nyssa (Hall) 
Gennaeocrinus peculiaris sp. nov. 
Gilbertsocrinus spinigerus (all) 
Hadrocrinus polydactylus (/al/) 
Hystricrinus depressus (W. & Sp.) 
Hystricrinus eboraceus (Hall) 
Hystricrinus granosus sp. nov. 
Hystricrinus ithacensis (Williams) 
Hystricrinus leai (Lyon) 

Hystricrinus punctobrachiatus (fall) 
Hystricrinus splendens sp. nov. 
Lecocrinus indianensis (M. & G.) n. com. 
Mariacrinus beecheri Talbot 
Mariacrinus plumosus Hall 

Mariacrinus ramosus Hall 

Mariacrinus stoloniferus Hall 
Marsipocrinus tentaculatus (Hall) 
Megistocrinus depressus Hall 
Megistocrinus ontario Hall 

Melocrinus bainbridgensis Hall & Whitf. 
Melocrinus breviradiatus Hall 
Melocrinus chemungensis sp. nov. 
Melocrinus chemungensis var. parvus var. nov. 
Melocrinus clarkei (Hall MS) Williams 
Melocrinus gracilis W. & Sp. 
Melocrinus (Trichotocrinus) harrisi Olsson 
Melocrinus (Trichotocrinus) lutheri sp. nov. 
Melocrinus naplesensis sp. nov. 
Melocrinus nobilissimus (Hall) 
Melocrinus nodosus (Hall) 

Melocrinus pachydactylus (Hall) 
Melocrinus paucidactylus (Hall) 
Melocrinus reticularis Olsson 

Melocrinus williamsi Olsson 

Melocrinus sp. ? ( Young) 

Pterinocrinus quinquenodosus sp. nov. 
Rhodocrinus nodulosus Hall 
Rhodocrinus nodulosus var. pernodosus var. nov. 
Sphaerotocrinus ornatus sp. nov. 
Springerocrinus stellatus sp. nov. 
Thamnocrinus troosti (Hall) n. com. 
Thylacocrinus gracilis (Hall) n. com. 


Flexibtlia 

Clidochirus schucherti (Talbot) 1. com. 
Eutaxocrinus avoca sp. nov. 
Eutaxocrinus chiriformis sp. nov. 


49 


tn 
IOu O 


OonNnanKRwW bd HH © 


=~ — es 
NO = O 


| 
eS) 


Se ee eS 
0 ON An f 


NO NY bd 
1 ee ®) 


23 


NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Eutaxocrinus ithacensis (Williams) n. com. 
Eutaxocrinus nuntius (Hall) n. com. 
Eutaxocrinus petilus sp. nov. 

Taxocrinus lobatus (Hall) 


Inadunata 


Anamesocrinus lutheri sp. nov. 
Ancyrocrinus bulbosus Hall 
Arachnocrinus bulbosus (fall) 
Arachnocrinus extensus W. & Sp. 
Arachnocrinus extensus var. spinobrachiatus var. nov. 
Barycrinus sentosus sp. nov. 
Bathericrinus cohoctonensis sp. nov, 
Bathericrinus halli sp. nov. 
Botryocrinus americanus Rowley 
Botryocrinus crassus (Whiteaves) 
Botryocrinus nycteus (Hall) n. com. 
Brachiocrinus nodosarius Hall 
Catactocrinus leptodactylus sp. nov. 
Corematocrinus plumosus sp. nov. 
Decadocrinus ? decemnodosus sp. nov. 
Decadocrinus ? geniculatus sp. nov. 
Decadocrinus gregarius Williams 
Decadocrinus ? killawogensis sp. nov. 
Decadocrinus multinodosus sp. nov. 
Decadocrinus rugistriatus sp. nov. 
Decadocrinus serrato-brachiatus sp. nov. 
Deltacrinus clarus (Hall) 

Glossocrinus cornellanus (Williams) n. com. 


24 Glossocrinus ithacensis sp. nov. 


25 
26 
27 
28 
29 
30 
21 
B2 
38 
34 
3D 
36 
37 


Glossocrinus naplesensis sp. nov. 
Hallicrinus ornatissimus (Hall) n. com. 
Halysiocrinus secundus (Hall) 
Haplocrinus clio Hall 

Hypsocrinus fieldi Springer & Slocom 
Lasiocrinus ? schoharie sp. nov. 
Lasiocrinus scoparius (Hall) 
Maragnicrinus portlandicus Whitfield 
Myrtillocrinus americanus Hall 
Myrtillocrinus levis (Wood) 
Poteriocrinus ? avocensis sp. nov. 
Poteriocrinus ? avocensis var. robustus var, 12 
Poteriocrinus clarkei Williams 
Poteriocrinus clarkei var. alpha Williams 
Poteriocrinus diffusus Hall 

Poteriocrinus dignatus sp. nov. 
Poteriocrinus ? elongatus sp. nov. 
Poteriocrinus ? infundibuliformis sp. nov. 
Poteriocrinus nassa Hall 


| 


REPORT OF THE DiRECTOR IQI7 51 


Poteriocrinus (Decadocrinus) nereus Hal! 
Poteriocrinus ? pergracilis sp. nov. 
Poteriocrinus zethus Williams 
Schultzicrinus ? elongatus Springer 
Schultzicrinus typus Springer 
Symbathocrinus sulcatus sp. nov. 
Stylocrinus canandaigua sp. nov. 


aS 
4s 


eS 
CON OU 


mn & 
oe) 


Inceriae Sedis 

Aspidocrinus callosus Hall 
Aspidocrinus digitatus Hall 
Aspidocrinus scutelliformis Hall 
Edriocrinus becraftensis Clarke 
Edriocrinus dispansus Kirk 
Edriocrinus pocilliformis Hall 
Edriocrinus pyriformis Hall 
Edriocrinus sacculus Hall 


ON AnNARWNH HY 


MINERALOGY 


Accessions. Among the important accessions may be mentioned 
an interesting and varied suite of rro geodes from Brown and Augusta 
counties, Illinois, and Lee county, Iowa, presented by Mr Charles 
N. Magill of Albany. These, together with the specimens from this 
locality already in the collection, constitute a fairly complete series 
of these interesting formations. By an exchange with the National 
Museum the collections have acquired a series of the vanadium 
minerals from Peru and a suite of the rare mercury minerals from 
Terlingua, Texas, the latter of which is specially welcome in that it 
fills several of the gaps due to unrepresented species in the general 
collection. A suite of many large and handsome specimens of the 
minerals of the iron and copper regions of Michigan was received in 
exchange and purchased from the Rev. Alfred E. Healey of Ironwood, 
Mich. 

War minerals. An exhibit of the minerals essential to the manu- 
facture Ol ordnance, munitions, armor plate, motors and other 
articles and commodities necessary to the winning of the war has 
been installed. In each instance the suite of specimens covering a 
particular mineral product is headed by a concise label stating the 
relation of that metal or compound to war industries; this is followed 
by a small map showing the distribution of the world’s supply of the 
workable ores and pointing out in most instances the urgent necessity 
of establishing a United States source of supply. A small series of 
these ores is supplemented where possible by a number of finished 
and unfinished end products. A number of these end products were 
presented to the Museum by the Bethlehem Steel Co. through Mr 


52 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Cummings. Explanatory printed labels were supplied to the entire 
series which at present occupies two flat cases in the Hall of New York 
Minerals. 

Other installations. A temporary exhibit of the radio-activity of 
carnotite was installed in the small case devoted to new accessions 
and minerals of current interest. This exhibit was built up around 
two: handsome specimens of carnotite presented by UDG inane 
Penrose, jr. A radio-photograph taken from a negative exposed 
under one of these specimens, together with the objects used to 
demonstrate the radio-activity and the light tight box used in the 
demonstration, are all shown in the exhibit. 

An innovation which has so far met with marked success, consists 
of the installation on a small table in the Mineral Hall of a group of 
fifteen loose mineral specimens of appropriate size and excellent 
quality, selected with a view to stimulating the casual interest in the 
mineral collections. The public is encouraged to handle these 
Specimens to which are attached very simple labels, and Museum 
publications which are to be found close at hand furnish the desired 
information regarding them. It is interesting to note that no 
specimen has been removed or lost. 

Extension work. With a view to emphasizing one of the appli- 
cations of minerals to the arts, Mr Whitlock has been publishing 
from time to time throughout the year a series of articles on forms 
of gem cutting in the leading trade journal of the jewelry trade. 
These articles, which are of a semipopular nature, discuss the various 
forms in which precious stones have been cut with a view to estab- 
lishing in the more important forms the maximum brilliancy- 
efficiency. | 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQ17 53 


VII 
Re POR On ris Stat, BOmANISa? 


Scientific investigations. The investigative work of the State 
Botanist during the season of 1917 has been limited to a study of 
the flora of certain sections of the central and western counties of 
the State. Early in the season several days were spent in a study 
of the vegetation of southern Herkimer county, a region of numerous 
small lakes, bogs and swamps, and the home of several rare species 
of plants. A visit was also made to Fourth Lake in northern Herki- 
mer county, and further investigations were made upon the vegeta- 
tion of several sphagnum bogs through the counties of Oswego, 
Cayuga, Wayne, Seneca, Monroe and Genesee. At all the localities 
visited collections were made for the state herbarium. 

A large number of fungi, ferns and flowering plants were collected 
during the year, many of which were new to the state flora. The 
ferns and flowering plants of particular interest will be recorded in 
the State Botanist’s report under. ‘‘ Local Flora Notes”’ and the 
fungi under “‘ Notes on Fungi.’”’ A large number of fungi, some of 
recent collection, but most of them undetermined species collected 
by Doctor Peck and others, were studied and identified in col- 
laboration with Prof. John Dearness and will be recorded. under 
‘““ New and Interesting Species of Fungi.” 

Considerable progress has been made in the compilation of a list 
of New York fungi which will also include an arrangement according 
to the host plants which they inhabit in the case of those saprophytic 
and parasitic species which are found upon definite hosts. 

Memoir on the Wild Flowers of New York. The photographic 
work for this project was practically completed in 1916, and during 
the past year it was necessary to secure additional photographs of 
only a few subjects. The manuscript was completed in 1917 and 
there remains now only the completion of the engraving and printing. 
It is expected that this will be finished before the publication of this 
report. The great amount of detail connected with this undertaking 
has made it necessary to curtail to a large extent new investigations 
of a scientific nature. 

Noteworthy contributions to the state herbarium. The chief 
additions to the state herbarium during the past year in the form 
of contributions and exchanges are presented in the following list of 
contributors, which also indicates the number of specimens received 
from each. 


54 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


NUMBER 
OF 

CONTRIBUTOR SPECIMENS 
Crayalenarinina J Manvand Wininyensitiy eq) siy see ee se ee ee 236 
Bromilow Crawtond,| Clareniomte Wal aio ni ie evn ei adel eee 165 
ommprtimeys\Lattle Malls oN ay oii oe eI Cc UaR a air vali lie NE ae 130 
Protwe. O-. Overnolis: StateiCollewe Weal tes) yaaa in anu) Serene ia a 86 
Drjfames IR Weim UMiissoulay INiomt 2) i si iey ees Ones ea eae 53 
MiSSuMieGKG Smut, "stestPank (Colin. i NW alin suerte see 35 
a kGllip sRochester, Nu yVi yi Wie SCAU boo tec a ae ea 40 
Be ne ic a 22 
DiWehlay don Marsintveld Ore wien eanie ei Vile set lees ie elle ee 20 
AGEebarcons Carter mvlomt: ee ene ec emo MAM MeN YS BO) 
Douglas M. White, ROenerer Nay eA ME Soe ELC ide Ca a 20 
Gm ONicane (hale Raver Gal) 00) i 16 
Sell wiswcmhana Eludsomilla lsc IN VOI. ey cM a CN eis ie ech eae 12 
Win Ac Wiatthews: (Rochester. aN. Vays. ie lag CI eh ee aes ols Bene lee a II 
Roy, Watham Ortent, Novy, Ba ste sont tale gas et rad nae ie dine ee ke 
Olaf O. Nylander, Caribou, Net 2B LAI a ke 10 


Miss Caroline C. Haynes, Highlands, N. 1 MM mie Pere Ma sc! 9 
Hele) Barleley, Crahamenile Nov 8. | 2 
IWhiscsi@hanlottie Bogzardus Coxsackie wNj 40. ee eee eee I 
Misi vob Gardwer | Canarndarcutia WN NG. fi 90s ee ao eae I 
Simon Davis, Brookline, Mass. . «ete Bb ae AA aN en Leap tan ee ae I 
AV eminence NN carstanamert @ test) Guim oh 2a re a en ROU ea an I 

Mota sie oP GLE CCE Us To in Ue GRA ) A ep et ae 


Condition of the collections. With the aid of the assistant botanist, 
Mr Louis Robbins, it has been possible to continue the rearrangement 
OF une material im) the herbarium, maine it) imMene access ial emcn 
study, and in addition to the mounting of the current collections, 
exchanges and contributions, a large number of valuable specimens 
of the Sheldon herbarium (presented in 1914) have been mounted 
and placed in the herbarium. Further progress in definitely marking 
the many type specimens has been made. 

Additions to the herbarium. The number of specimens which 
have been added to the herbarium from all sources during the past 
year is 1212. Of these, 901 were received in exchange or as con- 
tributions: 311 specimens were collected by the staff im the coumties 
of Albany, Cayuga, Erie, Essex, Franklin, | Hamilton) Miadicem 
Monroe, Nassau, Niagara, Oneida, Otsego, Ontario, Onondaga, 
Nensselaer, Saratoga, seneca, Oueens, Wayne and) Warrentaadaine 
number of species added which were new to the herbarium was 128, 
which includes 33 specimens of ferns and flowering plants of the 
northeastern states and 95 species of fungi. Of the latter, 18 species 
are described as new. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 55 


Identifications. The State Botanist’s office has been called upon 
to identify and report upon 437 specimens of plants, including many 
fungi. These identifications were asked for by 108 different persons. 


PLANTS ADDED TO THE HERBARIUM 


The policy of giving a detailed list of all species mounted and 
added to the state herbarium, which has characterized the State 
Botanist’s reports for many years, is now discontinued, and the 
following list contains only the names of the species added to the 
herbarium during 1917 which were not hitherto represented in our 
collections. Of the many species of flowering plants received, 
which were new to our collections, only those from the northeastern 
United States are listed. 


Ferns and Flowering Plants New to the Herbarium 
Agalinis acuta Pennell 
Agropyron acadiense Hubbard 
Antennaria cana Fernald 
« neodioica gaspensis Fernald 

Astragalus blakei Eggleston 
Bidens colpophila Fernald & St John 

“ ~ eatonii kennebecensis Fernald 
Carex oronensis Fernald 

“ “projecta x scoparia Fernald 
tenuiflora x teisperma Fernald 
Dryopteris goldiana x marginalis Dowell 
Erechtites megalocarpa Fernald 
Eriocaulon parkeri Robinson 
Euphrasia americana Wettst. 

2 arctica Lange 
purpurea var. farlowii (Rob.) Fernald & Wiegand 
randi Robinson 
Glyceria fernaldii (Hitchc.) St John 
Juncus pervetus Fernald 
Kobresia elachycarpa Fernald 
Lactuca canadensis var. montana Britton 
Lesquerella arctica var. purshii Wats. 
Odontites odontites (L.) Wettst. 
Pleurogyna rotata (L.) Griesb. 
Proserpinacea intermedia Mackenszte 
Puccinellia fasciculata (Torr.) Bicknell 
: alaskana Scribn. & Merrill 

Salix glaucophylloides Fernald 
Scirpus longi Fernald 
Scutellaria churchilliana Fernald 
Veronica teucrium Linn. 
Xyris arenicola Small 


“ 


“ 


“ 


56 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Fungi New to the Herbarium 

Aleuria rhenana Fckl. 
Anthostoma menispermi D. & H. 
Asterella fraxinina D. & H. 
Asterstroma cervicolor (B. & C.) Massee 
Aylographum onocleae D. & H. 
Catinula turgida Desm. 
Ceracea corticicoides (EZ. @ E.) Pat. 
Ceratostoma avocetta (C. & E.) 
Cladosporium molle Cooke 
Colletotrichum helianthi Davis 
Coniophora vaga Burt. 
Corticium albulum Atk. & Burt. 
alutaceum (Schrad.) Bres. 
atrovirens Berk. 
. centrifugum (Lev.) Bres. 
confluens Fr. 
epigaeum FE. & EF. 
polyporoideum B. & C. 
roseopallens Burt 
- rubicundum Burt 
i scutellare B. & C. 
stramineum Bres. 

+ vagum B. & C. 
Cylindrosporium ceanothi F. & EF. 

“ cratace H.1Ge, 
Dendrophoma variabilis D. & H. 
Diatrypella minutispora Dearness 

missouriensis £. & EF. 
Dimerosporium echinatum E. @& E. 
Dothiorella caryae D. & H. 
Gloeosporium castanopsidis D. & H. 
a hedericolum Maublanc 

Gloniella parvulata D. & H. 

VAC cIMiColany eres 
Glutinium exasperans Fr. 
Gnomonia perversa Rehm 
Godronia urceolata:( Ellis) 
Gymnosporangium kernianum Bethel 
Helicosporium nymphaearum Rand 
Hypochnus olivascens (B. & C.) Burt 
spongiosus (Schw.) Burt 
subferruginosus Burt 
subvinosus Burt 
Illosporium coccinellum Cooke 
Labrella celastri D. & H. 
Laestadia caricis D. & H. 

a smilaciniae D. @ H. 
Leptostromella chenopodi D. & H. 
Leptosphaeria acuta (M. & N.) Sacc. 


ill 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 


Macrophoma ulmicola Dearness 
Melanomma inspissum (Schw.) 
Midotis irregularis (Schw.) Sacc. 
Mycena filopes (Bull.) Quel. 
Nigredo occidentalis (Diet.) Arth. 
Odontia nivea ( Karst.) 

Ovularia bistortae (Fckl.) Sacc. 
Peniophora affinis Burt 

4 arachnoidea Burt 

é laevis (Fr.) Burt 

? peckii Burt 

i pubera (Fr.) Burt 

:: praetermissa ( Karst.) Burt 

s sordida Karst. 

i velutina (DC.) Cooke 
Phragmidium occidentale Arth. 
Phyllosticta alcides Sacc. 

Fr amicta LE. & E. 

i. gaultheriae E. @ E. 

< omphaleae D. & H. 

: salicicola Thum. 

£ tiarellae Dearness 
Pseudoplectania nigrella ( Pers.) Fckl. 
Puccinia epilobi-tetragonis (DC.) Wint. 

e seymouriana Arthur 
ry veronicarum DC. 
Pucciniastrum sparsum (Wint.) Ed. Fisch. 
Ramularia aequivoca (Ces.) Sacc. 
Scleroderris fuliginosa ( Pers.) Karst. 
Septoria araliae LE. & EF. 
hedeomae D. & H. 
Sporodesmium naviculum D. & H. 
Stereum erumpens Burt 
“ ochraceoflavum Schw. 
Tympanis buchsu (Henn.) Rehm. 
“3 laricina (Fckl.) Sacc. 
Valsaria toxici (Cke.) 
Winterina crustosa FE. & E. 


58 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


VII 
REPORT OF Lok SsiAtE, SINR MOL Gilsa 


The Entomologist reports that the cold and, in some sections of 
the State, excessively wet spring produced an unusual condition 
and many of the insects normally destructive were conspicuous by 
their absence, while a few comparatively unknown forms caused 
serious losses, though a portion of these, notably in connection with 
the work of the seed corn maggot, was due largely to climatic con- 
ditions and the employment of methods poorly adapted to the 
abnormal conditions prevailing. The apple tent caterpillar has 
almost dropped out of sight as a serious pest, though late in the 
season a number of leaf feeders, such as the red-humped apple tree 
worm, the yellow-necked apple tree worm, the fall web worm, the 
hickory tussock moth caterpillar and some related species were 
uncommonly abundant and destructive. 

The following is a brief summary of the Entomologist’s work and 
the conditions he has found in various parts of the State. More 
detailed information is given in the Report of the State Entomologist. 

Fruit tree insects. An unusually interesting discovery was that 
of the recently established apple and thorn skeletonizer, H em er- 
ophila pariama Clerck, near Irvington and) Nyaceun isa: 
insect was so abundant in some localities as to skeletonize practically 
all the foliage, even in orchards of considerable size. The Ento- 
mologist made a study of the situation, worked out the life history 
of the species and in cooperation with agents of the State Depart- 
ment of Agriculture determined the approximate extent or time 
infested area. A special account has been prepared which will be 
published as an extension bulletin by Cornell University and well 
distributed throughout the infested area in an effort to secure general 
cooperation in checking this pest until such time as natural enemies 
may bring it under control or experience shows it to be an insect of 
comparatively minor importance. 

Work on the codling moth was continued in cooperation with the 
bureau of horticulture of the State Department of Agriculture. 
The spraying operations were continued in the orchard of H. E. 
Wellman, Kendall. Owing to unfortunate weather and field con- 
ditions, however, the results, as will be seen by a reference to the 
detailed account of the work, were not satisfactory. The very cool, 
wet weather of early spring appears to have prevented the setting of 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR ILQI7 59 


a fair crop of fruit and in many portions of the western part of the 
State there were almost no apples. The yields on the experimental 
plots, though promising well at blossoming time, were so small that 
it was not considered worth while to pick and classify the fruit on 
the trees sprayed three times, owing to the fact that the crop was 
so small that very little of value could be secured. These untoward 
conditions were further accentuated by the extremely muddy con- 
dition of the orchard at the time of the first spraying. This mate- 
rially affected the efficiency of the work. The experiment in Niagara 
county was continued in the orchard of George Mead of Barker and 
there conditions were much better than in the Kendall orchard, 
since there was a larger crop and fairly satisfactory returns were 
obtained from the spraying, though the benefit secured was not 
nearly so great. as that which had been obtained in earlier years in 
the Hudson valley. The small crop of fruit mentioned above was 
also accompanied by an unusually heavy infestation by codling 
moth, and the two combined prevented obtaining high percentages 
of worm-free fruit, though substantial benefits were secured on the 
sprayed trees, as compared with the unsprayed or checks. 

Apple maggot. The work of last year with this pest was continued 
in the orchard of Mr Edward Van Alstyne of Kinderhook. The 
test made with the late application of a poison just as the flies began 
to appear was followed by a very gratifying freedom of injury on 
trees where there was very serious damage to the fruit last year. 
Variations in the numbers of this insect are so great that the Ento- 
mologist did not feel warranted in drawing definite conclusions from 
the results of one season. 

Leaf roller. Observations show this insect to be less abundant in 
the western part of the State than was the case two years ago, due, 
probably, to the work of natural enemies. 

Red bug. Injuries by these pests, as shown by the work of 
the past year, are becoming increasingly apparent here and: there in 
the State and fruit growers are suffering considerable losses from the 
work of these pests. The fact that there are two species, both of 
which may occur in the orchard, one being abundant a little earlier 
than the other, complicates control measures, since recommendations 
of value in the case of the earlier species are of comparatively little 
service if the infestation is largely due to the later and, lacking 
expert examination, it is usually impossible to determine the trouble- 
some form until the damage has been caused. 

San José scale. This pest, as determined by observations and 
reports from various parts of the State, is relatively much less 


60 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


abundant than in earlier years, this being especially true in the 
Hudson valley. There is a generally satisfactory control with 
thorough spraying with the lime-sulphur wash at winter strength, 
and in some localities there is little or no damage even in unsprayed 
orchards. The work of parasites, first brought to attention a few. 
years ago, continues and it is probable that these minute insects are 
not unimportant factors in bringing about this gratifying condition. 

Pear thrips. The situation with respect to this insect remains 
nearly unchanged. It is sporadically abundant and destructive 
here and there in pear-growing sections, especially in the Hudson 
valley, and despite efforts of fruit growers there is likely to be con- 
siderable loss before the seriousness of the infestation is appreciated. 

Pear psylla. There has been considerable pear psylla in Hudson 
valley orchards due, in some cases at least, to the delayed dormant 
spray not being held until practically all the eggs have been deposited. 
This pest, like the pear thrips, can be controlled to best advantage 
only by applications given within rather closely defined time limits 
and many growers experience difficulties in recognizing the periods 
when work of this kind can be done to the best advantage. 

Gipsy moth. An examination by the Entomologist of the region 
formerly infested shows a very gratifying condition in that no living 
insects in any stage have been found-within two years and the 
thorough spraying and other work prosecuted in this attempt to 
exterminate the insect augurs well for the successful completion of a 
difficult and costly, though economical, undertaking. 

Grass and grain pests. The cold weather and copious rains of 
last spring were unfavorable to the development of sufficient grass- 
hoppers to cause serious damage and in most sections these insects 
were not unusually abundant, though as the season advanced small 
areas, especially beside orchards, were found to be infested with 
considerable numbers. The use of grasshopper bait was advised 
in a number of such places and in several instances rather serious 
damage to young fruit trees was reported, due to ignoring the insects 
earlier and allowing them to develop unchecked. 

May or June beetles were unusually numerous in many sections 
of the State, defoliating or partly defoliating individual trees and, 
in not a few instances, strips of woodland. This condition was 
pointed out earlier and an effort made to interest the farmers in 
noting these results for themselves, since the amount of feeding 
affords a basis for estimating the probabilities of damage another 
season to susceptible crops, such as corn and potatoes planted upon 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 61 


sod land near badly affected trees. In cooperation with the Insect 
Pest Survey and Information Service it has been possible to make 
what is practically a May or June beetle survey of the State and as 
a result there has been brought together a mass of data which can 
be used to great practical advantage in indicating areas where 
serious injury by the destructive white grub 1s likely to occur next 
year. The information has been summarized and it is planned to 
distribute this early next spring so as to prevent, so far as possible, 
serious losses by planting upon land badly infested by these 
destructive pests. 

The wheat midge was somewhat injurious to heading rye in various 
parts of the State and later was found in many wheat fields. — It 
was estimated that the loss in southern Niagara and northern Erie 
counties caused by this insect would approximate 20 per cent in 
shrunken wheat. The actual loss in other wheat-growing counties 
appears to be considerably less, that in Orleans county being placed 
Hume per cent to 5 per cent. Dhis damage, comparatively rare 
during recent years in New York State, was largely due to unusual 
climatic conditions at the time the grain was heading and there is 
little probability of its recurring another year. 

Field crops. The work of the seed corn maggot in bean fields 
came to notice the last of June and was very serious, the loss on seed 
alone in one 9 acre field in Genesee county amounting to $70, while 
Mom SO tO 75 per cent of 16 acres were destroyed: One Monroe 
county grower lost over $300 on seed alone. The damage for Erie 
county was put at 4o per cent and it was estimated that one-fourth 
of $96,000 worth of seed was destroyed in Orleans county. Untoward 
weather conditions and deep planting on the wetter land appears 
to have greatly augmented losses, while the total damage was 
increased by the work of snails, millipeds and disease. 

Potato aphis appeared in July on Long Island and became rather 
abundant and very injurious in some fields of many counties, Lewis 
being one of the last to report infestation. This insect breeds very 
rapidly, has a considerable range of food plants and under certain 
conditions is most destructive. It is usually checked by parasites, 
which appears to have been the case in many localities, though 
severe losses were reported for individual fields. The estimated loss 
in Dutchess county was placed at 5 per cent. It was ranked as a 
plague in Orleans county. It caused serious trouble for some large 
growers in Ulster county and was very injurious in gardens, the 
estimated decrease in the crop ranging from 1o to 75 per cent, with 


62 - NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


total loss in isolated cases. Growers agree as to the beneficial 
results following early and thorough spraying with a tobacco soap 
preparation. | 

Shade tree insects. The urgent necessity of producing large 
crops the past season has resulted in more attention being given to 
their insect enemies than to those occurring upon shade trees. It 
is perhaps fortunate that the season was exceptionally favorable to 
the growth and development of trees and consequently there was 
comparatively little damage by insects. 

Forest tree pests. The statements made above in relation to 
shade trees apply in large measure to forest trees, though the latter 
part of the season was marked by an unusual abundance of hickory 
tussock moth caterpillars and some of their allies and a corresponding 
anxiety as to the probabilities of injury, not only during the present 
season but in the future. © 

Greenhouse and garden pests. The injurious Florida fern cater- 
pillar, recorded in the last report as having become established in a 
Lockport greenhouse, appears to have been exterminated. Reports 
have been received of this insect having become established in other 
portions of the country, and now that its destructive nature 1s more 
fully appreciated, the probabilities are that it will be effectually 
excluded by the exercise of a moderate degree of care in preventing 
the introduction of infested plants. 

The destructive chrysanthemum midge has been reported during 
the year from a number of localities in the United States and Canada, 
several being in Massachusetts and adjacent states. It has not, as 
far as known, been found in New York, though as pointed out earlier 
it is likely to be brought in with infested plants and when thoroughly 
established is capable of causing serious damage. 

Another introduction, though not new to the continent, is the 
establishment of the European earwig, Forficula aurict- 
larva Winn in Hast) Aurora. This Huropeam insect appearssvouse 
abundant and generally established there. It is best known because 
of its annoying habits rather than on account of the injury it causes. 
It was probably introduced with infested plants and is another 
illustration of the gradual dissemination of species with habits which 
lend themselves readily to distribution through commercial agencies. 

Flies and other pests. ‘The necessity of controlling these insects 
has been greatly emphasized by the extensive mobilization of troops, 
particularly as more than half of the deaths in armies during recent 
wars have resulted from diseases rather than from wounds. The 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 63 


almost constant demand for information relating to household 
insects had practically exhausted the edition of State Museum 
Bulletin 136 dealing with the “‘ Control of Flies and Other Household 
Insects,’ and the Entomologist therefore prepared an extended and 
- almost entirely rewritten edition entitled ‘“‘ Household and Camp 
Insects,” which was issued as State Museum Bulletin 194 and 
widely distributed among sanitary officers of the army as well as to 
those specially interested in work of this kind throughout the country. 

Insect Pest Survey and Information Service. This special war 
activity was organized by the Entomologist last May in cooperation 
with the New York State Food Supply Commission, the State 
College of Agriculture, the farm bureaus, the State Experiment 
Station and other agencies. An additional stenographer was 
engaged in this work from May 23d to July 31st. This service, 
since its organization and up to September rst, in addition to the 
normal work of the State Entomologist’s office, sent out 729 letters, 
4763 copies of circulars, 1729 copies of the fifteen weekly digests 
prepared, 1754 report blanks and 12,174 pages of circular matter. 
It received 606 reports from over roo correspondents located in all 
parts of the State, mostly representatives of the New York State 
Food Supply Commission. 

The main purpose of the survey was to secure early and accurate 
reports from all over the State, to summarize the information thus 
obtained, distribute it promptly, and thus promote the checking or 
prevention in large measure of the numerous losses naturally 
inflicted by insect pests. Particular emphasis was laid upon the 
initial signs of injury in order that the insects might be controlled 
before material damage had been inflicted. The survey was closely 
articulated with the control work in the field under the supervision 
of Messrs Crosby and Matheson of Cornell University. The more 
important crops received first attention, especially the insect enemies 
of potatoes, fruits (such as apples, pears, peaches and cherries), 
cereal and forage crops and truck and garden crops. The importance 
of this work may be gauged somewhat by an estimate made in 1913, 
which placed the approximate loss caused by insects in this State to 
all farm crops at $20,000,000. 

The organization outlined above had one or more active agents 
in practically every county of the State and has made feasible a 
closer watch upon insect developments than has heretofore been 
possible. The experience of the past season repeatedly showed 
that insect outbreaks in the southern part of the State, especially 


64 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


the lower Hudson valley and Long Island, were likely to develop 
later in the more northern sections and that hence the conditions 
in one region could be used to indicate probabilities in others. The 
fifteen weekly digestsynot only recorded conditions in various sections 
of the State and outlined preventive or remedial measures, but also 
appraised the possibility of subsequent damage by various insects. 

Particular attention was paid to the possibilities of preventive or 
early remedial work, and in carrying this out several circulars were 
issued, especially one on fruit insects and crop pests, mailed May 
30th, another discussing the destructive red bug and pear psylla 
was issued June 2d, a third on spraying fruit trees with special 
reference to the control of the codling moth was mailed June 7th. 
A circular calling attention to the work of the extraordinarily abun- 
dant May or June beetles was issued June 11th. One discussing 
the seed corn maggot so destructive in the bean-growing regions 
was prepared June 18th and the day outbreaks of the army worm 
on Long Island were reported was marked by the preparation of a 
circular calling attention to early indications of attack by this greatly 
feared pest and giving in summarized form the more approved 
control and remedial measures. The wheat midge injuring rye and 
wheat, the midsummer leaf feeders of the apple orchard, the insect 
pests of domestic animals and the Hessian fly were likewise discussed 
in timely circulars. 

The correspondence reported above has been largely with county 
representatives of the New York State Food Supply Commission. 
Special effort was made to keep these persons thoroughly posted as 
to the latest developments and the best methods of dealing with 
various perplexing insect problems. These in turn have passed the 
information along to their numerous correspondents and the effort 
can’ not tail to have greatly increased imberest im) the proplemamer 
insect control as well as promoted greater efficiency along these 
lines. 

Gall insects. The Entomologist prepared an illustrated ‘‘ Key to 
American Gall Insects ’’ (now.in press) which has resulted in much 
interesting material being submitted for study. ‘This is true of 
the work of several gall wasps or cynipids, namely, the ribbed bud 
gall and the white oak club gall, deformations which are occasion- 
ally very abundant and injurious. Brief discussions of the work 
and biology of these species appear in the Entomologist’s report. 

There have been some exceptionally interesting gall midges sub- 
mitted to the Entomologist for study, namely, a small collection 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 65 


from India and a larger one of mostly reared species from the Philip- 
pine Islands. This material has been worked up, that relating to 
the former has been published and the manuscript discussing the 
latter has been submitted for publication in the Philippine Journal 
of Science, together with a complete tabulation for the families, 
tribes and genera of the Itonididae, which latter should do much 
toward placing the classification of this large and very diverse 
group upon a thoroughly scientific basis. 

Lectures. The Entomologist has delivered a Anibe of lectures on 
insects, mostly economic species, before various agricultural and 
horticultural gatherings, some of these being in cooperation with 
the Bureau of Farmers Institutes or county farm bureau agents. 
Several lectures have also been given under the auspices of local 
welfare associations. 

Publications. A number of brief, popular accounts of the more 
injurious insects have been prepared by the Entomologist and widely 
circulated among county farm bureau and New York State Food 
Supply Commission agents, the latter as a part of the Insect Pest 
Survey and Information Service. 

Owing to delay in printing the report for 1916, the only bulletin 
from the State Entomologist’s office issued during the past year is 
No. 194, “‘ Household and Camp Insects,’ briefly noticed above. 
Several important papers have appeared in current entomological 
journals, such as “‘ New Western Gall Midges”’ in the Journal of 
the New York Entomological Society, ‘“ New North American Gall 
Midges’””’ and “‘ New Indian Gall Midges,” both in Entomological 
News, and “ Distribution of Gall Midges”’ in the Proceedings of 
the National Academy of Sciences. 

Collections. Additions to the state collections have been con- 
stantly made throughout the year, especially of specimens repre- 
senting the early stages and work of various injurious forms, since 
biological material of this character greatly facilitates the identi- 
fication of insects and is indispensable in a well-prepared exhibit 
illustrating the life histories of various species. 

Owing to the pressure of work incident to conducting the Insect 
Pest Survey and Information Service, a large amount of time was 
necessarily devoted to the identification of numerous specimens and 
as a consequence it was impossible for the Entomologist and his 
staff to give the usual amount of labor to the very desirable and 
really necessary work of classifying and arranging specimens already 
in the state collections. Numerous microscopic preparations of 


66 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


smaller insects have been made and incorporated in the collections 
as in earlier years. 

The work upon exotic Itonididae referred to above has resulted in 
adding a number of types, both generic and specific, to an already 
very large collection. A unique addition was that of Mr Howard 
Notman of Keene Valley and Brooklyn who generously donated a 
collection of 648 admirably mounted specimens. taken at Keene 
Valley, a locality where comparatively little collecting has been 
done in this group. Attention should also be called to the bees 
kindly donated by Prot. 7). D. A. Cockerell, Boulder, Coltvamemne 
the African imsects secured by exchange with Prof: I) Wiihegaala 
of Amherst, Mass. Other acquisitions are listed under additions to 
collections. 

Earlier estimates by the Entomologist indicate .a native fauna of 
approximately 20,000 species, which means fully 100,000 specimens 
if we are to have only one representative of each sex and of each of 
the three other stages, namely, egg, larva and pupa, to say nothing 
of specimens illustrating work and habitat. Many species should 
be represented by series illustrating variations and habits. A state 
collection should possess all these if it is to take its proper place in 
the exposition of our natural resources. Much has been accom- 
plished through the natural history survey work summarized in the 
preceding report, though very much still awaits the competent 
investigator. The urgency of the immediately practical should not 
eliminate research, since progress is possible only through the latter. 
This is true not only of the development of a representative collec- 
tion, itself an indispensable aid to the best economic work, but is 
fundamental in establishing effective methods of controlling many 
destructive insects. There is great need of a more adequate develop- 
ment of the work along these lines if the entomological branch of the 
Museum is to discharge its full duty to both State and Nation. 

The constantly increasing specimens have filled the boxes or trays 
to such an extent that there is urgent meed! of more space tonsimis 
material. The wooden cases containing the insect collections should 
be replaced by steel cabinets and more provided to accommodate 
the additional boxes and trays required. No adequate provision has 
as yet been made for the constantly increasing biological material, 
which is also true of the large number of microscopic slides, many 
of them containing types of species and genera and therefore unique. 
A metallic filing case for the collection of negatives and photographs 
illustrating insects or their work 1s also greatly needed. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 67 


Nursery inspection. The nursery inspection work of the State 
Department of Agriculture has resulted, as in former years, in a 
number of specimens representing various stages of insect develop- 
ment, some in very poor condition, being submitted to the Ento- 
mologist for identification. As such material may originate in a 
foreign country, determinations of this character are laborious and 
require for their successful prosecution a large collection and an 
excellent library of both domestic and foreign works. The correct 
identification of such material is important, since the disposal of 
an entire shipment of nursery stock must’ depend in considerable 
measure upon the character of the infestation. 

General. The work of the office has been materially aided, as in 
past years, by the identification of a number of species through the 
courtesy of Dr L. O. Howard, chief of the Bureau of Entomology, 
United States Department of Agriculture, and his associates. There 
has been, as already stated, very effective cooperation with the 
State Department of Agriculture, the New York State Food Supply 
Commission and its agents, the county farm bureaus, the state 
experiment station and other public welfare organizations in the 
State. A number of correspondents have donated valuable speci- 
mens and many have rendered efficient service by transmitting local 
data respecting various insects. 


3 


68 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


IDX 


REPORT OF Try ZOOWe Gist 


Reference has been made to changes and new installations in the 
Hall of Zoology. In the absence of the zoologist, Sherman C. 
Bishop, and the taxidermist, Arthur Paladin, who have enlisted for 
the war, the development of the zoological collections has been 
curtailed and at present it is possible to do little else than keep the 
collections in good condition. There have been some installations, 
notably the otter and woodchuck habitat groups, the nesting flicker 
group and an exhibit of the pileated woodpecker showing the very 
extraordinary work of these birds. The Arnold collection of birds’ 
eggs and its installation have already been referred to. The work 
upon this extensive collection has required already the preparation 
of some 1500 special plaster mounts and will doubtless require more. 

An interesting record made for the year was the shooting, by the 
zoologist, of a prairie wolf or coyote in the woods of South Bristol, 
Ontario county, N. Y. The attention of the Department was drawn 
to the depredations of this wolf upon the farmers’ flocks in that 
part of the State and a hunting expedition succeeded in bringing 
itin. It was thought that it was one of a family but no other trace. 
of such activities has since been noticed in that region. Where the 
wolf came from is still unexplained. 

Researches. The zoolagist has been specially interested in 
acquiring material for a study of the very large number of spiders 
of the State, many of which have already been beautifully illustrated 
by Mr Barkentin. This work, however, will, under the circum- 
stances, proceed slowly although it opens a field of very large and 
general interest. | 

Roy W. Miner, associate curator in the American Museum of 
Natural History, has been engaged in the completion of a report on 
the myriapods of New York. This is a line of interest in which 
Mr Miner is especially competent and his study will conclude some 
investigations that were started a few years ago. 

The monograph of the Land and Fresh Water Shells of New York, 
which has been in charge of Dr H. A. Pilsbry for a number of years, 
is very near its completion and the distinguished author hopes to 
conclude his work in the course of the present year. A considerable 
number of very beautiful drawings have been made and the analytical 
and descriptive parts of the book are largely finished. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR 1917 69 


xX 
REPORT, OF THE ARCHEOLOGIST AND ETHNOLOGIST 


The most recent of the organized sections of the State Museum 
is that of archeology and ethnology. The period before 1906 was 
one of irregular and promiscuous acquisition though under the acts 
of 1897 and 1899 funds had been provided by the Legislature for 
the buying of small private collections. These were installed in 
the corridor about the top of the western stairway in the Capitol, 
and during the fire of 1911 were destroyed. ‘The type of cases and 
location of the exhibit made any attempt at scientific arrangement 
difficult and almost impossible. | 

Not until the new quarters of the State Museum in the Education 
Building were provided was a real opportunity opened for a method- 
ical exhibit. Until that time (1913) all the archeological research 
done for the State Museum had been more or less irregular owing 
to inadequate laboratory facilities, storage space and legislative 
appropriation. This does not mean, however, that highly valuable 
results were not obtained. To the contrary, the time before the 
erection of the Education Building was one of acquisition. Methods 
were studied, an exhibition plan devised, old collections examined 
and valuable field researches made. ‘The results were the publica- 
tion of a series of pioneer monographs of the various types of aborig- 
inal artifacts by Dr William M. Beauchamp, the collection of many 
valuable specimens through the efforts of A. G. Richmond, Esq., 
and of Mrs Harriet M. Converse, and after the creation of the office 
of Archeologist in 1906, intensive field work and the publication of 
three monographs on New York subjects. During this period also . 
the plans for the ethnological groups were drawn up by the Arche- 
ologist and the field work necessary for their completion done. 

The period was one of the drawing together of potentialities; it 
was a long season of preparation and preliminary research, during 
which time the public saw only the promise of realization. 

To provide a standardized museum of New York aboriginal 
archeology, several things were necessary, namely, ample space, 
adequate collections, well-constructed cases and scientific arrange- 
ment. Happily, with the exception of ample space, all the essen- 
tials are now either provided or in the process of realization. ‘The 
section of archeology has outgrown its exhibit space, but thé collec- 
tions, though far from complete, afford a splendid delineation of 


70 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


New York archeology, the cases are well constructed and afford a 
correct means of exhibition, and the arrangement of the artifacts, 
though yet in a preliminary stage, is in accord with the latest and 
most approved methods. 

Condition of collections. To care properly for the 150,000 speci- 
mens in the archeological collections 1s no easy task. About 90,000 
cataloged specimens are in the storage drawers, though this number 
must be expanded 50 per cent to include duplicates, or specimens 
with identical numbers. Approximately 10,000 specimens are on 
exhibition. 

To record and describe properly these specimens is a task that 
requires patient application. The preliminary catalog made out by 
Mr Howard Lansing provides the means for recognizing the speci- 
mens. Mr Lansing had just completed the type catalog when he 
died. His patient apphcation and attention to detail had made him 
a valued helper. 

There is ordinarily no deterioration of the objects in the archeology 
collection, but proper labels are of the greatest importance, and a 
specimen loses value if without data and label. It has been the 
aim during the year to provide permanent labels and case signs, 
but this work is necessarily slow. The cases completely provided 
include the western New York type specimen’ cases, Alto sl saud 
cases 23 and 63. All other cases have general guide labels and all 
important exhibits detailed specimen labels either hand printed or 
typewritten. 

It has occurred to us that the backs and sides of the cases may 
be utilized for exhibition space for certain types of specimens. A 
plan is, therefore, being devised to take advantage of this oppor- 
tunity. Specimens are already being mounted on mount-boards 
tor mstallation. Our great care is mot to mill cases to) tmenpennen 
congestion, for to avoid fatigue and to keep interest stimulated it 
has been found bést to exhibit a few well-arranged objects in each 
case rather than a large number crowded together. We have previ- 
ously explained the individual mount system employed. 

Public interest and cooperation. It is a matter of much grati- 
fication to note the steady growth of interest in New York arche- 
ology and ethnology. These subjects have a wide appeal and a 
wide application to human affairs today, a fact constantly verified 
by the visits of students and collectors to our offices and by the 
numerous letters and requests for information. There are hundreds 
of students of these subjects, many of them prominent business 
and professional men. 


od 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9QI7 71 


As an indication of interest in this subject may be mentioned the 
Lewis H. Morgan Chapter of the New York State Archeological 
Association in Rochester, which now has more than 125 men with 
an organized interest in aboriginal history, archeology and eth- 
nology. In other places the interest is proportionately great, as at 
Cooperstown, Otsego county, where within one month more than 
50 men joined the Leatherstocking Chapter of the association. The 
members of this association are devoted not only to research but 
to the establishment of better local museums, mere scientific field 
work and to the preservation of the aboriginal monuments in their 
several localities. 

Inasmuch as the general headquarters of the association is the 
state Museum, the State will profit considerably through the 
cooperation of a numerous company of patriotic and well-instructed 
men and women. 

There is a pressing demand for public addresses and lectures on 
archeological and Indian subjects. The demand is for a popular, 
yet accurate, presentation of subjects along these lines. We have 
responded as often as the pressing demands of our office work would 
permit. The following list includes the more important public 
addresses given by the Archeologist during the past 18 months: 


The Archeology of Western New York; before the federated 
historical and scientific societies at Rochester University, December 
BS. WG woe 

Lewis Henry Morgan, Man and Scientist; Rochester, November 21. 

William M. Beauchamp as an Archeologist; Syracuse, March 1917. 

Handsome Lake, the Peace Prophet; Caledonia, June ro. 

Men and Events Leading up to the Pickering Treaty; Canan- 
daigua, Genesee Country Historical Federation, July 11. 

Making Democracy Safe for the American Indian; Federated 
@onterence of the Friends of the Indian, January 21, 1018, 
Philadelphia. 

The American Indian in the World Crisis; Albany Institute and 
Historical Society, February 5. 

The Influences of Anthropology on the Thought of the World; 
Morgan Chapter, Rochester, February 23. 

‘Primitive Medicines and Medicine Men; Albany Philosophical 
society, April 5. 

The New York Indians in the Conflict for Civilization; Coopers- 
town, April 19. 

The Construction of Habitat Groups in Wax and Plaster; Amer- 
ican Museums Association, Springfield, Mass., May 22. 


72 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Acquisitions. No extended field work has been done during the 
period ending with the fiscal year, the time being employed in cura- 
torial work, in research and in other important museum activities. 
About 1000 specimens, however, have been acquired, the result of 
donations, collection in the field and purchases. 

Mhe more important collections are those’ of |.°P. Nan @iencea 
of Glens Falls, Forest V. L. Ryder of North Troy, who collected 
near Coxsackie (both of which were purchased), Alvin H. Dewey, 
representative collection from vicinity of Rochester, R. T. Webster, 
from vicinity of Irondequoit bay, D. D. Luther, trom vieimity of 
Canandaigua lake, John Gillard of Stafford; all of which were 
donated. 

Two important manuscripts were purchased during the year. 
One is the result of tem years’ field study of the Genesee valley ama 
comes) under the title, Aboriginal Sites in the Genescemmieiiers 
including four adjacent counties, by Harrison C. Follett; the other, 
Rock Shelters in Southeastern New York, by Max Schrabisch. 
Both of these manuscripts are of considerable importance in the 
preparation of ‘‘ The Archeological History of New York,” a volume 
upon the preparation of which we are spending much care. 

An Iroquois bark lodge. During July and August 1917, there was 
erected in the east end of the Hall of Ethnology an Iroquois bark 
lodge. The bark and poles were secured for us by Indian friends 
who were glad to cooperate in this attempt at reconstruction, and 
the bark was placed upon the frame by Chief Lyman Johnson, 
Gyantwaka, of the Tonawanda Senecas. The lodge is 18 feet long, 
16 feet wide and 14 feet high. So far as possible the architectural 
plan was made to conform to the data concerning bark house struc- 
ture that we were able to find. 

The lodge contains a central hallway and, on either side, platform 
benches running the length of the structure. Above is another 
platform ‘Serving for Storage or sleeping, quarters. | Thewedeem. 
furnished with mats, pelts, cooking and eating utensils, gaming 
sticks, ceremonial objects and other appropriate articles!) in tue 
center, beneath the roof opening that served as a smoke vent, is an 
artificial fire with the remnants of a feast strewn about it. In the 
foreground is the ever present wooden mortar ane pestle. <A braid 
of white Indian corn hangs overhead. 

So far as we have been able to reproduce the cabin, both as to 
exterior, interior and furnishings, we have endeavored to make a 
faithful duplication of an Iroquois dwelling house of the individual 


type. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9Q17 73 


The lodge is not only a striking exhibit, but it gives the visitor a 
visual impression of a typical house of the eastern Indians in aborig- 
inal times. The erroneous impression that the eastern Indians 
lived in conical skin tepees, and ‘“‘ roved constantly from place to 
place’ is thus counteracted. 

Miiicmexinbil sar part on tae Gov, iNiycon ia ilar Halll ot 
Iroquois Ethnology and, like the groups, is the gift of Mrs Frederick 
F. Thompson of Canandaigua. 

Iroquois pharmaceutical plants. During the autumn of 1917 a 
collection of Iroquois medical herbs was made. These included 
such plants as were enumerated in our notes on aboriginal pharma- 
ceutical plants, made during 1900 and 1913. Many of the herbs 
have real medical value, but without doubt a considerable proportion 
have only a fictitious value. 

dine herbs) were gathered and (dried according to’ the Seneca 
formulas and have been placed on exhibition in the Hall of Eth- 
nology, where the exhibit has attracted more than usual interest. 

Among the interesting seeds secured were those of the native 
Iroquois tobacco. ‘These have been germinated by the State Bot- 
anist, who will make a study of the variety. 

Native foods. To supplement the collection of native vegetable 
foods, previously described in the monograph, ‘“‘ Maize and Other 
Plant Foods of the Iroquois’ (Bulletin 144), we collected this year 
dried specimens of elderberries, blackberries, choke cherries, arti- 
chokes and oyster mushrooms. 

We desire to call attention to the economic importance of these 
native foods so generally allowed to go to waste. Mushrooms of 
the edible variety, if properly dried and kept, provide a highly 
nutritious food. The same is true of many of the berries and tubers. 

During the year there have been numerous inquiries concerning 
wild food plants and their uses. These have not only been directed 
by individuals but by various official departments. It is to be 
regretted that the edition of “ Maize and Other Food Plants ’”’ has 
become exhausted, for just now it would be a valuable and useful 
guide in food conservation. 


74 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


XI 
Siva (Oley Walls IDB IAI MMOS IN I 


The members of the staff, permanent and temporary, of the 
Department as at present constituted are: 


ADMINISTRATION 


ony Es @lagke Director 
Jacob Van Deloo, Director’s Clerk and Secretary 
Anna M. Tolhurst, Stenographer 


GEOLOGY AND PALEONTOLOGY 


John M. Clarke, State Geologist and Paleontologist 
David H. Newland, Assistant State Geologist, Curator of Geology 
Rudolf Ruedemann, Assistant State Paleontologist, Curator of 
Paleontology 
William L. Bryant, Honorary Custodian of Fossil Fishes 
C. A. Hartnagel, Assistant in Geology, Curator of Stratigraphy 
Herbert P. Whitlock, Mineralogist, Curator of Mineralogy 
George 5. Barkentin, Draftsman 
Noah T. Clarke, Technical Assistant 
Winifred Goldring, Assistant in Paleontology 
H. C. Wardell, Preparator, Assistant Curator of Paleontology 
Charlotte F. Gorman, Stenographer 
Charles P. Heidenrich, Mechanical Assistant 
Edmund V. Lewis, Clerk 
John L. Casey, Custodian 
William Rausch, Cabinet Maker 
Jerry Hayes, Laborer 
Edward Noxon, Laborer 
Temporary experts 


Areal geology 


Prot HP) Cushing, Adelbert’ College 

Prot, W. J. Muller; Smith College 

Prot G. EH. Hudson, Plattsbure State Normal School 

Prof. W. O. Crosby, Massachusetts Institute of Technology 
Prof. George H. Chadwick, St Lawrence University 

Prof. John L. Rich, University of Illinois 

Prof. A. F, Buddington, Princeton University 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9QI7 


Dsl 
iS at 


Economic geology 
Prof. Nelson C. Dale, Hamilton College 
Harold L. Alling, Columbia University 
R. J. Colony, Columbia University 
EROurO- ha simyta qr, Princeton University 


Geographic geology 
Prof. Herman L. Fairchild, University of Rochester 
Prof. James H. Stoller, Union College 


BOTANY 


Homer D. House, State Botanist 
Louis Robbins, Assistant, Curator of Botany 


ENTOMOLOGY 
Ephraim P. Felt, State Entomologist 
D. B. Young, Assistant State Entomologist, Curator of Entomology 
Fanny T. Hartman, Assistant, Assistant Curator of Entomology 
Helen L. Ryan, Stenographer 
Matthew J. McGarry, Page 


ZOOLOGY 


Sherman C. Bishop, Zoologist, Curator of Zoology 
Benjamin Walworth Arnold, Honorary Curator of Ornithology 
Arthur Paladin, Taxidermist 


Temporary experts 
Dr H. A. Pilsbry, Philadelphia 
Silas C. Wheat, Brooklyn 
Roy W. Miner, New York 
ARCHEOLOGY 
Arthur C. Parker, Archeologist, Curator of Archeology and Eth- 
nology 

Temporary assistant 

Anna C. Parker, Delmar 


76 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


XII 
ACCESSIONS TO THE COLLECTIONS 


ECONOMIC GEOLOGY 


Collection 


Buddington, A. F., Providence, R. I. 
Pyrite ores from St Lawrence and Jefferson counties, N. Y.. eee 
IMiolviodenite Russel WINGY) 0c cise Henle al ate gl fe Ds 0 ea 
Molypdenite, New Bremen: Ne oY on. 30.) 2 ue eee ee 
Alling, H. F., New York ; 
ilarite. Crowiiul oitatenN yaar eahaene rs <a ee eee tetas) a eee 
Grapiiteand country rocks, Adinondacks 3.5) 0 ase ee 
Newland, D. H., Albany 
Zinc ores, Bes ING Ye 
Zinc-lead ores, Sullivan al Wieeer coumties: N. Me. oe saa eee tae nieae 
Greenockite,, Malevalle; Ny Youn. ea Sie ee eee ee 
Molybdenite, Peekskill, N. Y..... Se AC OR Aa 
Maenetite: Comwall, Pals. 255: id acrid Us bales UST Age en ee 
Diabase, from laccolith near Graphite, N. Y.. 
Tale and associated minerals, Talcville, N. Y.. 
Jones, R. W., Albany 
Pyrrhotite: Peelckalll, INo Vien. Sig ce gee ee ea ee 


Donation 

Municipal Gas Co., Albany 

piravertines, Rome, italy oo). ecko ke ck’ ats acq ge ua eee, eee ee 
Hooper, George H. 

Greentvearmet South bayer Ni Yoon ie tata ia anism ogre ea 
Uniform Fibrous Talc Co., New York 

Folded talc, large size, Talcville, N. Y..... eg Wha OE LN SUNN Sts ort eae 
Schoellkopf Aniline & Chemical Works, Inc., Buffalo 

Series of synthetic dyes of domestic manufacture.................. 


MINERALOGY 


Donation 
Magill, Charles N., Albany 


wmN NW Ww 


Ouwartzrceodes /lhlimois-lowar! eee enor cet Segcui leans he ee 


Chalcedony geodes, Illinois-Iowa............ 


@alciterscodes. llimoissOwea 2s, sesee te nite la Pein fr ih ete a 


Dolomite geodes, Illinois-lowa. 
Siderite geodes, Illinois-Iowea.. 


Siderite and calcite geodes, ii Finene Lowe HOLS eat had By near Meee | 
Dolomiterand calcite seodeswUllinois-lowa wee eee ee 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 


Sphalerite in calcite geodes, Illinots-lowa 
Rutile on quartz geodes, Illinois-Iowa.. . 
Rutile on calcite geodes, Illinois-Iowa... 


Calciteion quartz geodes, Tlimois-llowa.. .:)s6.4) fs fee dae le ns 
Aragonite on quartz geodes, Illinois-Iowa.. ns 
Calcite and chalcedony geodes, Illinois-lowa...............:.. 


Evie on calcite zeodes. Milinoislowas . Je 258 ee oie os dale eigon on 
Pyrite on quartz geodes, Illinois-lowa.... 


McCray, H. E., Denver, Col. 


I OG CORO Deo COC OlG Se clo IeG GN ox 


Ferberite, Nederland Tungsten dist., Boulder co., Col........... 


Canfield, Frederic A., Dover, N. J. 
Calcite, Paterson, N. J..... 
Pyrite, Japan... ; : 

Gilbert, Fitch, jr, Penis ie 


ower pyrive conctetians, Buuremubs; Otsego co., N.jY ... 580) ) 74.8: 


Hewitt, F. S., Coeymans 


Limonite pseudomorphs after pyrite nodules, Coeymans, N. Y 


Hindshaw, H. H., Alpena, Mich. 
Aragonite, Cie own, Md. 

Ankerite on siderite, Danese Mich. 
Bethlehem Steel Company, through Mr W. 
Special steels for war minerals exhibit 
Metallic manganese.... 

Metallic nickel. . 


Wieralltemmiolyinclemtiitihs cite ay ores OG emu h hoa om oe Mead te ke 


Metallic tungsten... 
Manganese steel....... 


Sig apse Weal Becloc oe Te 


Magnet steel. . id ae eS ae 
Finished A atogobile Ones 

Bnelish terro-vunestem. a2 .6e is. oo. 
Bero=vwaMaAGitines, 2). as... 
Ferro-uranium. 

Ferro-chrome. 


L: Cummins 


Penrose, R. A. F., fa 7 Philadephia, Pa 


Carnotite, Gateway, Minine dist, (Grand co: Utah... 3.0.4. .c45 55. 
Carnotite, Paradox Valley, Montrose co., 


Leininger, Peter A., Long Island oa 
Galena, Bernalillo com NEVE : 
Galena and fluorite, Betieuilon EOS, ‘N. M. 

Mallery, Wiilard, Los Angeles, cae 
Fayalite, San Bernardino co., Cal. . 

Jones, W. W., Albany 


Spusleriievamasauacha, WelCa lous Weal uskcs Ser ae Oi tac Le lit Raed ou 


King, E. W., East Chatham 


Coleen 


Epsonuute omshalewmasty@bathana, oN) Vise kek re wees a 


N 
N 


Se Se ee Ne RN 


Ss = = = = = SS FSF SF SS SS 


78 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Exchange 


Healey, Alfred E., Ironwood, Mich. 
Mohawicite: Mohawk mine, Mich /.eyy) 5) 8252.55) yiee Ae) ese 
Copper Mass mine, Mass. Mitch: ee) eisai ee acy 
St) erie a 
Copper, Quincy mine, Mich. 
Copper, Osceola mine, Mich. 
Epidote, copper and calcite, NERS mine, iMacs ivan 
Epidote and quartz, Mass mine, Mass, Mich.. 
Stilbite and copper, Mass mine, Mass, Mich. AN 
Stilbite, epidote and copper, Mass mine, iNess, Mica 
Aragonite, Ironwood, Mich. 
Aragonite and quartz, ontond: Mich. . 
Hematite, Aurora mine, Mich.. 
Hematite, Ishpeming, Mich.. 
Limonite (stalactite), Neneh mine, Miche 
Limonite and psilomelane, Mass mine, een Me net leader 
iamonmite and psilomelane, Ottawa mine, Wis35.- . 22a.) see 
Gothite on hematite, Ishpeming, Michie seer 
Psilomelane, Newport mine) Mich? 2). 25.5) .e ssh ee 
Manganite. lronwood, Mich. .i2 2.005.245 ae 2 et oe 
Pyrolusite, Hurley mines Wisk. Asc. acs |e cone ee ee 
Manthosiderite, Iromwoods Micha: 0.) seen 4 ee 
Pyriteand. calcite, Bessemer; Mich.) 5.. ii. sos a 
Datolite (polished), Delaware mine) Mich) 4) 94.05 eee | ae ee 
@uartz: Oumney mines Michi’. 225 ey 2 Ste ey ee 
Quartz, lronwood) Michi: fou) Gh: oR eT Rn Ne ae I ae 
Peck, H. S., Menands 
Was Frostburg, Md. he ees I 
Chalcocite vein in serpentine dimaee near Moy Branaick® N. “ips 
United States National Museum 
Creedite (new species), Wagon Wheel Gap, Col. A Ui 
Gearksutite, Wagon Wheel Gap, Colic 
Quisqueite, Minasragra, Peru. 
Patronite, Minasragra, Peru. 
Patronite and quisqueite, Minueraers) eee, 
Hewettite, Minasragra, Peru.. ASHE 
Pascoite on decomposed ore, Mcrae nperaue 
Native mercury, Werlingua, Vexase 3 -) 50) ees) ee 
Calomel, Terlingua, Texas.. 
Klemite,WMerlinewa. Texas. 30. iis Mees. oie 2) tA ee eee rr 
Mont<oydites Merlinouas Wexas. 2...) Joy. Se ee a 
Aangtoisn(cat), New iMiexiconce i.) Aly eo hae ee ee 
TRurqGoisinimatrix New Miexicos. 65 iy eee 
Vial turquois (cut), Persia. . = 
Cahn, Lazard, Colorado Sones Cal 
Mictahewettite: near Thompson's, Grand co), Utah 52 ee 


Soe ewe e ee ew es ee fp eee ws ) & SH WH by eo 


= 


aS S&S NS S= Se Se Se Se Se Se eS eS eS 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQ17 79 


Purchase 


Healey, Alfred E., Ironwood, Mich. 
© We Wee AGS arly Cli pie ee teu \aakatea Miter UMM Waray Ee missin Son Ai RUSE NCAR diy Bye GC shw 3 
Caloirera aerate Zar NV Clad eatin ren Late eno eA ie Viena eeins ck Wee heals Meleis a o's 
Calicnve einGls Sieilllonieen IMA Uielati feces ol Wy Rye 2 oe A tee NG ne Ne 2 ga 
CAlcivewViichisann 2). : 
Calcite and epidote, Galnmet ‘Maan te 
Calcite, epidote and copper, cee noe RIAN, Mich. Shae es at Ula 
Dolomite, pseudomorph after calcite, Mass, Mich: © Ses hilesie SPAS Reel Bal we 
Minonite, svalactivic, Ironwood, Mach?) 724 4): 

Rheinhardt, R., Buffalo 
Cclesrteom limestone, vNochester uN. Wen) Aaekgs se eran tn Selle I 


oe OO | 


Collection 

Hartnagel, C. A., Albany 

CAleiwey compa beuhleiemis IN. Weenie deme aee wn Cer We Oh Sa ie og 
Alling, Harold L., Albany 

uiamntienCrowm Romi spar Con@Ouarny, Crown, eoimt, N2 Yo. 52). 2 I 
Newland, D. H., Albany 

Grecnockite onnsphalentves Edwards) ING YoR ae oe .0 ee. 6. 

alley otal eal) Vilna SemNet 4 Gaile nok elena Meee WD SH cake MV a I ds a I 

Canc ereem) wvveiieelaay SIN: Vie yc er ted i eae i Lau De Nae Bey I 


PALEONTOLOGY 


Donation 
Armstrong, E. J., Erie, Pa. 
squeezes of starfish from Chemung sandstone at Erie co., Pa..........:. 2 
Cleland, Prof. H. F., Williamstown, Mass. 
Emmons’s type of Pterinea demissa, Lorraine formation, Pulaski, N.Y... 1 
Foerste, Prof. A. F., Dayton, Ohio 
Spine of Eurypterus from Utica beds near Rome, N. Y.. Sa Se age ROS MD 
Fossils from Deer River shale (Utica) at Allendale, N. a, Mt eat 20 
Lorraine fossils from Pulaski, Lorraine and Bennett Bridoe N. Ve Den 
Wale mCamieanGd pRoromtonl amin: tahant. tc anuurn tells g meoen es Craen mn tte) AGO) 
Johnston, John S., Wellsville 
Sponges from Chemung sandstone near Wellsville, N. Y................ Fh 
Mead, Gipson, Savannah 
Right shoulder blade of mammoth from gravel beds on farm of William 
IMesnieg ls pmiles montuamest Oh Savalmeala wINva int occ 6 sees ae oe I 
Reinhard, E., Buffalo 
Crinoids trom. Mighteen=nnulle(creeke so. La eles sie: Geiaista tein Sle 2 
Richardson, Prof. C. H., Syracuse 
Graptolites in metamorphosed slates and schists from Vermont.......... 4 
Stein, Edwin, Albany 
Gtaptolites trom Normmanskill shale Kenwood. ).........)............ 15 
Taylor, Mrs Joseph, Schoharie 
Fossils from different formations in the Schoharie valley collected by 
EC Corre em washici aban lonem race emis oe cw trier AR cee Ae Ne marley coke ck OOO 


80 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Exchange 
Hibbard, Ray R., Buffalo 
himrsections of Ordovician’ bryozoans”, cen. ae 6 ee 12 
Purchase 


Reinhard, E., Buffalo 
Graptolites from Bertie waterlime near Williamstown, N. Y............ 10 
Fossils from Clinton waterlime and Portage formations....°....:.:2....) 95 

Ward’s Natural Science Establishment, Rochester 
Upper right and left molars of mammoth found about 8 feet under ground 

in a gravel pit in Savannah, N. Y. Found by Nathan Fitch and Fred 
Shoemaker October TONG! ho. eA. c Oh Oe ae Cee 2 

The following from Kokomo, Indiana 
Kunypserus ranilarvasand counterpart.» 5 sacs. ee nee ae ee 
TE USATCUS TE WLITI ia dens 4 cet laha tek ele. Wewcln dis a aall oUlew haar ee er 
WBtmypterus-KokomoOensis.. .2/)6o. is» Seerecake Nae Ws Se Gee 
IDGhiChOptenus hiss ieisisks. wr leiuneka ee een Pea Cee Alas miso: pest Soe 


es ew 


Collection 


Goldring, Miss Winifred & Bylancik, Joseph, Albany 

Oriskany fossils showing parasitism, from Knox, Albany co., N. Y....... 300 
Ruedemann, Rudolf, Albany 

Ordovician fossils from Oneida and Jefferson counties.................. 455 
Ruedemann, Rudolf & Hartnagel, C. A., Albany 

Canajoharie and Utica shales fossils from Nowadaga and Ohisa creeks, 


Flerkimer co. NiWice fe ikki he Veen Gee RL 7 
ARCHEOLOGY 
Donation 
Alvin, H. Dewey, Rochester 
Workedvamtlersice ce iisng au ocd aye tiie eM ea Spe Ne eng Uta Dr 4 
Wrorled* bones. 2). 55. OB MENS US OR FAL VARS O05 CEERI GID ae err 3 
Goube Denmarkiiin ou kad lie Pls Ra PIS Gee es ee eer rr I 
Grooved axes limos. oh. kee ee lige AE ee eke 2 
elie leis So Stans be cae os NUP uate ON alle aa teen a I 
Brass pots; mutilated): 20.000 iad Abe ee Ie re 
Brass Pot. bOtEOra st) aceon ile) a Salta ie Ghee hea al ee I 
Preserved fiber Wat vays Aiton eee eva Eee atti I 
Ginibarrels Wwanusn se BORD a SA GUS Sc ariee cal SUG Cte ADs 6) rrr 2 
Metal goles erg 3k ae te fh MeO ah J ease aes Pueta nn Ale hr I 
We tal boxe acompalmed. waitel tae poe» ne anaes te raise eee gree ons Gaal eae I 
Articles from Richmond Mulls 

PN AAMIGSS i eR aera Quis hea ECO hal an SL BO oe a 2 
Rotsiend sis e.g tie 2s) hy Bate bee ae eee OIA GO ee: eee, 2 rr 2 
WHeREISCHA PETS NNN.) Bevel Oe OSL 0 BOON en Ra ts See Cann 4 


HANS Gie(O Gifu OOF LOU ESV aay OMT He ay SARUM te MER ANRC ASN. Ses tt a i, Sy aie a Po 50 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 


SOT EDV Sime ae nema oan a by pet a nar eM ee eA) On ae Nua io AE eae, 
Ty ay ave anyever VER Mae, eras EO aoe em an ee i nee Be) te REEL 


Viorel aexe lal oyor cVessy esta aes ee erty SU Mo PR ae 

Pn IeRSD LINCS arian clare Ml otal s ites Secs 2 es 
John Gillard, Stafford 

ibd FONT BENE 243 VN Menke UTR Ee asin eae ee gic Pe 
SSIS NM Spee sweeties 8 

RESte nike Ss 

WelGArr cin 


W. R. Blackie, Williamsbridge 


Potsherds from Minrisink island....... 
Potsherds from Delaware river.......... 


BPerenea de ATOSe ys Lele She UREA SS eet hls we tvsdthe ge pos 


Grooved axes 7.6 62% 


D. D. Luther, Naples 
Peeiie@. [pollard i 55 Shots oh Stam gate aris AUER eo Se ee reas 


ipestlesmenbine sane. de... Pate wk es 


PAE ng Tae ShO TCS mamandee hase ee ee etn bret Baa Le pol 
CaS Let OE aE ARIES IRS UE Mite ELE ReaD ld oy CS ee Re Rea oa art aS oe 


Gouge.... 


CRE] Oa SANG IS ee ee Se 


SO MEMNOST Cs, he Bates 
PimadStomeairn sili 2s hse 
Neb stalkers. s....°::- 


IMSS MSC US COOGEE Bee kets a ea OLE ee Mele AN ger aiid a genet eae 


Ss me GW SS = Ss 


onme>) 


20 


Se Se De Bf 


10 
30 


R. F. Webster, Palmyra 


From Irondequoit bay 


SLieliet eih~) wlio tele, »icr) ol ies vis) (6) si-w) el (=| (el le),0/1@) 18) 10, .e),0) @1,6) @,.@) (8) =) e1/e) ©).0'(e) (0) ¢)\\6) ee (ec) 0) ©) el ein) je) wis) ie) is) lols 


Arrow points 
Net sinkers 


JS) HORS SO ONGESUO. A SIO LG Oy. OPO. OMe On 0 GG O80 .0 OO CLOGS Oo 0. GOS GUS Ono 
3° O60 OF On) On SOD (oes Orc > Dro OO Oncol OM ONO nmi ohOs Chic. ONO Ke ONCE sO cr ce ery, OMrnO aon Cems re 


SRO CWSOL SSL SH EAR ee PR en ag nC Ve pe le cir enne, cs ON 00S EAL pa eet een ene eM 
Chipped stone.... 

LBDae SCSI So Carats ee es ee eo ee Sen” San CIS et Cy ee 
one aWwIS) 2 Gos .a8 

CUI Oh] ogee 

Animal bones 
ESO aD UTM ESE a ean Shr o Meg tos ace Sere eS EO EPs epee Na Ak 
SCO AUStOMes seh SS ae tee aac ates 


iD) CHO SUE Lge NER AAU EVAL TS ae eee rd ee Ae ion Ree See Renn) ee a 
PI @RMeUNCOLAN her es ites cae eee tnes 

DCEAPOES A Ao disor aeees 

Animal paws, deer... 

Re Td ge SPOR AM EEN A eral ON Med el eM Le ee BIN do UB 6 ory 
Clip jerpoveS Sean oN S68 SAAN ee 40 SRR ee aa Oo a 
Iron knife blade 


ial @e set ous) Balielle)Lenelie i») ete 10ils Lene neils (0)(> 6) 04164 0c0)4).e) #1) 6) Leitele te) 4) @ 0: 8 ew wis) © © 6, '6)/6 © 


eS eo) ae? ee ee) 


me No BH NH Sw 


82 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Worked shells.... 


From Boca Carga bay, Florida 


Clay goals eines aa eile eal 


A. C. Parker 


By collection in the field 


@julamitevettigi a seme a nea 


Aiestatsimte ale eA AG Ons calls AGS eel nde ales aan Oc Rt ee cae 
Chert blades jos (2 eee eo) QO We Ne Ie 


Gorget. . 
Stone dicks. 


Clay disk, conn Geree R. TET. 


Antler punch. . 
Bone awls. 


Flint blade, Comestnnn, 


Banner stone. 
Bar amulet. 


Gouge, fHnodeh E. IRs Burmaster.. 


Celt, Madison county. . 
Clay pipe asian 4 


Gorget, Jefferson ee 


Gorget, Vari Bubenc 


Worked bones. 


Fragments of clay pipes. 


Botcherde: ol by oak oe ane rr 


Ehmitublade cc ete GS i A Ae eee es a cr 


Through A. H. Dewey 


Elamamen Stones. amiss 6 bas 2 ae ee ea eee eee |r a 
ChippedlStome sn! joshi 8 Gala AI FA NaN eee ee Le 


Chalcedony chips. . 


Dereherde tremeNie Niortis. DMP ooo) SRN 1 Ne 
NGUeineen Plurk (Orchard no. .o cae Unites | 
lamml er Stomes, Hiclimaarac i NVIilIse eee. aetna rne te ete ee 


Forrest V. L. Ryder 


Purchase 


Artifacts from ten Greene county localities 


Eitey. tablet, turtle and serpent. 40.9065 0s ee oe ee 


Pigment.... 


Polished: poimt en! eisiy Cy a ee sO ae eee) A ee ae 


CSupistone ae, 


Samed StOmesSPOOl wher a lar Ae A weet le on Nes ae an ge 


Celt. 
C ie pipe rotons 


Paint cups, limonite eoucretions PG eI iri MERE EN GE GIS S)S yc no 3 wo 
Wiorkedi stone: witha pits) oe) 00) 6 ee ae ii ee eee 


Steatite pot fragments 


a Ce ORON Ol CMEC RON Ol NDImOn ron ce sO GO MONON OIC IO thc OM ORO oO On Demet O OOOO o 550 6 9 


SS & NO = FF SS & 


| 
ie) 


on 
Se ST NS Se SH Se SS SS SS SS 


A = YN HY # WN 


CO FW SH Ss S&S SS SS DY BS 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 


OO 
Ww 


Discoidal stones. . Bi Mig alah a a Lae SS Es OD Tn CL CS a 
oy Re a 
Flint scrapers. . 

To eedlchestcbiects| Tact. Ely a pale tid eat Mig Bae ARIAS Aine kits eae a a 
Cieligyoidl ROE eG UN IG) Ae Nea ete 
SUELO COXGAC leit Mi sco Saree ACNE ches Stas 6 ah eacisac epee gue + 
aAnMer SbOMle tdi) WLOCESS 2 5 Sat cae aa: 

Grooved axe.. 

Pestle, long. . BAS RU Men RUN Ro BN CRTs LURten cei et C EAs, Baht 
Oblong stone ith, Bite. 

Mullers. 

Eeiend, aeanenten 

Celt, Stuyvesant 
Siraeillll pasion (US eae aw tole 3 ev GIENs 1s cl eko bc) Baksh Paeiaee Rs cable vate 
CrniEle Bixee AS SCN No seas av eA Ue Re aie EN coe EN 
Cl Tiel Sie 1S NS ra Sel icl lens A ee) ta, Sen cere ua ins eo eee anc 
[Ditssoos ah Thebaaraalese RyBOIa ey Ws RNs SABI 2 framncs tents olouainbnns Seven at airascey sia liebe au asanesione 
IT ere eexSl “SHOVES re TR ra i ce ear ch at Lr 
Gvrovare . BTU eS SU unk, Matai oS UI SiR Sen Tee yaek, pare at Rie eR er EL a Sane 
Calli, wanlinatginscly is Sedat ales aa sith Soe oo Sie ee Gor tonne errno ute 
INfesb SATRREES A IN LENA AE oie al OM gee i ea a tee eae 80 
Chipped chertrobyectss.. 25.42... SN Ree Ta or eR NW ER Sat wae 10 
Worked quartz. . Pa ee rs a Stet cay Ait Sia ei iay MA ects cles Lee 2. 9 
Workedislate. =. 524. a et leet ne URN EN tive ia rfc RINE Sahn LAR RN ee RN ory 
etedcher wiplements. Re Ne eas ene e Sere t Etat Peano he Gam ears ats ATT 
Pyeaneey, Tie eaten ROT 0 ON CO ne te hee eee I 
Sse la TS Tan EO ee nna ee a ec gr ee acne niaiay yes or ERS Stents wees ates MEdL ip, UI 
Sineauineale 5 See Pe ele oh eee Mae OP Maa PORE ene eis ce cana I 
Blewmnmmese Styeratss0 0 As Oey iseaie ese coke oo Sede cee oc ge ain ea eegeae omnia ae ewe cal ieee ee AO) 
ANCRON WOMANS, Bio Ue wos one atlas oeu sad Redan poppe ae eerste aoe aero oll) 
Broken gorgets. . ah eh ie Ook 9 Vk OS RR a ne Bee FS AES 2 
. P. Van Heusen, @les Tavis 

Banner stone palmate, green slate. . 

Banner stone, palmate 
Banner stones 


— 


MOND FH eR HR RW eH RRP OK DOWN DN 


Ea Ame wericntoirc il citcincm cine che kts ditel teiterne Meh elcegs! “eiielcev eis mouielary ferbeyyreme: ouiey tenuelh iat. ei) ienieh i smears nemesis cies Ae 


I 
I 
7 
Gorget, one perforation. . I 
Goins) SaRe SUSU OME nn cole Capi ae a Sate adele clever Cleo coins 6 
Gorget, two perforations......... . Ree er aaa I 
Copper spears, maine Coppehy js a5 5. 45° ha aeece ee 2 
1D eviioyrianl joriove, Tue OMIM an dane eee eed se og 5on bos 7 nap caus i 
SAT WUAS TOT Crt or ee em UP ee sats neared ap ANN de st od te AU ati eae, = 7) 
ATI SEO TTCTGLIS meee et re We Mer te eRe ich tne ed nays) Sentara ate 2s aichele ad 
SanmalSyorme Chis losrollesinl, «fh 2 pues > Seo O ee Se ao waa eo eo eee I 
Di ENeRonetanl Goyhole, GRSSVORIES Mad bo, o Mum olen oa ees Geena iam) Be arti Meena 0 
Gorget, broken... I 
Steatite pipe, fragment I 
TRS) Calavobn(el es 8 4, dele o aaa aabal Mega ae ee Gen one aero eee ee 15 
rom DOMES NV ACOs myeSae mene ree ay esac yl > 2 SOO 
Rano poms imovehed = ele aca eae eae one. tate on eee sate eet TOT 


84 NEW YORK. STATE MUSEUM 


Cheeni velewhh Wott i sy IN ne UREA RU Spee er ON 
(CIAVESCT Ey Stes 2h oy AN aU Te URE RIL IT AUER eR DCG Ns MNT ACPA J" 


NZ imely: polished) sreen!StOMeW =)40 see ym huni inWhyer (st te rs 
Coucerknobbedibacka iio. siyees wane He aN G Ue We NRIOL MATE ahi ol 
PME ES files UREN eh ea nL WL Tbe eA eee Ot Ce cn rr 
Net sinkers:)...... SIM Say cee laa CG at OY OL i 
SLeatite Pow LAS mMeNtS eyo) Pca aialotd aide cee ees ia ae 
SLOMEV DAT MO ee UN dl he eels CU celal ele ao Oa Te ear rr 
(COU ee Mee ee cSMAC NEN N NERC 
TOBA Ke SH ee so Rte OM Seeing a dnote a aN tie OO OL a rr 
Bullet mae ult eee selena ed mene me ace Al AUT Gaeta Oe rrr 
Rotsmends yi ti. henna, a ea ee RANSON YE Dina ty un oo a 3 
G@irerbmnlades ee we NaN ta A a a ea 
@herl spearheadsu ty Me ye ele ee ACen aoe Us IM Ed errr 
@hentispearieads Misi SbOIMe us ios em yee et tile Ae es ele Roa Ea 

Were yOlacdess yitei) Gy pie ee craw hse BM arg ile ole eA sr 
GOOVERIAKES wis hye le se Gece le eh ate a! ava dels Wecactle Sub Lou ACTA: 0) ON Sea ee rr 
Stone ball opposed pits ysis ban ee eee een ns 


ETHNOLOGY 


Donation 


J. W. Edmunds Estate, Glens Falls — 
Wariclubs “ShAWNEE 6 o.4ic/s 6 Ge hace Se ee: 
POTeMeS ID Gla wane wey ca ihus ic pisces Mote Wea ey el ee NRE Senay eee tee a ae 
Pairiwomen Sleseims). x's LA ek Wie © Pa eee ee ANSE eh 
aT VIMO CCASIIS/ Nek cui ke eae, EL) Seiad cer Aten Ia s8// 0 rr 
Catherine Ten Eyck & Anna Pond, Albany 
MO MMANt ASKEW Ce ake Ie ae ace elel ane) oie leland csi aeitt el neU gen ey errr 
Woodentladlewiay on Lot 


Purchase 


A. A. Schmidt 

JBYEeeNG VEX Ul OfeVevaneal ie ear tana Imma ABA Geter MnP RIG PE Maly Ao whch EN a ety 
Forrest V. L. Ryder 

Nicodentladlen ive eo Wiki a ih Sy Ul 8 RI ae NEU Gemeente Ces eae 


Ss me NH WN 


Sketch map of the manganese district of Columbia County, N. Y. 


POSTGLACIAL MANGANESE IN COLUMBIA COUNTY, 
NEW YORK 


BY NELSON C. DALE 


At the request of the State Geologist the writer has undertaken 
the investigation of these ores. 

The urgent demand for manganese as the result of the interrup- 
tion of our imports from Brazil, Russia and India in consequence 
of the war has stimulated the search for new deposits, as well as 
more detailed investigations of the possible utility of hitherto known 
deposits of low grade. 

Bog manganese was long ago reported from various places in 
Columbia county (1:54) and it seemed well to reexamine these 
occurrences. According to W. W. Mather in his report of the First 
DWistcier survey, 1836-42, ) im the counties of Columbia and 
Dutchess 50,000 tons of manganese could be procured without any 
great expense, if carefully prepared.’ He alsostated that some of the 
bog manganese showed on analysis as high as 68.5 per cent manganese 
Gxideremamiess clam 5 per cent silicay AL the direction oF the stave 
Geologist the writer has devoted most of the summer of 1917 to 
this work. The results of this investigation, though not in any 
way confirming the quantitative results of Mr Mather, are herewith 
published as a matter of record and as an account of the manner of 
the occurrence and the genesis of postglacial bog manganese. 


Physical Features 


The manganese district of Columbia county includes certain 
Swamps or marshes of small area, 1200 to 1400 feet in elevation, 
scattered throughout a north-south belt 25 miles long and 5 to 6 
miles in maximum width. This area of 125 or 150 square miles 
lies among the western foothills of the Taconic range, some 12 miles 
south of the Rensselaer plateau and 15 to 20 miles east of the Hudson 
river, principally in the townships of Canaan, Hillsdale and Ancram. 

In practically all the localities the manganese-bearing bogs occupy 
small depressions in the interhill saddles or divides, or in terracelike 
benches at the foot of hills usually at about the same elevation, 

[85] 


86 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


that is, between 1200 and 1400 feet above sea level. These bogs 
act not only as the catchment basins for drainage from the sur- 
rounding hills but also as sources for some of the small brooks and 
tributaries of the Hudson river drainage system. 

The more resistant rock formations of this area, such as the slates 
and the schists, constitute the more prominent topographic features 
like the truncated crests of folds shown in the structure of the 
Taconic range and of the smaller hills and ridges immediately to 
the west; while the less resistant rock formations, limestones prin- 
cipally, are found in the larger north-south valleys. 


General Geology of Area 


As no intensive geological work has been done south of the Auster- 
litz area in Columbia county, our knowledge of the general geological 
relations of the manganese belt can only be inferred by correlating 
certain type specimens with those known to exist farther north 
along the strike, as described by T. N. Dale (4). In referring to 
the areal distribution of the principal formations of the region, this 
writer says that “‘at the north the Cambrian belt narrows and is 
bordered on both sides by Ordovician shale and grit. Ordovician 
schist, the metamorphic equivalent of the shale and grit, constitutes 
the Daconie mange and merges) mo) theseran) the wests aliencmentc 
also a number of very small areas of Beekmantown shale (lowest 
Ordovician) overlying the Cambrian. Finally the Rensselaer grit, 
with its interbedded slate and shale, representing the basal part of 
the Silurian, constitutes the plateau, besides an outlying lenticular 
area of 43 square miles in Nassau and Chatham, another of half a 
square mile near North Nassau, and a much smaller area resting in 
the Ordovician schist near Spencertown in Austerlitz, 12 miles south 
On tne plateaus 

In a further contribution (5:2097) the same writer expresses the 
view that the mica schist referred to is the Berkshire schist of the 
Ordovician system, whereas the grit found in the vicinity of Canaan 
and Spencertown is probably the Rensselaer grit of the lower 
Silurian, as these rocks not only appear to be the same so far as 
microscopic characters are concerned but are on the strike of the 
mapped occurrences to the north and bear somewhat similar strati- 
graphical relations to each other, the grit overlying the schist. In 
the vicinity of Canaan, at the Girdler road corners, gently southeast- 
dipping purple and green slates were found interbedded with green 
Rensselaer grit, the latter occurring with cavernous quartz veins 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 87 


lined with the dusty, brownish black dioxide of manganese. Not 
far from this locality loose boulders of the Rensselaer grit showed 
dark, circular areas considerably disintegrated but blackened by the 
oxides of manganese. An occasional vein of quartz and calcite was 
found in the grit showing the effect of solution on the calcite and the 
vein walls somewhat darkened by the oxides of manganese. 

In the vicinity of Spencertown, the grit, slate and schist area 
through which the Spencertown-Austerlitz state road was recently 
cut shows a conspicuous veined zone in the grit, consisting of 
numerous branching quartz veins with conspicuous pink orthoclase 
and massive chlorite. 

Nearer the village of Spencertown, on the same road, in the slate 
area, the oxides of manganese are conspicuous by their black stains. 
The purple and green slates associated with the grits of Canaan as 
well as those just cited in connection with the grits of Spencertown 
are doubtless a part of the Ordovician system. 


Mineralogy of the Manganese Belt 


Bog manganese, otherwise known as wad, a variety of psilomelane, 
is a brownish black amorphous mineral consisting of varying amounts 
of the oxides of manganese. It is usually earthy but frequently 
coal-like to submetallic in luster, the variation no doubt signi- 
fying a transformation to the higher oxides. The occurrence of 
bog manganese as pure hydrous oxide of manganese is very rare. 
The common impurities are iron, silica, phosphorus and barium: 
the silica and phosphorus are objectionable for the metallurgical use 
of the ore. 

The bog manganese of Columbia county has three habits of 
occurrence: nodular, aggregates and hardpan cement. The nodular 
variety is usually found at the surface overlying the other two forms. 
Nodules somewhat brownish in color and usually enveloped in a 
whitish clay, in which material they are also embedded, have gener- 
ally elliptical and subspherical forms with a suggestion of slightly 
developed botryoidal structure. In size they vary from a pinhead 
to one-half of an inch in diameter. In dry bogs these nodules occur 
in the outlets of swamps or in the beds of brooks, the enveloping 
clay having disappeared, leaving a brownish black surface to the 
nodule. To this type the name of stream manganese has been 
applied. 

The second variety of wad, less common than the loose nodular 
type, was nodular aggregations in a matrix of whitish gray clay 


88 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


cemented in great part by a manganiferous clay. Though found in 
only a few localities, such as in the Gott-Mesick bog of Spencer- 
town and in the Palmer bog of North Hillsdale, it underlaid the loose 
nodular zone and occurred at about the level of the water table or 
where circulating underground water was most active (see figure r). 
The accumulation for the most part consisted of irregular masses 
of roughly lenticular form 2 to 3 square feet in area and about 6 
inches thick, as in the Gott-Mesick bog. In these masses the 
nodules and clay were in equal proportion. 

Considerably less frequent in occurrence was the third variety, 
the most impure of the three types, which consisted of a glacial 
hardpan composed of boulders and rock fragments in a matrix of 
hardened clay and cemented together by films of manganese dioxide. 
Many of the rock constituents, which were largely of mica schist, 
had thick coatings of the dioxide. 

Of the three varieties, by far the most common is the loose, 
nodular type which characterizes ail the surficial zones of the locali- 
ties about to be described. 


Spencertown, Columbia County 


The Gott-Mesick bog on the two adjoining properties of the Gott 
and Mesick estates is situated in the township of Austerlitz, Columbia 
county, about 23 miles east of the village of Spencertown and 74 
miles east of the nearest railway station at Chatham, N. Y. It is 
reached by a trail heading north through the eastern part of the 
Henderson estate (formerly the Gott estate). 

Immediately west of the Henderson trail is a bog, forested along 
the edges and sparsely so throughout, about 500 feet long and 300 
feet wide. Drillings with an earth auger showed an average depth 
of 3 feet. A representative section of this consisted in large part of 
gravelly blue clay, peat and sand. It contained no bog manganese, 
except in one place on the western edge, where a small area of nodular 
manganese was found fringing the shore from a point 15 feet north 
of a dry brook to 30 feet beyond, with an average width of 15 feet 
and a depth of 1 foot (figure 1). In this area of 450 square feet the 
wad occurred as nodules and irregular masses varying from a 
fraction of an inch to 3 or 4 inches in diameter and commonly char- 
_acterized by thin laminae of limonite. Occasionally the larger 
irregular masses appeared to consist of aggregations of manganese 
with loose rock, the pebbles and fragments of rock as a rule being 
vein quartz, mica schist and grit. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQ17 89 


Nodular bog manganese was found on the top of a small 15-foot 
north-south ridge of vertically inclined beds of Rensselaer grit 
mantled with humus and glacial detritus, above and directly west 
of the bog just described. 

In the bed of a dry brook leading across the ridge from the circular 
black muck bog to the larger bog 15 feet below, numerous brownish 
black subspherical nodules of bog manganese were found, the dis- 
covery of which led to further investigation by drilling and trenching, 
the result of which was that an area of about 625 square feet was 
found to be underlaid by nodular manganese to a depth of 2 feet, 
the upper 11 inches of which consisted of a nodular wad and the 
lower 6 inches of a massive or consolidated nodular aggregate, the 


Nodulav 


Hovizontal 75° 
Vevtical 30’ 


Fig. 1 Gott-Mesick manganese bog locality, Spencertown, N. Y. 


latter type occurring either as fragments about a foot or more square, 
or forming a more or less continuous lenslike bed overlying a whitish 
clay. Through the more massive manganiferous bed and between 
it and the underlying whitish clay, water was in circulation, flowing 
doubtless from the upper circular bog to the lower bog. 

Reference to the accompanying figure will suggest to the reader 
that a probable genesis of the manganese may be assigned to the 
swamp waters circulating through the top of the ridge from the 
upper bog to the lower. This subject, however, is considered later 
on. 

In the two closely adjacent areas it may be safely said, after 
drilling and trenching, that bog manganese underlies about 825 
square feet and that altogether there are about 1250 cubic feet of 
manganiferous soil, allowing 14 feet for an average thickness. It is 


go NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


safe to estimate that about 50 per cent of this consisted of soil, 
gravel and clay, bringing the volume of manganiferous material to 
625 cubic feet. Allowing approximately 135 pounds of clay and 
gravel to the cubic foot and of the manganese about 100 pounds, 
the contents of the mixture in this area would approximate 75 tons 
or about 4o tons for the bog manganese. 


Hillsdale, Columbia County 
The manganese bog of the Palmer farm is situated 14 miles south- 
west of North Hillsdale between two small hills, 1340 and 1390 feet 
in elevation, respectively. As in the Gott-Mesick bog this one, 


Fig. 2 Palmer manganese bog, North Hillsdale, N. Y. 


because of its small area, is also not shown on the topographic map, 
but it is about one-half of a mile long and one-fourth of a mile wide 
with the greater portion of it forested and watery, serving as a 
source for a small southeasterly and a northeasterly flowing brook. 

In the bed of the southeasterly flowing brook, not far from the 
outlet of the bog, infrequent brownish black subspherical nodules of 
' bog manganese, averaging about one-half of an inch in diameter, 
were found. Upon following up the stream, these led to the discovery 
of their source on the northwestern side of the bog. The accompany- 
ing diagram (figure 2) presents the main features of this occurrence. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 OI 


By frequent and numerous drillings and trenchings, the manganese 
area was delimited to a patch 130 feet in length by 50 feet in width, 
approximating 6500 square feet in area. Under this area to a depth 
of 1+ feet bog manganese occurs in greater or less amounts largely 
as nodular wad with only a slight local development of nodular 
aggregates. 

Allowing 235 pounds of sand, clay and manganese to the cubic 
foot and so per cent of the volume as consisting of bog manganese, 
this bog should yield approximately 450 tons of wad. 

According to Mr Mather, “a bed of wad or earthy oxide of man- 
ganese has been found on the farm of Joseph Goodsell in Hillsdale.” 
Mr Calvin Prescott dug 50 tons of the ore some years ago and sold 
it for $20 a ton in New York. As Mr Joseph Goodsell at the time 
this record was made owned four farms not adjacent, the manganese 
bog in question was located with much difficulty. It was found to 
be 3 miles northeast of Crearyville and the same distance northwest 
of Hillsdale. 

A narrow east-west open and stony black muck bog or “run” 
about 450 feet long with an average width of 25 feet was found just 
west of the old Joseph Goodsell farm. Asin the other description of 
bogs, this occupied a small divide between two hills at an elevation 
of 1200 feet above sea level, from the eastern end of which a small 
brook was flowing. The bog was found to contain numerous man- 
ganiferous nodules at the western half and an intensely black, earthy, 
manganiferous muck throughout the eastern half. The nodules 
varied in size from that of small shot to larger diameters. Limonite 
nodules were found sparingly.. Manganese dioxide was present in 
the form of cement which consolidated the local areas of boulders 
and clay. An occasional fragment of nodular aggregate consisting of 
clay and wad was found. 

One of the most interesting occurrences of manganese was noted 
here in the form of a bluish black iridescent scum surfacing a few of 
the small pools of water in the bog proper, not unlike the yellowish 
green iridescent scum associated with iron springs. This scum may 
well be one of the manganese minerals similar to the iron scum and 
originating as a result of bacterial action. 

The percentage of manganese in this bog is higher than in all the 
others, averaging about 22 per cent. 

With a surface of 10,750 square feet and an average thickness of 
13 feet, allowing one-third of the volume for bog manganese, the 
writer estimates that there is approximately 600 tons of bog man- 
ganese in this locality. 


G2 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


several other localities in the vicinity of North Hillsdale possibly 
warrant brief mention because of the manner of occurrence. 

On another of Joseph Goodsell’s farms, now occupied by Henry 
Duff, a negligible amount of bog manganese has been accumulat- 
ing in an irregular bog about one-half of a mile north of the farm 
in a small depression in an open pasture west of the road. The 
location of this bog is near the 1200-foot contour and in a schist area. 
The accompanying diagram (figure 3) illustrates the essential 
features of the occurrence. The manganese content is probably low, 
as can be seen by referring to the analysis on page 9s. Wad is 
found more or less evenly distributed throughout an area of 2460 


Fig. 3 Henry Duff manganese bog, Hillsdale, N. Y. 


square feet to the depth of 1 foot. By allowing 50 per cent of the 
area to consist of bog manganese in the form of nodules, the other 
part taken up largely by boulders and clay, the estimate of approxi- 
mately 125 tons is made. 

An interesting locality 2 miles northwest of North Hillsdale was 
found in the middle of the road where the overflow from a roadside 
marsh crosses the road to lower ground on the other side. This 
occurrence consisted of a nodular aggregate pavement of wad, the 
writer’s attention being called to it by the dark manganiferous 
nodules, looking much like a conglomerate consisting of dark pebbles 
in a whitish cement. Neither in the bottom of the bog, in the brook, 
nor on the land adjacent to it, was the writer able to find signs of 
any more bog manganese. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 93 


Ancram, Columbia County 

Three miles southeast of Ancram lead mine on the top of the south 
extension of Fox hill, between the 1200 and 1300-foot contour, and 
in the bed of a brook near its source, numerous subspherical nodules 
of bog manganese were found. This occurrence is near the outlet 
of the bog, extending along a westerly flowing brook for a distance 
of 200 feet and to a depth of 1 foot. The important characteristics 
are its elevation of 1200 feet, its occurrence in a bog near the outlet 
and its association with the Berkshire schist. 


Canaan, N. Y. 
In the search for the occurrence on David Parson’s farm which 
Mr Mather (10: 121) refers to as being three-fourths of a mile south 
of Canaan Center, the writer found some six other localities where 


Fig. 4 David Parsons manganese bog, Canaan, N. Y. 


bog manganese is found. The David Parson’s occurrence is now on 
the property of Mr Beaver about 1} miles west of Flatbrook and 1 
mile southwest of the Boston & Albany Railroad tunnel. It is 1120 
feet above sea level and between two small knolls of 1160 and 1192 
feet in elevation respectively. 

By a boring, it was found that the manganese sections were 
restricted to two main localities, one within 130 feet of the outlet 


94 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


with an area of 3960 square feet, and the other within 300 feet of the 
outlet with an area of 1350 square feet, making a total combined 
area of 5310 square feet. By trenching at the outlet another area 
was found but of negligible importance. From a study of three 
east-west trenches of 30 feet and 18 feet in respective length, a 
vertical section revealed 11 inches of brown, loamy clay with loose, 


; Fig. 5 Girdler manganese bog, Canaan, N. Y. 


nodular manganese with infrequent nodular aggregates locally 
developed, both overlying a bluish green unconsolidated hardpan. 
The nodules were generally less than an inch in diameter and sub- 
spherical in shape with a coating of whitish clay. Upon washing off 
the clay the characteristic brownish black color prevailed, which 
became darker upon cutting them open. The stream manganese 
exhibited this characteristic because of natural washing and doubtless 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 95 


can be accounted for by the high content of iron. Figure 4 illustrates 
the occurrence. Upon following the brook west from this outlet, a 
small deposit. of nodular wad is found at the debouchure of the small 
brook in the swamp below. The proportion of manganese in the 
main bog is, according to analysis, 12.20 per cent. By a conservative 
estimate the bog manganese in this occurrence is about 300 tons. 

On the-estate of R. H. Girdler, situated about 1 mile south of 
Canaan Center, a small occurrence of nodular bog manganese was 
discovered in the summer of 1917. The manganese for the most 
part is in the form of nodules, nodular aggregates and as a cement for 
the underlying consolidated hardpan. A section from the trench 
reveals 12 inches of brownish yellow clayey loam with abundant 
nodules and occasional nodular aggregates, 28 inches of consolidated 
hardpan with occasional boulders and rock fragments cemented by 
manganese dioxide, in a matrix of whitish clay overlying a non- 
manganiferous consolidated hardpan. Figure 5 illustrates this 
deposit. 

In an area of 5000 square feet adjacent to the outlet stream and 
outlet portion of the bog, it is estimated that about 300 tons of 
manganese may be found. 

In several other localities on the terracelike benches and divides 
of Shaker mountain traces of nodular manganese were found in 
marshy places overlying and adjacent to schist, slate and grit areas. 


Chemical analyses 


LOCALITY Mn Fe 2 Ba 


Gott-Mesick Bog, Spencertown, N. Y......... Aa Tiss say .04 sii 
jeGoodsell HulisdalessN. Yue aoe el aoe DOE ZO EN RO mie att Jo eMail Ns Odeo 
Paealmer North, HullsdaleoN. Y..2 oJ a5 OTPTOM ees Mieke alie! ata 


Dare arsons.. Canaan INO Vo: ae Oe LOZ Ome eal eee cate 


No attempt has been made to make an exhaustive analysis of the 
samples. Doubtless the iron would average about the same in the 
other localities as in the Gott-Mesick bog and the same might be 
inferred for the phosphorus and barium. The analyses and the 
clay associations of the manganese would lead us to think that the 
silica content is very high. The blackest of the manganese bogs, 
that of J. Goodsell, seems to contain the highest percentage of 
manganese as well as the highest tonnage. 


96 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Genesis of the Manganese Deposits 


The western foothill county of the Taconic range, in which the 
bog manganese occurs, consists for the most part of irregular hills 
more or less conical in shape and of no great height. The depressions 
now occupied by the manganese bogs are no doubt a product of 
preglacial subaerial and glacial erosion; the claylike materials filling 
them are of glacio-lacustrine deposition. Since the withdrawal of 
the glacier, this region has been reclaimed by vegetation giving rise 
in some of the depressions to peat. 

Trenchings, test pits and drillings frequently made throughout the 
bog area all testify to a recent origin for the manganese. The lower- 
most underlying materials as a rule consist of a bedrock of grit or 
schist, overlaid by consolidated hardpan or till with or without a 
manganiferous cement and a bluish or light gray’ clay, containing 
manganiferous nodular aggregates or nodular wad, surfaced with a 
clayey loam or a dark loam clay with nodular bog manganese. 

The immediately associated beds of bluish or light gray clay 
holding faceted boulders and rock fragments, are of glacial origin, 
arising from fluviatile or lacustrine deposition. Later additions were 
made in the form of sand, iron and manganese, constituting the 
clayey loam soil and the bog manganese and bog iron ore. ‘The 
nodular form assumed by the oxide of manganese, as shown by 
Hjort and Murray in connection with deep sea nodules and by the 
writer in the study of Cambrian manganese of Conception and 
Trinity bay, Newfoundland, is a phenomenon due to chemical and 
playsieal causes, as will” be discussed later im this (papenammeame 
characteristic form, so far as revealed in Columbia county bogs, is 
purely secondary, and the formation of nodules and nodular aggre- 
gates is taking place parz passu with the addition of the oxides of 
manganese. The fact that manganiferous waters have been and 
are percolating through the clayey beds is most strikingly ,brought 
out by the coatings of MnO, in the loose rock fragments and boulders 
in the clay. 

The adjacency of the manganese deposits to the bogs and bog 
waters is a most significant relationship, so far as the immediate 
genesis of the manganese is concerned. Chemical investigation leads 
to the conclusion that manganese exists in surface waters either in 
the form of the bicarbonate or the sulphate. Through oxidation 
of either of these, manganese is precipitated as the dioxide of man- 
ganese. This oxidation may take place wherever oxygenated con- 
ditions are present; such as at the surface of bog waters: or imeane 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 Q7 


candy clay adjacent to bogs through which manganiferous waters 
are percolating. At the Gott-Mesick locality (figure 2) at the time 
the trench was made, the manganese zone illustrated a significant 
coincidence in this respect. From the upper bog water was running 
through the zone above the clay as ground water.in the direction of 
the lower bog. Where the manganese was best developed in the 
form of nodular masses there occurred a water channel from which 
water flowed out into the trench. It would not seem at all unlikely 
therefore that the greater development of the manganese in the 
Gott-Mesick bog was due to the continuous contribution of the 
manganiferous waters, originating from the upper bog and flowing 
as ground water to the lower bog. The porosity of the loamy clay 
of the ridge would naturally furnish excellent oxidizing conditions, 
as a result of which the conversion of the bicarbonate to the dioxide 
might readily take place. 

The ultimate origin of the manganese must be sought for in the 
rock underlying the drainage basin of the bogs. The bog depressions, 
of course, act as natural reservoirs for the immediate run-off of the 
surrounding country, through the various small tributaries. In 
considering the general geology of the area, it was found that all the 
manganese bogs were located at about the same general elevation, 
and that beneath all the bogs the same type of rocks belonging to 
the same geological horizon occurred. It was the hope of the writer 
that the ultimate origin or source of the manganese might be trace- 
able to the associated rock formations with some beds of primary 
manganese mineral, but no definite evidence in the matter was forth- 
coming. The chief formations underlying the manganiferous section 
are the Hudson River schists, and greenish, reddish and purplish 
slates, all belonging to the Ordovician and the Rensselaer grit of the 
lower part of the Silurian system. Of course nothing but a petro- 
graphic examination has been made of these formations in the 
Hudson valley, so far as the writer is aware, but from their 
northern occurrences in Vermont and New York the Hudson grits 
were essentially clastic rocks composed of fragments of quartz, 
muscovite, plagioclase, chlorite, sericite, quartzite, slate and some 
carbonate (4:187). 

The red slates of the slate belt of Vermont and New York, with 
which the schists of the Hudson river are to be correlated, show as 
much as 30 per cent MnQO,. , 

‘“Beds of carbonate of a manganese (rhodochrosite) a half inch 
thick with calcite and quartz occurring in the red Ordovician slates,”’ 
yielding 32.22 per cent of MnOz, are reported. 


98 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


With this amount of manganese in the same formations and not 
far distant, and the significant coincidence of the association of the 
bogs with this formation, it seems reasonable to suppose that the 
metamorphosed Ordovician and possibly lower Silurian formations 
are the ultimate source of the manganese which has given rise to the 
concentrated derivatives in the form of bog manganese or wad in 
the high bogs of the western foothills of the Taconic range in Colum- 
bia county. 

The only evidence of the occurrence of some form of manganese in 
these formations was shown in the 1917 Spencertown-Austerlitz 
state road cutting near Spencertown where the schists and slates 
were discolored by the dioxide. The Rensselaer grits, east of this 
locality, were intrically veined with pink orthoclase, chlorite and 
quartz unaccompanied by any manganese staining. 

In the vicinity of Canaan on the Girdler farm, numerous specimens 
of cavernous quartz as evidence of the work of solution were found, 
but whether the original mineral filling the cavities was calcite or 
rhodochrosite could not be determined, though the cavities were 
lined with the powdery black dioxide of manganese. 

For the reasons given above, the writer believes that the rocks 
underlying the drainage areas are in all probability the ultimate 
source of the manganese. The decomposition of the silicate minerals 
no doubt was brought about by carbonic acid and the “ so-called 
humic sols, the latter consisting of about Soper cent ©) Ass pemecwn 
O45 per cent El, 2 per cent N and some @)and!S teundeiaenac 
amounts in marshy water.” 

On the J. Goodsell bog, which contained the highest amount of 
manganese, a thin film of dark greenish and bluish iridescent coating 
was found quite like the iridescent coating found in connection with 
bog limonite and iron springs, but unlike it so far as the darker 
degree of color is concerned. According to Beyschlag, Vogt and 
Kruseh (2:986)' The humic ‘sols are not precipitated iby menneus 
but by ferric salts. When a solution containing ferrous salts meets 
one containing humic sols, a soluble ferro-humate is first formed 
which upon oxidation passes gradually over to ferri-humate. This 
is in fact immediately precipitated, forming there the thin, often 
iridescent coating which when present in spring courses indicates 
the ferruginous character of the water.’’ If upon examination any 
of the iridescent scum of manganese bogs proves to contain manga- 
nese in large amounts, such an origin as conveyed by the foregoing 
quotation might very well indicate similar origin for the manganese. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 99 


Of course there is no direct evidence that these manganese deposits 
are of organic origin but it is very possible that the humic sols may 
have played an important part in the decomposition of manganese- 
bearing silicates in the rocks underlying the drainage basin of the 
bogs. As manganese hydroxide has been found on the walls of the 
iron bacteria, it is highly probable that bacteria may cause the 
manganese to be precipitated from the sol humates which take the 
humates up in the carbonate form and precipitate it in their bodies 
as the hydroxide. Further investigations along this line have still 
to prove how great and how general such action is. 

Assuming then that the manganese exists in the bog waters in 
some soluble form, possibly in that of the bicarbonate, its precipita- 
tion must have taken place through the oxidation of the same or as 
the result of the presence of calcareous bicarbonate. As a precip- 
itate, it is very possible that manganese exists as a colloidal hydroxide 
quite as much as the hydroxide of iron does after its chemical changes 
from the soluble to the solid form. . Whether the precipitation takes 
place in the fresh-water bogs as in the deep sea free from clayey 
admixtures or subsequent to absorption by the clay, is a problem; 
though it would seem to the writer that the clayey solids etc., do 
act as absorbents as they do with the hydroxide of silica, iron and 
alumina (12:288). 

The assumption of the nodular and concretionary forms seems to 
the writer to be a purely physical matter, the result of the tendency 
of substances in mobile state to collect 1n bodies of smallest surface 
area in proportion to mass. The centrifugal force or the accommo- 
dating of the interior mass to the dimensions of the outer envelop 
appears to be a characteristic of many minerals, especially those of a 
calcareous, siliceous, ferruginous or manganiferous nature. Deep 
sea nodules (11), and Cambrian manganese of Newfoundland 
(3:450) illustrate this principle of surface tension as well as nodules 
of the Columbia county manganese bogs. 


Bibliography 

1 Beck. Mineralogy of New York. Albany, 1842 

2 Beyschlag, Vogt, & Krusch. The Deposits of the Useful Minerals and 
Rocks. Translation by Truscott. 1916. v. 2 

3 Dale, N. C. The Cambrian Manganese Deposits of Conception and Trinity 
Bays, Newfoundland. Am. Phil. Soc., 1915, 54:371-456 

4 Dale, T. N. Geology of the Hudson Valley between the Hoosic and the 
Kinderhook. U.S. G.5S. Bul. 242. 1904 

5 ————_ The Rensselaer Grit Plateau in New York. U.S. G.S., 13th 
Ann. Rep’t, 1894, p. 297-540 


A 


100 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


6 Dale, T. N. The Slate Belt of Eastern New York and Western Vermont. 
UPS Gis. roth Anne prt.. ob 2h mlsoo 

7 Gilpin, E. Manganese Ores of Nova Scotia, Translation by Roy. Soe. 
@anada: ive12 

8 Harder, E.C. Manganese Deposits of Nova Scotia with Sections on Foreign 
Deposits, Chemistry and Uses. \U: S,Gis: Bul. 427; 1010; ps 1-208 

9 Jones, H.C. Nature of Solutions. 1917 

to Mather, W. W. Geology of New York, pt 1, Albany, 1843 

11 Murray, Sir John, & Hjort, John. Depths of the Ocean. 1913. p. 821. 
4 maps, 9 plates 

12 Murray, John, & Irvine, Robert. On Manganese Oxides and Manganese 
Nodules in Marine Deposits; Trans. Royal Soc., Edinburgh, 1894, 37: 
721 —A2 

13 Penrose, R. A. F. Manganese: Its Uses, Ores, and Deposits. Ann. Rep’t 
Geol. Surv. of Ark. for 1890, 1: 1-642 

14 Vogt, J. H. L. Uber manzanwiesenerz und tber das verhaltniss zwischen 
eisen und mangan in den Seeund Wiesenerzen. Zeits. fur prakt. Geol., 
UCWWO, De Al 7i—2e 


FOLIATION OF THE GNEISSOID SYENITE-GRANITE COM- 
PLEX OF LEWIS COUNTY, NEW YORK 


BY A. F. BUDDINGTON 


The data and conclusions herewith presented are for the most 
part abstracted from a report on the geology of the Lake Bonaparte 
quadrangle, prepared at the request of the State Geologist. In its 
preparation the writer was associated with Dr C. H. Smyth, jr. 
Some additional information obtained subsequently by the writer 
in a study of the geology of the Lowville quadrangle has also been 
used. 

The origin and significance of the foliated structure in the gneisses 
which constitute the Adirondacks have been discussed by many 
writers in recent years, and widely diverse views have been expressed. 
On the one hand, Miller! asserts a primary origin for the foliation 
of the igneous gneisses and ascribes it to flowage phenomena and 
crushing during the progress of consolidation of the magma, resulting 
from the efforts of the igneous magma to shoulder aside blocks of 
Grenville gneiss into which it is intrusive. He further states it as 
his belief that “‘ none of the published Adirondack maps or available 
data afford any reasons to believe that the Grenville strata were 
ever profoundly folded or compressed.’’ On the other hand Smyth, 
Cushing, and Martin have presented very strong evidence that 
intense orogenic forces have acted upon the Precambric gneisses of 
the northwestern Adirondacks, with the conspicuous result of 
isoclinal folding. In particular, Martin? has studied and mapped 
in great detail a great sigmoidal fold in the vicinity of Pierrepont. 

An intensive study of over six hundred thin sections of rocks 
embraced wituin the area of the Lake Bonaparte and Lowville 
quadrangles has furnished considerable new data bearing on this 
problem. <A brief summary of the data and the conclusions drawn 
therefrom relative to the foli:ation.of the syenite-granite gneissic 
complex is presented here. For the most part they confirm Miller’s 
conclusions as to the primary origin of most of the foliation in the 
igneous gneisses, but on the other hand they conform to the belief 
that strong orogenic forces of mountain-building intensity have 
affected the rocks of this district. 


1 Miller, W. J., Origin of Foliation in the Precambric Rocks of Northern New 
York, Jour. Geol., 1916, 24: 587-619. 
Martin, J. C., The Precambrian Rocks of the Canton Quadrangle, N. Y. 
State Mus. Bul. 185, 1916. 
[ror] 


102 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


General Description 


The southeastern half of the Lake Bonaparte and most of the 
Lowville quadrangles are underlain by a banded or belted gneissic 
complex. The composition of these belts ranges from a siliceous 
granite through grano-syenite, hornblende syenite and augite syenite, 
tO) a basic augite-hypersthene Syenite, Die belts are lememeame 
narrow, usually varying from one-half of a mile to several miles in 
width. Blocks of Grenville gneiss occur as scattered inclusions or as 
a host of separated fragments here and there. The belts possess in 
general a northeast-southwest trend but with conspicuous deviations 
in the northwest corner of the Lowville area and the southwest 
corner of the Lake Bonaparte quadrangle, where the bands strike 
east-west and northwest-southeast. The banded or belted nature 
of the syenite-granite gneissic complex is indicated in a generalized 
way on the accompanying map. “Toward the northwest the igneous 
gneisses are bordered by the Grenville series, comprising gneisses 
and limestones intruded by granites which extend to the St Lawrence. 
On the southwest they are overlain unconformably by sedimentary 
beds of Paleozoic age. 

The different rocks of this syenitic complex may be roughly 
grouped as belonging to two masses, the members of each of which 
possess some characters in common which are different from the 
other. Thus the rocks of what has been called the Diana mass 
uniformly have a coarse porphyritic texture with phenocrysts up to 
I or 2 inches in diameter, and when examined in thin section show a 
partial granulation or pulverization (plates 2 and 3). The mem- 
bers of the other body, named the Croghan mass, are uniformly 
medium equigranular and in thin section show no signs of crushing 
whatever (plate 1). Each mass, however, has an equally wide 
variation in composition. But the Diana mass is on the whole one 
step more basic than the Croghan. Thus, the members of the 
former body range from an augite-hypersthene syenite to a horn- 
blende grano-syenite, whereas the latter ranges from an augite 
syenite to an acid granite. The area occupied by each mass is 
indicated on the map by the boundary line separating the crushed 
from the uncrushed gneisses; the Diana body lying to the northwest 
of the line and the Croghan mass to the southeast. All the members 
of both masses, however, possess a foliation equally well developed. 
Both bodies are cut by veins of granitic pegmatite and by hyperite 
dikes. The latter are most abundant in the vicinity of a stock of 
gabbro indicated on the map. 


Gn 


JRO SEIN Gr 


Va M7- 
: 
CLL G iyi, 7, G1 


Hy 


Gr 


Gi 


SSE 


TA 


103 


) masses 
to their 
drawn, 


orphism 
ag from 
yutheast 
ich the 
') proto- 
ninerals 
and (c) 
sh most 
inulated 
1ere the 
average 
o.1 mm 


sses are 
vhich in 
napped, 
eastern 
he Lake 
iging to 
es form 
eisses of 


in what 
1e blunt 
yanding. 
ROL EEMe 
the way 
1 and all 
deas) ie 


egree of 
massive 
ed cata- 
between 
directly 
yrthwest 
rthwest 


Gneissic Igneous Complex 


Gabbro 


G:anite, coarse equigranular 


Granite, fine grained porphyritic 


Grar.c-syenite, equigranular 


Granc-syenite, porphyritic 


Hornblende syenite, includes both the 
porphyritic and equigranular facies 


Augite syenite, includes both the por- 
phyritic and equigranular facies 


= 
S 
= 
am 
So 
= 
S 
>) 
is) 
ah 
ctr 
ct) 
i>) 
ce 
be) 
ma 
FAY 
is) 
—} 
SS; 
m 


Basic augite syenite, includes both the 
porphyritic and equigranular facies 


Grenville 
= Grenville gneisses and limestone with 
——— intrusive granites 


Paleozoic 


Sedimentary beds overlying the Pre- 
cambric rocks unconformably 


‘aj[buvapony aljinmor 


emmme== Boundary between different facies of 
Syenite-Granite complex 


eo Boundary between equigranular 
gneisses (Croghan Mass) which 
exhibit no evidences of crushing and 
protoclastic gneiss (Diara Mass) 
on NW., which is porphyritic 


; (1 
— Boundary between protoclastic and \ ‘ NW Savy 
cataclastic-protoclastic gneiss on hF, NAS 


NW., both of which are porphyritic 


Sketch Map of Geology of Lowville and Lake Bonaparte Quadrangles, N. Y. 


102 


The sx 
Lowville 
complex 
granite | 
TOmaog 
narrow, 
width. 

a host o 
general ¢ 
in the 1 
corner ¢ 
east-wes 
Gt wae © 
way on 
eneisses 
and lime 
On the ; 
beds of - 

The 
grouped 
possess ; 
other. 
uniforml 
FeO 2) 10 
partial ¢ 
bers of 
medium 
whatevel 
variatior 
step mo 
former b 
blende ¢ 
syenite 1 
indicatec 
from the 
of the lin 
of both : 
Both boc 
dikes. 7] 
gabbro 11 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 pe lO 


From a study of the thin sections of the rocks of these two masses 
and from the results obtained by grouping them according to their 
degree of crushing, the following conclusions have been drawn, 
based on the accompanying briefly summarized data: 

1 There are three well-defined bands or zones of rmetamorphism 
in which increasing degrees of crushing are exhibited passing from 
the southeast to the northwest; comprising (a) gneiss of the southeast 
zone in which there is no evidence of crushing and in which the 
texture is of massive granitoid character (plates 1 and 4); (b) proto- 
clastic gneiss of the central zone in which most of the minerals 
are granulated but in which quartz is uncrushed (plate 2) and (c) 
cataclastic-protoclastic gneiss of the northwest zone in which most 
of the minerals are pulverized but in which quartz is only granulated 
(plate 3). The line between (b) and (c) has been drawn where the 
quartz first starts to appear granulated and where the average 
diameter of the pulverized feldspar grains averages less than o.1 mm 
in diameter. 

2 The uncrushed gneiss is equigranular, the crushed gneisses are 
porphyritic im texture (plates 1, 2 and 3). The gneiss which in 
thin section shows no evidence of crushing forms, so far as mapped, 
a band with a minimum width of to miles covering the eastern 
portion of the Lowville area and the southeast corner of the Lake 
Bonaparte quadrangle. It embraces all the gneisses belonging to 
the Croghan syenite-granite complex. The crushed gneisses form 
a band 5 miles wide, so far as mapped, and comprise the gneisses of 
the Diana syenite complex. 

3 Foliation and banding are always parallel. No matter in what 
direction the belts extend nor how abrupt the curve at the blunt 
end of a lense, the foliation always remains parallel to the banding. 

4 The degree of crushing is for the most part independent of the 
chemical or mineralogical composition. Rocks varying all the way 
from hyperite to granite occur in each zone of metamorphism and all 
within a given zone are equally crushed or equally uncrushed as the 
case may be. 

5 The foliation is for the most part independent of the degree of 
granulation or crushing (plates 1, 2 and 3). The gneisses of massive 
texture exhibit as well-defined a foliation as do the pulverized cata- 
clastic gneisses. The line of equal crushing or demarkation between 
the protoclastic and cataclastic-protoclastic gneiss cuts directly 
across the banding and direction of foliation of the gneisses northwest 
of Croghan. The foliation of the gneisses in this area (the northwest - 


104 NEW YORK ss TAGE MUS HMavi 


corner of the Lowville area) is thus at a large angle to the direction 
of the forces which acted to crush the gneisses, and the latter can 
thus have had little or nothing to do directly with the foliation. 

6 The foliation may be slightly accentuated by the crushing. 

7 In the crushed gneisses, those minerals which are most mashed 
are the ones which normally crystallize out first in quantity from a 
magma; and vice versa, the last minerals to crystallize out are the 
least crushed. Thus in the case of the protoclastic gne‘sses, feldspar, 
hornblende and aug.te are the most crushed, whereas quartz is 
wholly uncrushed. Again, in the cataclastic-protoclastic gneiss, the 
feldspar and ferromagnesian minerals are pulverized and the quartz 
is only granulated. In some of the gneiss two generations of mag- 
netite are present. In this case that occurring as inclusions in other 
minerals and representing an early stage of crystallization 1s crushed, 
whereas that associated with the quartz of a late pneumatolytic 
stage 1s massive. In the hyperite dikes the augite may be partially 
eranulated and the feldspars unaffected. 

8 In the cataclastic gneisses the degree of crushing of the quartz 
is roughly proportional to the degree of mashing of the other minerals, 
the quartz varying from 2 to 5 times as coarse as the comminuted 
feldspar. 

9 The primary foliation of the gneiss witha “massive waremnine 
forming the southeast zone is due to mineral segregation, dimensional 
orientation of minerals by crystallization under stress, and to flowage 
in the magma. There is no crushing of the minerals and only here 
and there do strain shadows appear in the quartz. The occurrence 
of inclusions with a foliation at an angle to that of the inclosing rock, 
the occasional presence of flowage lines swirling around a host of 
separated small inclusions of Grenville gneiss, a texture and succes- 
sion of crystallization normal to igneous rocks, occasional euhedral 
character of the crystals, the frequent segregation of apatite, zircon 
and magnetite with the ferromagnesian minerals in streaks, and the 
presence of pract’cally massive hyperite dikes of an age older than 
the foliation of the country rock, militate against an explanation of 
this foliation by recrystallization. 

to The protoclastic origin of the foliation of the central zone is 
evidenced by the following data: the granulated character of the 
feldspars and ferromagnesian minerals and the normally uncrushed 
character of the quartz; the parallel'sm of foliation and banding 
irrespective of the widely divergent orientations of the latter, a 
phenomenon best explained as the result of crushing in a semifluid 


Upper figure. Hornblende syenite. Primary gneissic structure 
with massive texture. Natural size. From Croghan mass. 
Lower figure. Photomicrograph of above showing massive grani- 
toid texture, crossed nicols. x17 


Upper figure. Hornblende syenite. Augen gneiss with 
protoclastic texture. From the Diana mass and the central 
zone of metamorphism. Natural size. 

Lower figure. Photomicrograph of above; quartz uncrushed, 
other minerals granulated; protoclastic texture. Crossed 
IC OLS ea li7, 


Mice. cr 


are 


Upper figure. Hornblende grano-syenite. Augen gneiss 
with cataclastic-protoclastic texture. From Diana mass, 
n.w. border. Natural size. 

Lower figure. Photomicrograph of above; quartz 
granulated, other minerals pulverized. Crossed nicols. 
x7, 


REPORE OM THE DIRECTOR 1O17 105 


or semiviscous state. A primary foliation independent of any 
crushing is indicated by the frequent parallel alignment of slender, 
unbroken, euhedral zircon crystals, by the segregation of the com- 
ponent m’nerals in individualized streaks, and by the flattened, 
uncrushed character of the quartz. : 

nm bneevadence Of a preexisting protoclastic foliation im. the 
cataclast c-protoclastic gneiss of the northwest zone is: the presence 
of a transition into the protoclastic gneiss of the central zone through 
a disappearance of the superimposed cataclastic features, and the 
presence of sm lar characters to those of the latter band. Quartz is 
normally the first m'neral to fracture in the process of rock crushing. 
In these gneisses the quartz is less mashed than the feldspar, which 
indicates that it was not affected by crushing until after the feldspar 
had already been pulverized. Such a phenomenon might happen in 
the case of a magma undergoing pressure in which the quartz had 
not yet crystallized out, whereas the other minerals constituted a 
continually growing and fa‘ling meshwork. The continuation of the 
pressure after complete consolidation then granulated the quartz in 
its turn. 

12 The grains resulting from the crushing of any rock from within 
the central zone will, with only rare exceptions, average over 0.1 mm 
in size, those of the northwest zone (quartz excluded) under o.1 mm 
im diameter, but the proportion of the m‘nerals in the rock of either 
Zone winen is reduced to these fespective Sizes is very variable in 
Miiceremnsuteaks, VOLlvem Sharply | delim ted’ and parallel’ to) the 
. foliation. 3 

13 Phe forces which resulted in the production of the foliation 
were not attendant upoa a shouldering influence against the Grenville 
exerted by the magma during intrusion,. but were the result of 
orogenic stresses exerted from w.thout, because 

a Later intrusive dikes of hornblende syenite, hypersthene syenite, 
MyWetlic, StaAmwoO-syeall> and peema jive all vexiibin te same derree 
of metamorphism, as the couatry rock of the zone of metamorphism 
im wich they occur. Uhis is best exemplified by the case of the 
hyperite dikes. According to the usual mode of geological reasoning, 
bese dikes must all be of essentially the samo age. | They are uni- 
Iori es ta lr im (character witerever tound have a teadeacy to 
cluster more abundantly around local stocks of gabbro, and always 
bear analozous relations to all rocks with which they are fourd in 
contact. There is nothing to suggsst that we are dealing with 
dikes of more than one epoch of intrusion. Yet where these diles 


106 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


occur in the zone of massive gneiss they also are massive, although 
the augite is usually granulated as the result of flowage (plate a, 
upper figure); where they occur in the protoclastic gneiss they are 
granulated (plate 4, lower figure and plate 5, upper figure); and 
where they are found in the cataclastic-protoclastic gneiss they are 
more or less pulverized and have a gneissic character (plate 5, 
lower figure). 

b In each of the three zones of metamorphism many cases may 
be observed where the foliation of the inclosing gneiss also crosses 
the intruding dike. This is particularly noticeable in the case of 
the pegmatite or granitic veins in all three zones and of the hyperite 
dikes in the crushed zones. 

c The outer zone of rock must have been partially crushed subse- 
quently to its complete solidification, as shown by granulation of 
the quartz. 

d The line of equal crushing or the boundary between protoclastic 
and cataclastic-protoclastic gneiss is very regular in its ‘trend and 
passes directly across the banding and hence is independent of any 
magmatic flowage. 

e On the Lowville quadrangle the planes of foliation alternately 
pass several times from a low dip (30°) to a vertical attitude and 
then back again to 30°, going southwest. Muller reports this pseudo 
anticlinal and synclinal effect to be repeated on the Port Leyden 
quadrangle to the south. Where the banding northwest of Croghan 
is observed in plan, there is a suggestion of a synclinal folded 
structure. 

j Miller has raised the objection’ that, i "orogenie moreeom mene 
acted in this region, the Grenville gneisses should exhibit signs of 
crushing. On the Lake Bonaparte quadrangle blocks of Grenville 
which are associated with the syenite-granite gneiss complex are 
crushed. It is true, however, that elsewhere they are uncrushed, 
but for the very good reason that they have been entirely recrystal- 
lized by contact metamorphism, or by the injection of pegmatite 
veins, or by soaking with granitic juices which permeate them. The 
granites responsible for this are younger than the syenite-granite 
complex. ; | 

14 The. mere fact of foliation crossing both country rock and 
associated dikes or pegmatite veins 1s not accepted as a uniformly 
valid criterion for the dynamo-metamorphic or dynamic flow and 
recrystallization origin of gneissic structure. In the broad band of 
granite gneiss innumerable dikes of coarse pegmatite have been 
observed which cut across the foliation of the gneiss and are them- 


Upper figure. Hyperite. Feldspars uncrushed, pyroxenes partially granu- 
lated. Froma dike in Croghan mass, s.e. zone of metamorphism. Photo- 
micrograph. Crossed nicols. x 40 

Lower figure. Hyperite. More crushed than preceding rock. Feldspars 
are granulated. From dike in granite in central zone of metamorphism, 
n.w. of Croghanin Diana mass. Photomicrograph. Crossed nicols. x 40 


5 tS 


Pa de ‘2 a 
4 = tae Le z fap 4 
, aie aie : 
2 it 34 5 Se’ 


Upper figure. Hyperite. More mashed than preceding specimen (lower 
figure, plate 4) but from same locality. Photomicrograph. Crossed nicols. 
X 40 

Lower figure. Hyperite. Intensely crushed with well developed 
gneissic foliation. From dike in augite syenite on n.w. border of Diana 
mass. Photomicrograph. Crossed nicols. x 40 


Plate 6 


Upper figure. Palimpsest structure in pegmatitized Grenville gneiss. 
Biotite is oriented parallel to banding, quartz and feldspar of pegmatite 
veins at right angles. Locality n.w. of Lake Bonaparte. Natural size. 

Lower figure. Same specimen as above, etched with HF and H:2SO, 
and coated with NH:Cl. Shows orientation of pegmatite minerals at 
right angles to banding. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 107 


selves crossed by this foliation. Yet when examined in thin section 
these do not show evidences either of crushing or of recrystallization. 
They have a normal granitoid texture — the usual result of crys- 
tallization from a magma. Furthermore, if this massive gneiss is 
not the result of recrystallization (an hypothesis which it is believed 
the facts do not support), then the foliation of the veins likewise 
can not be due to this cause. The statement that the degree of 
crushing of both dikes and country rock is the same also holds for 
those dikes which are crossed by the foliation of the intruded gneisses. 
The assumption that the foliation was induced in the dikes before 
either the country rock or the dike was completely solidified neces- 
sitates a close genetic connection between the igneous gneisses and 
the dikes or pegmatite veins. This, however, was exactly the 
conclusion arrived at from other data before the foregoing theory 
was considered. It is noteworthy that field evidence indicates that 
the Diana mass was in a much more advanced state of consolidation 
than the Croghan mass at the time of intrusion of the hyperite 
dikes. Thus in the rocks of the Diana mass the hyperite usually 
occurs in well-defined dikes, whereas in many cases in the rocks of 
the Croghan body masses of hyperite and gabbro interfinger so 
with the granite and syenite that it is utterly impossible to tell 
which is country rock and which is intrusive. Evidently both 
masses were in at least a semifluid state and squeezed into each 
other. 

That it is possible to have a foliation induced in a rock while it 
is still in a fluid or semiviscous state is well exemplified in a band 
of gneiss northwest of Lake Bonaparte. Here Grenville gneiss has 
been thoroughly injected and almost completely disintegrated by 
pegmatite. In those remnants of gneiss which retain their individu- 
ality, the biotite flakes and quartz are oriented parallel to the 
banding (plate 6, upper figure), but in the pegmatitic material, the 
quartz and feldspar are all oriented at right angles to the banding 
and hence to that portion of the biotite and quartz which has 
retained the structure of the gneiss (plate 6, lower figure). Thus 
we have two foliations at right angles to each other in the same 
rock, one written over the other without completely destroying 1t — 
a palimpsest. The quartz of the pegmatite is wholly uncrushed and 
assuredly would not have been oriented by recrystallization at right 
angles to the biotite. On the contrary, it 1s interpreted as a folta- 
tion of protoclastic origin. This type of phenomenon also shows 
up in specimens from several localities where belts are oriented 
at an angle to the direction of the orogenic forces, 


108 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


General Conclusions 


The writer believes that the evidence of intense folding of the 
Grenville by the action of strong orogenic forces throughout the 
northwestern Adirondacks is conclusive. On the one hand, a portion 
of the evidence derived from a. study of the metamorphism of the 
syenite-granite complex conforms with this. On the other hand, 
the evidence points equally strongly to the primary origin of the 
foliation accompanied by a wave of crushing which swept in from 
the outer border and died away as it advanced. The correlation of 
these two apparently opposed theories necessitates a very close 
synchronism between the mountain-building forces and the intrusioa 
OF the entire syemite-granite ‘complex. )Phese comclustoms smenelicr 
those reached by McMahon! in his work in India. There the igneous 
frocks were intruded durme the time ‘ol action (of /orovemienuenee: 
wich tolded) and) crumpled the strara ot the) Eanalayas ameeem om 
gneissic structure was induced in them before complete solidification. 

From the external structures and internal textures of the rocks 
of the syenite-granite gneiss complex, we may infer that we are 
dealing with a heterogeneous magma which was intruded in two or 
more stages under the influence of a cycle of orogenic compression. 
Thus the primary banding or belting of the rocks is a feature which 
took its origin during the process of intrusion and represents facies 
of different composition which have been squeezed out into these 
elongated lenses by compressive forces. Although the primary 
banding and foliation were thus controlled by the action of lateral 
compressive forces, the latter were inefficient in crushing the min- 
erals crystallizing out from the magma until they had become so 
abundant as to interfere and form an open crystal meshwork. This 
was not until after the intrusion of the satellitic dikes and veins 
such as the hyperites, pegmatites etc., and after the feldspars and 
other minerals had already formed large phenocrysts in the magma, 
with only a small amount of interstitial liquid material rema ning. 
These inferences are indicated by the facts that the dike rocks have 
suffered the same degree of metamorphism as the:r inclosing rocks, 
and that large crystals of feldspar, augite and hornblende are still 
more or less abundant as the uncrushed eyes of augen in the rocks 
of the Diana mass. The orientation of these in alignment parallel 
to the primary banding which is in diverse directions suggests, 
however, that the crystals were oriented to a considerable extent 


1 McMahon, C. A., “Granite of the Himaiayas,’’ Geol. Magazine, 1888, 
p. 212-20. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQ17 109 


parallel to stream lines in magmatic currents which continued to 
maintain more or less the same relative movements during the 
progress of crystallization which they followed during their intrusion. 
During the later stages of consolidation of the magma the satellitic 
dikes of hornblende syenite, hypersthene syenite, hyperite, grano- 
syenite and granitic veins. were intruded along cracks caused by 
crystallization and cooling in the now partially crystallized viscous 
mass; or sheets of similar materials were forced in along the already 
existent foliation planes as sills, and suffered the same degree of 
metamorphism as the rocks inclosing them. 

The next stage in the history of this mass witnesses the rise of 
external compressive forces to a dominant position and a high degree 
of magnitude in controlling the progress of crushing. Under the 
influences of these intense stresses the growing meshwork of crystals 
in the rocks of the Diana mass were ground against one another, 
broken, strained and pulverized while the still liquid quartz was 
smeared out into lone, narown an leaves, That. portiom: on the 
mass along the northwest received the stresses at their maximum 
and suffered crushing and pulverization to the highest degree. The 
crushing resulted in a coarser granular type as the Croghan mass 1s 
approached and ceases abruptly at the border of this mass. This is 
possibly to be explained by the assumption that this body was 
intruded later than the Diana mass and was still molten and only 
slightly crystallized when the latter body consisted of a very coarse, 
openwork, crystal aggregate with only quartz and pneumatolytic 
materials filling the interstices. The medium equigranular character 
of the Croghan mass and the presence of occasional sharply defined 
bands or dikes of rock similar to the latter in the adjacent Diana 
body are indicative of such a succession. Within this mass 
(Croghan) then, the lateral compressive forces already partially 
spent and dissipated in the small but potent still liquid portion of 
the Diana mass served merely to produce an orientation, growth 
and segregation of the minerals along lines at right angles to them, 
the mineral boundaries still being due to intergrowth in the normal 
process of crystallization and not to crushing. But even w-thin the 
Diana mass the compressive forces could not overcome the influence 
of the previous primary foliation and banding, offering as the latter 
did potential surfaces along which movement was easiest and parallel 
to which it actually took place. This follows from the fact that 
folation and banding are always parallel. If the rock had not 
been partially liquid it is difficult to see how the compressive forces 


I10 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUINE 


could thus have been so conspicuously resolved into forces at widely 
divergent angles. That it was in such a condition is indicated by 
the fact that the quartz which was the last mineral to crystallize 
almost wholly escaped crushing in the central zone and that it is 
less crushed than the other minerals in the northwest zone. The 
compressive forces did not, however, cease immediately after the 
consolidation of at least part of the Diana mass, since within a wide 
zone along the northwest all the minerals, quartz included, show 
pulverization or granulation. The central zone and the Croghan 
mass are not thus affected, and the explanation may be either that 
the border band was the first to arrive at a state of complete con- 
solidation or that the forces died out as they passed away from the 
border toward the southeast. Since the dividing line between the 
protoclastic gneiss and the cataclastic-protoclastic gneiss cuts 
directly across the banding and foliation, it is apparent that the 
active forces came from without and had nothing to do with flowage 
within the magma. 

The alternative to the foregoing outline is to assume that the 
foliation of the whole complex is the result of recrystallization and 
that it has subsequently been subjected to a wave of crushing which 
was accompanied by recrystallization of quartz under a limiting 
set of conditions. Such an assumption involves the idea that 
recrystallization may result in exactly the same phenomena which 
it is known do arise during the intrusion and crystallization of a 
magma. This hypothesis needs support and proof from other 
districts to be considered here. It may be added here imcemume 
brecciation of part of the rock was either a process of dry crushing, 
since no hydrothermal minerals were formed, or else the crushing 
took place under magmatic conditions so that magmatic minerals 
formed, which is the hypothesis favored. 

It is realized that the conclusions set forth here are drawn from a 
limited field and may need to be modified by evidence from other 
districts or by future work. The conclusions are therefore not 
considered so important as the facts presented relative to the areal 
distribution in zones of rocks showing similar degrees of metae 
morphism and to the character of the metamorphism within thes- 
ZONES. 


V7 Eth eee FS i J aa © * oy 


a a ee Ree Se ee ee 


2 EF TURP bp ri Ie TN a Neel oo ae A 
is 
=A 


ny 
ay 


raid 
\ 
j 
¢ 


aeditl .acdor 


NTT ky A MBA aS AGS TLR AR SNR I AA RRM My, 0 TERE ~ altos 


a * Attandtrom A (fe fj 


a 4 . 
eerepre tie : 


tae) letidoot! 
i: _ getthaloni 

 —ssh@aaghepreensa dt 
» Mong! bie atrsitihes - 
a oS ae 


=, Varah ©: 


fy pia y aX 


NR ARMIN AREER NER PC 


‘ 
oed 


ANID A NATROL RS NOTES 2: ah Cb ae ONE 


GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE CLEAR REGION 


(Parts of St Regis and Saranac quadrangles) 


BY HAROLD L. ALLING 


Preface 


The chief purpose of this paper is to outline in popular language 
the geological history of the region around Lake Clear, Franklin 
county, N. Y. In order to do so, the general geology of the Adiron- 
dack mountains as a whole has been discussed, in the course of which 
many terms that may be new to the reader have been used, but in 
each case they are defined or explained at the point of introduction 
or shortly afterwards. 

The reader’s attention is called to the topographic maps prepared 
and for sale by the United States Geological Survey, which can be 
secured from the Director of the United States Geological Survey, 
Washington, D. C., at to cents each. For naturalists, sportsmen, 
campers and trampers they are almost indispensable. The maps 
for this area are known as the “ St Regis quadrangle’’ and the 
Poaninacwbake quadrangle. | ihe State also ofiers: for sale a 
series of bulletins that deal with the geology of the Adirondacks, 
ranging from 20 cents to $1 each. A list of the bulletins can be 
Secured) by wimme the New York state Museum, Albamy, IN: Yi 
The following bulletins deal more or less directly with the area 
under consideration: 

H. P. Cushing. Preliminary Report on the Geology of Franklin County. 


Pt 2, 18th Rep’t of the State Geologist, 1900 

———— Recent Geological Work in Franklin and St Lawrence Counties. 
20th Rep’t of the State Geologist, 1900 
—— Geology of the Northern Adirondack Region. N. Y. Mus. Bul. 


S55 1905. 30c 
—— Geology of the Long Lake Quadrangle. -N. Y. State Mus. Bul. 115 


Other bulletins that deal with other areas of the Adirondacks are: 


H. P. Cushing, H. L. Fairchild, R. Ruedemann, C. H. Smyth, jr. Geology of 
the Thousand Island Region. N. Y. State Mus. Bul. 145. Cl. $1 
C. H. Smyth, jr. Crystalline Limestone and Associated Rocks of the North- 
western Adirondack Region. Geol. Soc. Amer. Bul., 1895, 6: 263-84 
———— Genetic Relations of Certain Minerals of Northern New York. 
Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci., 1896, 15: 260-70 
Pen 


NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM BULLETIN 207-8 


GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE MAP OF PARTS OF 
ST. REGIS AND SARANAC QUADRANGLES 


JOHN M. CLARKE. DIRECTOR 


LEGEND 


Diabase Dikes 


y xX 
r orn =e Pegmatite Dikes 
Sr = ‘ 

— . & 
: Gabbro Stocks, 
Knobs, Dikes 


3 


9 


PROC 
Hornblende Syenite. 
Quartzose to Granitic 


types 


Basic Syenite. 
Often Dioritie to 
Gabbroic 


Gabbroic 


Doubtful Gneisses. 
including 
Metamorphosed 
Sediments and Igneous 
Rocks 


Grenville Gneisses 
* Quarries 


Faults 


Rock Boundries 


Geology by Harold L. Alling. 
1916 


Scale s8a00 
2 3 oMilex 


HM. Wilson, GeopreRney in charge. 
Triangulation by E. L. McNair. “ z a 
Topography by Glenn S. Smith, W. R. Harper, T. F. Slaughter, _____ aaa 
he te ° a 2 3 A 5 Blometnre 
——— SS ° 

Contonr interval 20 feet 


W. H. S. Morey and A, T. Fowler. 
Surveyed in 1902 In cooperation with the State of Now York. 
Datum i= mean sea loved 


So Fey 


+ ste 
ia a heh hii 


112 NEW MORK StAd BE) Vase 


C. H. Smyth, jr. Report on the Crystalline Rocks of the Western Adirondack 
Region. N. Y¥. State Mus. Ann. Rep’t 51 (for 1897), 2: 469-97 

J. F. Kemp & R. Ruedemann. Geology of the Elizabethtown and Port Henry 
Quadrangles. N.Y. State Mus. Bul. 138, 1910. 40c 

J. F. Kemp. Geology of the Mt Marcy Quadrangle. N.Y. State Mus. Bul. 
In preparation . 

William J. Miller. Geology of the Lake Placid Quadrangle. N. Y. State 
Mus. Bul. Jn press 

——____. Geology of the North Creek Quadrangle. N. Y. State Mus, Bull 


70, WO UAY AC 

——-—— Geological History of New York State. N. Y. State Mus. Bul. 
TON), LOW AOe 

———— Geology of the Blue Mountain Quadrangle. N. Y. State Mus. Bul. 
192, 1916. 25¢ ne 

———— The Adirondack Mountains. N. Y. State Mus. Bul. 193. 35c 

I. H. Ogilvie. Geology of the Paradox Lake Quadrangle. N. Y. State Mus. 
Bul. 96, 1905. 30c 

J. C. Martin. The Pre-Cambrian Rocks of the Canton Quadrangle. N. Y. 
State Mius, Bull 185, 1916. 3ec 

C. H. Van Hise & C. K. Leita. Pre-Cambrian Geology of North America. 
U. S. Geol. Surv. Bul. 360, 19029. Chapter X, eSpecially p. 619-21 


Introduction 


The Adirondacks have long been famous as a summer resort, 
attracting the inhabitants of our eastern cities and the nature lovers 
who found rest and recreation among the wooded mountain slopes, 
the brooks and numerous lakes and ponds of the region. 

The attempt is here made to add to the usual summer pleasures 
the enjoyment of understanding and interpreting the various surface 
features of the topography, to trace step by step the history of the 
Adirondacks from the earliest times to the present day, and especially 
the geological history of Lake Clear and its immediate vicinity. 


Location and Character 


Lake Clear, the one here considered (for unfortunately there are 
a number of lakes in the Adirondacks that are known by the same 
name), is situated in the heart of the mountains, if the entire district 
covered by the great north woods 1s included, and is reached by the 
Adirondack division of the New York Central Railroad. The area 
is one of moderate altitude and comparatively little relief, consisting 
of a great sandy plain surrounding innumerable rocky knobs and 
knolls. In depressions in its surface are a large number of lakes, 
ponds and swamps, among which is Lake Clear. 

The lake is roughly oval in shape, the longer axis having a north- 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR 1917 I13 


east and southwest direction. Its northern and southern shore is 
composed of rock and sand, while the remaining portions are formed 
of fine sand diversified by gravel and boulders. 

To the north are the Saint Regis lakes. Upon the lower lake is 
situated the famous hotel of Paul Smith’s. To the south the three 
Saranac lakes are grouped. On the northern shore of the upper or 
the most westerly lake of the group is Saranac Inn, ore of the more 
fashionable hostelries in the region, with a splendid view of the 
water. 

In fact, lakes and ponds are characteristic of the region about 
Lake Clear. In attempting to arrive at a better understanding of 
the relations between the geology and the flora of the region we must 
trace the geological events that brought about these conditions. 
The lakes and ponds in the district are dwarfed remnants of larger 
bodies of water that once played an important role. These ancient 
lakes were in part brought about by the great continental ice sheet 
which came out of the north and dammed the valleys, thus flooding 
the area. On the melting of the glacier they drained away, leaving 
only here and there mere remnants in depressions in the glacal 
sands or in rock basins. 

We must consider the events that occurred before the ice invas'on 
to appreciate the mode of development of the structure and rela- 
tions of the different rock masses to one another, and the results 
of the forces that have sculptured the rocks into the various forms 
which are today nature’s stage setting. But any understanding of 
rock structures, the formation of the valleys and the mountains 
necessitates a review of the rocks themselves, the number of the 
rock units and their mode of injection, alteration and deformation. 
The logical sequence is to begin at the dawn of geologic history 
and trace step by step the events as interpreted by the geologist. 

In beginning at the base of things it is obvious that our knowledge 
of the events that occurred in the far distant past is at the best but 
fragmentary and so the attempt to outline the history is: fraught 
with great difficulties. 


The Rocks 


One of the attractions which the Adirondacks offer to geologists, 
10 matter whether profess‘onal or amateur, is that they present, 
perhaps, the oldest rocks and mountain masses of which we have 
definite knowledge anywhere in the world. It gives one a sense 
of satisfaction to put one’s foot upon a rocky ledge and say: ‘‘ This 
rock was formed long before the Alps existed; long before the 


EA: NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Catskills or the White mountains; we are looking at the very founda- 
tion rocks of the continent.” It is good for our imagination to 
attempt to grasp the meaning of such statements. 


The Grenville Series 


The geologist starts with the theory that the northeastern portion 
of North America was at one time submerged under a great body 
of water, in all probability marine. The ancient streams that 
flowed from the adjacent land areas into this ocean, carrying debris, 
deposited upon the bottom layer upon layer of muds, sands and 
gravels. A very primitive form of life existed that performed the 
chemical change which produced limestones from the various cal- 
cium compounds in solution in the waters. Thus there was depos- 
ited a great thickness of sedimentary rocks including limestones, 
sandstones, shales, conglomerates and their intermediaries. Among 
geologists this group of rocks is known as the Grenville series. These 
rocks have not only been largely washed away but the remnants 
have become so changed from their original character both in appear- 
ance and in mineralogical make-up that it is often difficult to identify 
them correctly. 

The Limestones 

The limestones, although limited in extent, are the most con- 
Spicuous rocks remaining. They have been subjected to so much 
heat and pressure that they usually have lost all trace of their original 
bedding planes and are recrystallized into creamy white marbles 
exhibiting beautifully the rhombohedral form of calcite. Usually 
they contain small grains of dark minerals, such as the black oxide 
of iron (magnetite); garnets and green silicates (pyroxenes); and 
sometimes shiny flakes of “ black lead” (graphite) which is prob- 
ably the crystallized residuum of organisms that inhabited the 
primeval sea. 

The Sandstones-quartzttes 

The sandstones, members of the Grenville series, have likewise 
been altered and changed to white quartzites, so called because 
they are composed to a very large degree of quartz, although the 
impure sandstones have developed other minerals in addition. 

The shales and conglomerates have been so modified that their 
identification is a matter of great difficulty. Some of them have a 
composition approaching that of granite (quartz, feldspar and mica) 
while others are darker colored. In all cases the dark minerals 
have been squeezed into parallel lines giving rise to what the geolo- 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR [O17 115 


gist terms a “gneiss.” The interpretation of these gneisses fur- 
nishes the professional worker one of the most difficult problems in 
the whole region. 


The Gneisses 


Although limestone is reported near Colby pond (plate 1), the 
writer did not find any remnants of this interesting and ancient 
formation ‘in place”’ in the immediate neighborhood of the pond, 
but in the vicinity of the town of Saranac Lake patches of the gneisses 
were found in the bed of the river.1 Better exposures can be found 
in the bed of the river three-eighths of a mile north of Bloomingdale, 
where the gneiss contains flakes of graphite, and on the southwest 
slopes of Mount Pisgah, where the schists, rich in mica, and the 
quartzites are splendidly shown. (plate 2) Moreover, one may 
easily pick out quartz boulders, which were part of the original 
sandstone and various boulders of gneisses that 1n many- cases were 
shales, conglomerates or the result of their intermediate sediments. 

We do not know what was the nature of the rock floor upon which 
the Grenville rocks were laid down, nor are we acquainted with the 
order of events that took place in that far distant past. The rocky 
book that the geologist is trying to decipher is at the best fragmen- 
tary and many leaves are absent. But enough remains of this old 
series of sedimentary rocks to make us sure that it was of great extent 
and of enormous thickness. One geologist estimates that it may 
have been from 20,000 to 25,000 feet thick. We find strata which 
in all probability belong to this same Grenville series in New England, 
in the Highlands of the Hudson (West Point region), and in Canada, 
and can safely assume that it exists at great depths throughout 
New York State overlaid by rocks of later ages. 


The Doubtful Gnetsses 


North of the town of Saranac Lake there are a variety of gneisses 
and granitelike rocks that are today a puzzle to the most observant 
and careful worker. Some of these may be igneous in nature (that 
is, were once in a molten condition), while others are sedimentary 
(that is, water-laid) in origin, but great changes have subsequently 
taken place in all of them so that their appearance and composition 
is far different from their original form. If a trace of the floor of 


1 Petrographic examination seems to cast some doubt upon this interpreta- 
tion, although Doctor Cushing regards it as undoubted Grenville. 
2H. P. Cushing, N. Y. State Mus. Bul. 95, p. 275. 


Tene) NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


the Grenville sea is preserved, one should seek remnants of it in 
these “‘ doubtful gneisses,’ which are sometimes referred to as the 
Saranac formation. As many of these gneisses are certainly Jor 
later age than the Grenville, they are discussed here. 


The Igneous Intrusives 


During this great period of erosion a series of molten rocks welled 
up from the interior of the earth and slowly worked their way toward 
the surface, invading the Grenville from below. The heat of these 
semifluid masses was often sufficient to melt and engulf the surface 
rocks and thus add them to their own mass. 

The first of these igneous rock intrusives was of great extent and 
today forms the central core of the Adirondack mountains, some 
1200 square miles in area, It is known’ tov the, ge@lecicmmae 
> anorthosite. | lt is a rock composed to a large extent asonuenae 
per cent) of a particular member of the feldspar family known as 
labradorite, because of its occurrence in Labrador. It is a dark, 
grayish blue mineral that exhibits minute striations and infre- 
quently displays a beautiful iridescent blue sheen. Often in the 
running brooks these labradorite crystals of the anorthosite flash 
their characteristic color to the eye as a ereeume "@nemmealy aan 
is a silicate of soda, lime and alumina. Besides the labradorite, 
the anorthosite contains various members of the pyroxene group of 
minerals, besides magnetite, commonly known as the black oxide 
of iron and several other minerals. 

Evidently this intrusive mass of molten rock, buried under the 
great thickness of surface strata, solidified very slowly for the entire 
rock is coarsely crystalline, labradorite crystals as large as a man’s 
hand often being encountered. This anorthosite was subsequently 
exposed by the erosion of the surface rocks, but in all probability 
it, did not at first reach the surface of the land. Whe anonumosinene 
the rock encountered on all sides of Lake Clear. A ledge of it is 
exposed at the water’s edge in front of Lake Clear Inn. Although 
it has been subjected to fr ghtful pressure and heat subsequent to 
its intrusion, the rock here does not show the effects of this so much 
as that found farther to the east, where it appears as a bluish white 
rock spotted with green silicates. An excellent locality to examine 
the anorthosite is north of the road three-fourths of a mile west of 
Paul Smith’s, where an extensive quarry has been opened. Several 
small veins carrying fool’s gold ” (pyrite) cut through the tock 

The next member of this series is represented by a rock called 


LIMESTONE 


ANORTHOSITE 


TALUS 
MATERIAL 


TORK STATE ad ee uM, 


are sometimes ai stred to as. 


y of these gneisses are certainly, 
BEV AEe) OBA ssed her Vig 4 


ks wel ed 


me 
, 
it) 
" 


chavs 
Bs ie a as | 
AA \ YY Sele 


C OT 


rib eProo ly 
novesbet Me 

& CUFT CTCL ITACGIOT . 

Macainute striations: 


sheen. OG 


sth 


{ 


and aie 


brad cmb. co | stale ag ie 
ved, “Tiga nor thos abda und: 
he sis si 2 oA LEE RAM pr 


ura « of the land, The anor 
WE of Lake Clear. Al 
mot of Lake ‘4 eat Inn, i 
on ie and heat s subseb 
28 THOS sham the € fects Lord this f 
cast, where It naladaal ; ibh 


a 
Af Tas 


ch GTN 5 8 Le ee ’ 


row three-fourths of a mile 


mi tre ei eeeie UlA al Pe . ay! 
sive Guatry has been opened, 


a BY eer: ree s ~ 
id h 


Md Apyr'roe) oat’ through t 
1c rey Ore wer he ai by a 


Plate 1 


Photo by H. L. Alling, 1917 


Grenville limestone, upper portion of photograph, in con- 
tact with anorthosite separated by pyroxene-garnet gneiss, 
dark colored. One mile north of Elizabethtown, Essex 
county, N. Y. 


Padi ah (hemi A each 3 


“yOOI popuvq oy} UY} TITY oy4 An JoyyIV;F St op[IAUIIL) oY} JO 9oU9IINOVO 
sIy, “ydessojoyd oy} ul uMoys Aj1vojo ore sould suIppoq oy, “YyIou suryoo] “oye ovuLIeS 
JO JSOMYZIOU op vB ‘Yesstg yUNoP JO odojs ysomy Nos oy} UO sslous o][IAUOID) oY} JO o1nsodxe Uy 


L161 ‘sullTy “TH Aq 0704d 


Z oeId 


* 


UTD OURICN OH MAU SLD, IDI IBC AO) IOAN) Ry 


MisvVemite mnauis more mearly allied to, the eranites.. It is com- 
posed of the same kind of feldspar that characterizes granites, 
namely, orthoclase, although this is very frequently replaced by 
Puucroperuame, — Lhe other Chiek component is either black-sreen 
pyroxenes or black hornblende; quartz and mica are to a very large 
extent lacking. The syenite rocks received their name from Syene, 
whence came the Egyptian granite in ancient times, although these 
two rocks do not resemble each other when compared according to 
modern methods. ‘The syenite of this region has a green color due 
to the hornblende and augite it contains, which makes it easily 
distinguishable from the grayish or dark blue of the anorthosite. 
iicsyembeisiexiibined volune casmon Wake Cleary asieampe Seen 
on the accompanying map. Unfortunately, however, no exposures 
of the typical syenite were found near Lake Clear, for most of them 
have been affected by contact with other rocks. In the neighbor- 
~ hood of Lake Loon, on the slopes of Katy mountain, syenite rocks 
are typically developed (plate 4). One exposure occurs in the 
town of Saranac Lake on the east side of the state road from Lake 
Clear, just north of the two railroad crossings, that shows an abnor- 
mal banded rock. This exposure will be more fully treated later on. 
Professor Cushing has shown by means of rock exposures farther 
south in the vicinity of Long Lake that the syenite is of later age 
than the anorthosite, thus establishing the time relations accepted 
Dygunerwiber Necenthy tie whiver bas veried this comelusion by 
two exposures, one south of Mountain pond, northwest of Paul 
Smith’s, and another 2 miles west of Gabriels. 
In the southeastern Adirondacks granitic rocks occur that are 
' closely associated with the syenites and are considered to be merely 
quartzose phases or members of the normal granite. Thus a granite 
should be mentioned in the list of igneous rocks of the series. These. 
granites are considered as segregations or differentiations of the 
syenite, and hence may be termed the granite-syenite intrusives.” 
The third member of this group of igneous rocks is the “ gabbro.’’; 
a dense green-black rock somewhat similar to the anorthosite, but 
containing more pyroxene at the expense of the labradorite. Around 
Lake Clear the gabbro is scarce and occurs only in very small patches 
or as a filling of cracks in the older rocks, but in the eastern portion 
of the mountains considerable areas plentifully exhibit this third 
and last member of the series. One small knob of gabbro is found 


INTL SGN SEnTe IESG Me nbIU  narue hop talon 
2 William J. Miller, N. Y. State Mus. Bul. 170, 182 etc. 


118 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


a mile northwest of Shingle bay of Lower Saranac lake. Several 
others are located on the southern boundary of the petrological 
map. One geologist! suggests that the anorthosite, which is classi- 
fied as an individual of the gabbro family, is the solidified segre- 
gation or “scum ”’ of lighter substances forming the upper layers 
of the molten rock. This top portion had more silica and the min- 
erals crystallizing from it as it congealed were largely feldspars, 
while the lower layers received the heavier and darker colored 
compounds richer in iron and magnesium as they settled down by 
virtue of their greater mass or gravity.” Following the solidification 
of the anorthosite, this dark, lower mass welled) up as | smonmealy as 
gabbro, completing the series. 


Granite 


Taking the Adirondacks as a whole, there appear to be two 
granites of different ages. In either case the darker minerals are 
found to have been squeezed into parallel lines by subsequent heat 
and pressure, giving rise to gneisses. The field worker is often 
puzzled to know where to place a granite gneiss in the scale of 
geologic time. In the first place it may be recrystallized or meta- 
morphosed sedimentary rocks, such as shaly sandstones or sandy 
limestones of the Grenville group. Their origin is probable if one 
finds a great variety of such granite gneisses in a comparatively 
limited area, for this condition suggests their formation from the 
many different kinds of rocks that composed the Grenville series. 
It they. are surely of igneous origin, the problemi 1s stilia@ineciinns 
they may be (1) older than the Grenville, or (2) later than the 
Grenville series but earlier than the anorthosite-syenite-granite- 
gabbro intrusives, or (3) members of the last-named series itself. . 

It may be well to state that geologists have found no positive 
evidence in the Adirondacks of the class of granites first above 
mentioned, that is, those prior to the Grenville series. ‘Theoret- 
ically, they may occur but they have not yet been identified. There 
is, however, certainty of the identification of the other two different 
granite gneisses,? namely, those that are members of the massive 
intrusive group and those that preceded them. 


TRA} Daly. a) leneous Rocks anduithem-Onicint espe cei. 

2 More recently, Dr N. L. Bowen suggests a new interpretation. Jour. Geol., 
TOaVEON On 3591120042. 

3H. P. Cushing, Amer. Jour. Sci., ser. V, 39:288-94, 1915; N. Y. State Mus: 
Bull 145; p. 46-47, 177-00; N. VY. State Mus) Bulle 169,py 2126, 2 Recemrnaite 
writer has identified them in Paradox lake, Bolton and Whitehail quadrangles _ 


Plate 3 


Photo by H. L. Alling, 1917 


Looking west. 


in the anorthosite a mile east of Ray Brook, just north of the state highway 
between Lake Placid and Saranac Lake. 


running 


Road stone quarry 


UMOJSJOLIILV]T 0} OWT OVUPIVSG WOI SULUUNI peol oY} OpIsog “ov OVUBILG 
JO UMO} OY} JO JSeMY}IOU-YJIOU SoTIUI J[eYy-ou0 PU do1Y} oJUEAS OpudTquIOY z41enb JO 98po'T 


L161 ‘Buty “1 “H Aq oy04d 


‘Ailend ouojs pros oyy 
joysvoqasnf -q ,Zb'N Sunt puv opIM soYoUT gI sTeyIp oy, ‘Seetdop SP jo s[suv uv Ysno1y} UMOp 
poddr sem Bviolwlvo OY, ‘S[oLIqen Jo ySoM soyIU OM], ‘opsoyyJoue oy} BsuIyyNo oyUOAS Jo OIC 


L161 ‘Buy “IH Aq 0y04q 


fen 
Pace 


REPORT OE TEs) DER BeCLOR  TOi7. II9 


Granites 1n the Doubtful Gnetsses 


In the doubtful gneisses north of Saranac Lake village several 
exposures were found, which in appearance suggest a true granite 
eneiss. It is a question whether they are immediately associated 
with the Grenville or are a true granite older than the later great 
series of igneous rocks, but distinct from the old sedimentaries. 
In view of the wide difference of opinion and lack of sufficient data, 
the writer is compelled to take refuge in a noncommittal mapping; 
grouping all such gneisses and granite-gneisses together, and indi- 
cating them by a uniform convention. 


The Pegmatites 


As the surface of the molten rocks (magma) began to solidify, 
shrinkage cracks occurred due to the contraction on cooling, and 
these allowed the still molten interior to escape upwards in the 
form of various gases and liquids. These aqueous vapors filled the 
cracks and congealed, solidifying at comparatively low temperatures, 
forming bands or dikes of highly siliceous minerals, such as the 
feldspars and quartz. Each of- the different igneous rocks above 
mentioned shows such dikes or “ pegmatites,’’ although the granites 
and more siliceous rocks are more productive of them. One such 
pegmatite cutting the anorthosite was observed directly in front of 
the Lake Clear Inn near the water line. It is 34 inches wide, runs 
west-northwest, and exhibits the characteristic coarse crystals of 
orthoclase feldspar (probably the variety known as microcline) and 
quartz. Pegmatites of the syenites and gabbros abound in the 
Adirondacks. Several syenitic pegmatites cutting the anorthosite 
were found a little south of Mountain pond northwest of Paul 
Smith’s, and are indicated on the map. 


Contact Rocks 

Igneous Coniacts 
When the anorthosite, syenite and gabbro, in forcing their way 
up to and into the surface rocks encountered other igneous bodies 
already solid and cool, the effect of the chill upon them is very 
marked and may be observed for a mile or two on both sides of the 
line of contact. The border phase of the anorthosite is shown by 
an increasing amount of the darker minerals (pyroxenes and garnets) 
at the expense of the labradorite, thus approaching the gabbro in 
composition and giving rise to “‘ anorthosite-gabbro.”’ The syenite 
likewise passes through changes in composition, becoming darker in 


i) 


120 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


color (basic) until a rock more like the gabbro than anything else 
is found. A border phase of the syenite was found a mile east of 
Lake Clear Junction that exhibits this exceedingly well, the speci- 
men in mind being taken from a road metal quarry on the north 
side of the state road. An excellent example can be seen about 
Long Lake to the south, where the syenite and the anorthosite are 
in contact and show well-developed border phases.’ In contrast 
with the dark phase, the syenite often develops a quartzose type, 
which with increasing amount of quartz becomes a granitic phase 
or a true granite, as has already been po:nted out. 

A very interesting and instructive igneous contact was brought 
to light on a reconnoitering trip north of Lake Clear one-fourth 
of a mile south of Mountain pond. Here, apparently, the syenite 
in the form of a wide, rusty dike cuts through the anorthosite and 
has developed curious contact phases. The syenite holds inclusions 
of the anorthosite as well as fragments of the Grenville rocks. This 
exposure demonstrates beyond doubt the age relations first estab- 
lished by Professor Cushing. Associated with the syenite are a 
number of pegmatites cutting the anorthosites. The more adven- 
turous summer visitor would be well paid to visit this spot if he is 
prepared to overcome the difficulties of a district recently ravaged 
by forest fires. 

In addition to the marked changes in composition, structural 
differences are to be noted at the contact, as the rocks there often 
exhibit gneissoid structure and the granulation is more pronounced 
than is the case in the core of the mass. 


Contacts with the Sedimentary Rocks 


Miore striking still are the contact effects often observed) au the 
junction of igneous with sedimentary rocks, especially when the 
latter are limestones. At such points the changes in structure, 
texture and composition are often profound. Various vapors that 
the molten rock contained react with the limestones, giving rise to 
new mineral combinations that may present a great variety of 
rocks. A common one is a rock composed almost entirely of red- 
brown garnets and dark green pyroxenes, very pleasing to the eye 
and full of interest to the geologist.” 


1 See the geological map of the Long Lake quadrangle. H. P. Cushing, N. Y. 
State Mus. Bul. 115, and emphasized by R. A. Daly, “ Igneous Rocks and Their 
Origin, p: 240: 

2 For a fuller discussion of contact metamorphism, see W. Lindgren, ‘‘ Mineral 
Deposits,’ p. 664 ef seq. 


REPORA OF LEE DERE CTOR, tL 2 121 


A striking contact of the syenite with the Grenville gneiss is shown 
by an exposure in the village of Saranac Lake to the east of the road 
running north on the west side of the river. Here the syenite was 
injected along the bedding planes of the gneiss by the process known 
as “ lit-par-lit’”’ injection, producing a banded rock composed of 
alternate layers of the two rocks. 

Apparently there are no exposures of the limestones of the Gren- 
ville series present near Lake Clear, but perhaps remnants will be 
found among the hills on more careful search. If such are encoun- 
tered, contact effects will probably be shown. 


Inclusions in Igneous Rocks} 


As has been pointed out, the great igneous intrusive masses prob- 
ably engulfed the overlying rocks to an enormous extent, often 
dislodging fragments which were melted, in whole or in part, and 
absorbed by the molten mass.” Each of the different intrusives 
probably floated off pieces of the preceding rocks, for we often find 
blocks embedded in the anorthosite, syenite and gabbros. Fre- 
quently the edges of these included fragments present a corroded 
appearance showing that partial melting or solution has taken 
place. 

The usual rocks thus found included in the prevailing formation 
are members of the Grenville series. They are numerous in the 
east-central portion of the Adirondacks, but about Lake Clear they 
are not so plentiful. The Mountain pond exposure, above referred 
to, shows in a very clear manner inclusions of the anorthosite and 
Grenville in the syenite. On the map it will be noted that a long 
ridge runs northeast-southwest on the eastern side of Mountain 
pond. The exposure is on the first knob of the ridge to the south 
of the road which runs on the south side of the pond. The stone 
quarry beside the road is of extreme interest, and will be referred 
to again in connection with the diabase dikes. In many places in 
the great anorthosite core the rock is singularly rusty in appearance 
and is difficult of interpretation except by assuming that it has 
melted and included sufficient quantities of the Grenville rocks to 
show a marked change in composition. Grenville inclusions are 
limited, as far as the writer’s experience has shown, to the schists and 


1 For a fuller discussion of ‘‘ Magmatic Assimilation,” see R. A. Daly, ‘‘ Igneous 
Rocks and Their Origin,” ch. I1. | 

2 William J. Miller, “‘ Magmatic Differentiation and Assimilation in the Adiron- 
dack Region,” Bul. Geol. Soc. Amer., 25:243-64. 


{22 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


gneisses and rarely the quartzite. The limestones were too easily 
soluble to leave any core of unmelted material. 


The Later Igneous Rocks 
The Diabase Dikes 


After the solidification of the major igneous bodies treated above, 
they were all subjected to mountain-making processes associated 
with dynamic disturbances, stresses and rise in temperature. Under 
these agencies profound changes were wrought, as has already been 
suggested, greatly altering the rocks in character and mineral con- 
tent, the older rocks being more altered than the later ones because 
of their subjection to several periods of stress. 

Erosion still continuing, the area was reduced to a more or less 
uniform plain. Along lines of weakness in the rocks, up through 
cracks and joint planes the dying-out igneous activity played its 
last role in the form of a lava oozing upwards and filling fissures 
and rock openings and forming what are known as diabase dikes. 
They consist of black, rocky bands cutting the older rocks indiscrim- 
inately. This lava welled up from some deep-seated reservoir and 
may or may not have reached the then surface of the land. Whether 
the dikes were the supplying channels to extensive surface lava 
flows or supported active volcanic action is an unsettled question, 
for all surface rocks have been carried away by erosion. 

In the region- here treated these dikes are rather umcommeon, 
only seven having been seen. One is splendidly shown on the south 
shore of Lake Clear. It is 5 feet wide, runs east-northeast, and 
can be seen either from the water or along the side of the state high- 
way which runs to Saranac Inn. At one outcrop it was observed 
that it was faulted a foot laterally, that is, a portion has been dis- 
placed or side-stepped showing that since its solidification the area 
has been further subjected to dynamic forces. It probably con- 
tinues to the railroad cut 4 miles west of Saranac.! ‘There are three 
dikes in the anorthosite syenite contact zone in the road metal 
quarry at Mountain pond.? They are respectively 3, 9 and 24 
inches wide, and run very nearly east and west. They have been 
more or less squeezed and faulted, for they perhaps lie along a fault 
line. Another dike is situated in the town of Saranac Lake, cutting 


1H. P. Cushing, 18th Rep’t of the N. Y. State Geol., Prem. Rept on the 
Geol. of Franklin Co., p. 122, dike 37. 
2H. P. Cushing, 18th Rep’t N. Y. State Geol.,"dike 25. 


‘sulyur Aq pousyy}suers Us9q DAVY SUOISNOUT oY} JO SolZepunog oy, 
‘puod ureyunoyy Jo yyNos olur ev Jo Jyey-ouo ‘oqruoAS Z3.1eND Ul SUOISHIOUL o][TAUOIL pu o4ISsOoYyy1OUy 


g161 ‘Bury “IH Aq 0f0Ud 


9 a4%Iq 


Photo by H.L. Alling, 1917 


Olivine diabase dike, 24 inches wide, cutting anorthosite. 
Just south of Mountain pond, north-northwest of Paul 
Smiths. Direction N.80° E. There are two other dikes 
nearby but they are not shown in the photograph. 


REPORT OFS THE, DIRECTOR: 197 123 


through a contact phase of the syenite. The excavation and lev- 
eling of Broadway has exposed it at the side of the street. It is 
about 5 feet wide and runs nearly northeast-southwest. Still 
another is to be noted 14 miles south of McCauley pond, beside 
the road, not far from the Gabbro knob. Only two dikes are reported 
in the region about Long lake,’ while in the eastern section the 
country is fairly seamed with these black bands. 

In composition, the dikes are somewhat similar to the gabbros 
but the textural make-up is far different. 

These dikes must have welled up nearly if not fully to the surface, 
for they display a striking chill effect. Close to the point of con- 
tact with the country rock the diabase dikes are very dense and are 
actually glassy in nature, showing that they were cooled too rapidly 
to allow complete crystallization of the minerals. Farther from the 
edge the glassy constituent is less and less prevalent until in the 
center of the wide dikes, some of which are 30 or 4o feet in thickness, 
the rock is wholly crystalline. The ridge known as the Palisades 
of the Hudson, so familiar to New Yorkers, is a wide dike (or more 
properly a sill) of diabase similar in composition to the Adirondack 
type, although of very much later age. Along the shore of Lake 
Champlain dikes of later age and of syenitic composition occur,” but 
we need not discuss them here. 


The Later Sedimentary Rocks 


With the dying out of the igneous activity the region was again 
subjected to the ravages of water, frost and winds, subduing the 
raggedness of its topography. The land experienced a general 
lowering and slowly sank below the waves of the sea, when a period 
of rock construction succeeded the ages of destruction. Around 
the shoulders of the Adirondacks layer upon layer of water-laid 
sediments were deposited, which, as time went on, became rocks. 


The Potsdam Sandstone 


The first deposit was a conglomerate composed of the refuse of 
the wear upon adjacent land areas. This is known as the Potsdam 
basement bed. Resting upon this a purer sandstone is found.’ The 


ree Cushing. Nav. State Vius! Balj ims5ips 104. 

Kemp, J. F. & Marsters, V. F., The Dikes of the Champlain Valley, U. S. 
Gros Bul. 107. 

3 Recent work seems to indicate that these beds are of different age from 
the Potsdam, but this is of small moment to us here. 


124 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


total thickness of the Potsdam is unknown, but an estimate of 1000 
feet! is given. It is thickened to the northeast of the Adirondacks, 
indicating that the Potsdam sea encroached from that direction. 
Whether the entire Adirondacks were buried under the Potsdam 
formation is an open question, but the writer is of the opinion that 
they probably were, at least as far as the east-central portion is 
concerned.” 

The Potsdam formation has been eroded from the central mass 
of the Adirondacks and occurs today only fringing the foothills 
and in disconnected patches (outliers) within the borders. While 
entirely gone from the Lake Clear region, loose boulders and irreg- 
ular slabs are found scattered about. It is a dense, tough, white 
to red sandstone, massively crystallized to a ‘‘ quartzite.” The 
individual grains of quartz sand have been cemented together with 
siliceous material. In the stone piles and fences of the farms the 
occurrence of the Potsdam is surprisingly common. Some of the 
red varieties show streaked areas of white that are attributed to 
the bleaching action of the organic acids produced by the life in 
the Potsdam sea. 


The Following Limestones 


The subsidence still continuing, later beds of sedimentary rocks 
were deposited upon the Potsdam, alternating sandstones and 
limestones showing a thickness of from 50 to 200 feet. Following 
these beds, which are known as the Theresa and Tribes Hill forma- 
tions, the Little Falls magnesian limestone (dolomite) was deposited, 
with a total thickness of some hundreds of feet. Upon these beds 
still later formations of sedimentary rock were laid on the bottom 
of the sea that covered nearly the whole of northeastern New York 
State. We need not discuss these various rocks, for if they existed 
in the area about Lake Clear, they have all been carried away by 
erosion and the great ice sheet that invaded the land. 


Rock Structures 


Winder the action of compressive forces the various) mamerals 
composing the rocks of the region have been rearranged with respect 
¢40 one another. Those which crystallize in the form of needles or 
<cales are forced into planes at right angles to the direction of com- 


Dive Cushing swN. Yr State Miiss Buliossno. 250: . 
2" Glacial Lakes and Other Glacial Features of the Central Adirondacks,”’ 
armen col SOC eit. 27/050; 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR 1Q17 125 


pression, and develop cleavage lines along which they have a tenc- 
ency to split. This is termed foliation. There is.a wide difference 
in the development of foliation in the various rocks subjected to the 
same compressive forces. The impure sandstones and shales of the 
Grenville series display foliation on such a fine and even scale that 
they split with considerable ease and form what are known as schists. 
These lines of cleavage may be entirely independent of the original 
bedding planes of the rocks, which under the stresses to which they 
have been subjected have become destroyed. 

The igneous rocks have been subjected to similar stresses but 
probably have not passed through so many mountain-making 
epochs as have the Grenville; hence they show less fohation. 
Another reason why they show less cleavage is that the composition 
is different. The anorthosite, being to a very large degree composed 
of one mineral, shows less structural change from the rearrange- 
ment of the individual crystals, but it is easily seen, however, that the 
rock has been mashed and crushed. 


Folds 


In such regions as the mountains of Pennsylvania, where the 
surface rocks are largely sedimentary in origin, it is a comparatively 
simple matter to observe the folded condition of the rocks. The 
situation is very different in this area. Nevertheless, considerable 
folding has occurred between the time of solidification of the major 
eruptives and the appearance of the diabase dikes. These minor 
evidences of igneous activity in well-preserved state furnish good 
evidence of the time of the major faulting and folding. Very minor 
folding may, however, have occurred since that time in the Adiron- 
dacks, but it is very slight. In Vermont the folds are much more 
marked. 


, Faults 

As the result of the tremendous strains and stresses to which’ the 
rock masses were subjected, they frequently fractured, those on one 
side of the break slipping up, down or laterally from their former 
position. These fractures with their resultant displacement are 
termed faults. 

In the Adirondack region the results of faulting furnish conspicuous 
physiographic features. In the immediate neighborhood of Lake 
Clear it is difficult to recognize the existing fault lines as the country 
is covered with sand and gravel to such an extent that their identi- 
fication must depend upon topographic rather than upon structural 


126 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


evidence. In the more rugged portions of the mountains east of 
this region where-the faulting was more intense they can sometimes 
be traced by the crushed condition of the rocks along the line of 
fracture, or suspicion of the presence of a fault line is aroused by 
an abrupt and complete change in the kind of the rock. An excellent 
example of this latter case is the Cascade Lake valley, where the 
rock on the southeast side is anorthosite, while the opposite side is 
composed of gneiss. 

One of the striking physiographic features of the Adirondacks is 
the gridiron pattern of the topography produced by one system of 
faults, running from the northeast to the southwest, crossing another 
set at right angles. Many valleys have resulted from this condition 
and they furnish natural passes for the roads between the separated 
lowlands. In the central portion of the mountains they are, as a 
rule, narrow V-shaped defiles, but in the Lake Clear region they are 
not so marked because erosion has leveled the escarpments and they 
have been deeply buried in glacial sands. Nevertheless, a number 
of faults have been positively identified. It would be natural to 
suspect upon topographic grounds that a fault line exists from 
Bloomingdale to Saranac lake, as shown on the accompanying map. 
A steep cliff 2 miles directly south of Bloomingdale is strongly 
suggestive. The fault line drawn on the map from Saranac lake to 
Kiwassa lake was proved to be correctly placed by the crushed 
condition of the anorthosite which has since been welded or rece- 
mented together at an exposure a mile south of the town of Saranac 
Lake, and west of Lake Flower. <A similar condition exists at the 
head of Lower Saranac lake not far from where the Ampersand 
Hotel stood. This fault line is identified farther to the northeast in 
the town of Saranac by the rusty and crushed character of the dark 
syenite shown on the side of the state road between the two railroad 
crossings. Another fault, supported by petrographic evidence, 
follows the route of the Delaware and Hudson, Chateaugay branch, 
from Bloomingdale Station southwest. Still another, and to us an 
important one, runs from Gabriels, Paul Smith’s Station, on the 
New York Central, southwest through Lake Clear itself. The 
evidence to support this is furnished by the record of soundings in 
the lake (made by Dr W. M. Smallwood). A submerged channel, 
varying from 30 to 4o feet deep, runs northeast-southwest. A cross 
fault, belonging to the other system, is likewise shown by the sound- 
ings. This runs from the swamp south of Upper St Regis lake south- 
east through the bay of Lake Clear, sometimes referred to, locally, 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 127 


as “ St Germain bay,” toward Lake Clear Junction (Saranac Junction 
on the map). The deepest spot in Lake Clear is the spot where the 
- two fault lines cross. 

To the west of Lake Clear the faults can only here and there be 
definitely located. A cliff in the dense woods a little south of the 
lowest extremity of Upper St Regis lake establishes one. The 
faults about Mountain pond to the north have already been 
mentioned. 

In Long lake to the south there is a most striking example of a 
very long and straight fault line valley.’ 


Topography 

The topography of the earth’s surface is the product of two groups 
of great forces; one constructive and the other destructive, alternating 
throughout countless ages. The elevation and sinking of the land 
with the consequent erosion and sedimentation has resulted in a 
scarred and weather-beaten surface full of meaning for those who 
can read the book of the past. 

Front time to time the land is_raised’ above sea level by deep- 
seated forces not clearly understood, but once above this level the 
forces of erosion are untiringly at work endeavoring to wear down 
the surface to gently sloping and rolling table lands. The longer 
these destructive agents act without being interrupted by periods 
in which constructive agencies have full play, the more completely 
will their work be accomplished. The streams will eat back into 
the highlands, forming ever-widening valleys, slowly but surely 
base-leveling the country. The arrangement. and resistance of the 
rocks should also be included among the factors upon which the 
changing topography of an area must depend. 

Whenever new oscillation occurs, changing the relative elevation 
of the land and the sea, the whole plan of erosion is altered and the 
stream drainage is modified. The detritus carried by the rivers 
and brooks into standing water adds its load to the growing accumu- 
lation of sedimentary deposits. As material is removed from one 
locality and deposited in another, shifting the load, the balance is 
continuously upset, so resulting in more oscillations. Thus the 
strand line of the sea marks the division between the activities of 
these antagonistic earth forces; sedimentation on the one hand and 
the wear of rivers, rains and frost on the other. 


1 Consult the government topographic maps of the Long Lake and the Blue 
Mountain quadrangles. 


128 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Adirondack Topography! 

Except for the period during which the Potsdam sandstone and 
associated sediments were formed, the Adirondacks have been exposed 
to excessive erosion, in all probability, since Grenville times. While 
this was going on they experienced the mountain-making epochs in 
which the Appalachian and Green mountains were formed, which 
resulted in a general uplift of the region, accompanied by faulting 
and very slight folding. Among the topographical features produced 
by the faulting, the Champlain depression may be noted. 

During the time that the region has been a land area it has stood 
at a comparatively constant level for at least two very long periods, 
allowing erosion ample time to reduce the area to low altitudes and 
subdued relief. The land then presented a low dome with its longer 
axis extendine across the country im “a mortawestenhy Waimecnons 
roughly running from Albany to Watertown and into Canada. It 
was upon the first level that the Potsdam and subsequent sediments 
were deposited. The land was uplifted at the close of this period 
of deposition and subsequently reduced again to a nearly plane 
surface known as the Cretaceous peneplane.” The present erosion 
is simply destroying what remains of these old levels. The slopes 
of these two erosional surfaces are not the same. On the west and 
south of the Adirondacks, the two merge by insensible degrees into 
each other,*? while in the east the distinction between the two is 
clearly perceptible, but still it is possible by careful observation of 
the sky-line formed by the hills and more distant mountains to 
imagine in a scientific way remnants of these peneplanes in the Lake 
Clear region. 

In recent time the area has experienced a gradual uplift.“ This 
rising or warping is the resultant of the former presence of the great 
ice sheet that invaded the land from the north. It undoubtedly 
covered the entire Adirondack region and pushed its way as far south 
as New York City.. The district about Lake Clear was buried undez 
a load of ice estimated to be some 4000 to 6ooo feet in thickness, 
. subjecting the surface to great compression and producing a marked 


1 For a fuller discussion of the topography of the Adirondacks, see H. P. Cush. 
ing, N. Y. State Mus. Bul. 96, p. 416, e¢ seq. 

For spelling “> peneplane,’’ see ID. W. Johnson, Geog: Rev.) ve len ltimene ners 
E. W. Shaw at the Albany meeting (1916) of the Geological Society of America 
questioned the age of the ‘‘ Cretaceous ’’ peneplane, regarding it of later age. 

tees Cushine wi @Nenovave IVitisn bUlo5 ome 

“jal, IU, Weubetcloniicl, shane, (Cisoll, Sores Belly 275 1. BA5—O2. 


Ore 


ily 


“bie 


$e 
+: Bie Thee yt 


— 


™~ 
a 


a. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I917 129 


depression in altitude. Today the land area, relieved of this weight, 
has “‘ sprung’ back again. 


Glacial Geology 


During geologic time the climate of the earth has been more 
uniform than is perhaps realized. Nevertheless slight periodic alter- 
nations of cooler and warmer periods have occurred and undoubtedly 
will continue to occur. A lowering of the average temperature by 
only a few degrees, if long continued, wouid result in the accumu- 
lation of vast amounts of ice in the highlands far to the north, and 
when it acquired sufficient mass, it would have to spread over this 
and other adjacent regions. This would mark the beginning of a 
glacial period. 

North America, especially the northern portion, has been subjected 
to repeated invasions of continental ice bodies. Without much 
question the Adirondacks have been so invaded many times, but in 
view of the fact that the glacial deposits are mainly the result of the 
last ice sheet, we will confine ourselves to it and its results. 


Glacial Erosion 


The great ice sheet crowded its way across the area in a south- 
westerly direction, grinding off the loose and disintegrated weathered 
surface of the rocks, widening the valleys and polishing the ledges. 
On rocky surfaces recently exposed by the removal of the top soil 
we find today numberless parallel scratches gouged by the scraping 
or planing action of sharp-edged stones and sand grains frozen in the 
ice. The direction of these striae informs us of the course taken by 
the waning stages of the glacier. One set of striae on the east shore 
of Upper St Regis lake measured south-southwest 5 37° W (corrected 
iOmieibe MOL),  Anouler Sel vol Siiiae was 10und on a ledgeyor 
syenite 33 miles north-northwest of Saranac lake. Here the direction 
of the ice flow was nearly the same (S 38° W). Many striae to the 
east and south have been noted and recorded; many more will 
doubtless be found in the Lake Clear district on careful search. 


Glacial Deposits 


The continental ice body picked up and carried with it all sorts 
of debris which it dropped as it melted. The water, resulting from 
the melting ice, swept much of this away into.terraces and deltas » 
of lake deposits. Nevertheless a number of well-formed deposits 
are present in the area; two long, narrow hills southeast of the 


GLACIAL GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE MAP OF PARTS OF 


ORK STATE MUSEUM BULLETIN 207-8 
JOHN M. CLARKE, DIRECTOR ST. REGIS AND SARANaG QUADRANGLES Re 


LEGEND 


4 


Moraines and 
Eskers 


¢ 


Ice Block Kettle 
Holes 


> 
~ > 
eTe 


Boulder Trains 


: 


Sand Dunes 


y 


Glacial Lake 
Beaches 


“Jpper Newman’ 
1800-1895 


Q 
ae 
2) 
isa) 
= 
x 
o 


“Lower Newman” 
1740-1780 


Saranac Glacial 
Waters 


1450-1660 


Local Lake 
“St. Germain’ 
* 1625 


sil 


. 


Geology by Harold L. Afling. 
1916 


| 


mcg Ae A ee emerge Se eee tn Mate Sei 


<Not 


130 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


village of Saranac Lake are conspicuous, but more striking is an 
elongated (eskeroid) ridge north of Jones pond, the surface of which 
is dimpled with small, block kettle eles.” Ho) the westromseau 
Smith’s there are two narrow winding ridges that are eskers, which 
represent the deposits of sand and gravel formed by streams flowing 
southward under the thin edge of the ice sheet during its northward 
retreat. The whole region is deeply buried in glacial drift of various 
sorts, ranging from the finest of sand to huge boulders, some of which 
are rocks quite foreign to the region. Boulders of Potsdam sand- 
stone, of granites and of gneisses from Canada are frequently 
encountered. The mantle of glacial material is spread over the tops 
of the hills rendering the exposures of the rocks beneath infrequent, 


Fig. 1 Ideal cross section of a delta. BR=bedrock, D=delta, L=lake, S=surface 
of water. 


thus adding great difficulties to the work of mapping the igneous 
rocks. Geological crudities in the accompanying map give evidence 
of the thickness of the till. 

Glacial moraines have in place dammed up existing valleys and 
river courses, forming many of the lakes of the region and forcing 
the streams to take new directions. Lake Placid is a striking example 
of a lake formed in this way. The town of Lake Placid is situated 
upon the moraine that has dammed and inundated two parallel 
fault line valleys. Faulting, following cross fault lines, has produced 
the islands, thus forming a ladder-shaped body of water. Lake 
Clear is a similar one on a smaller scale. Details of its origin will 


Plate_8 


Photo by H. L. Alling, 1917 


Looking north along the crest of the esker. two and one-half 
miles west of: Paul Smiths 


Plate 9 


Photo by Diston, Saranac Lake 


| 


sandstone 


” 


The Ausable chasm gorge cut by the Ausable river since the ice period through the 
Marine ‘ Potsdam 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9Q17 131 


be discussed later. When preexisting stream valleys are dammed 
and the rivers are forced to take new courses, they often form gorges 
with steep or vertical walls, the modern stream action not having 
had sufficient time to widen and smooth them. The Ausable chasm 
is a familiar example of such an occurrence. 


Glacial Lakes 


With the swing of the climate toward warmer temperatures the 
melting of the ice exceeded the rate of its advance, with the net result 
that it gradually withdrew from the region. As the ice sheet became 
thinner and thinner the mountain peaks poked their heads above 
the glacier, becoming a series of islands in a sea of ice. Gradually 
these islands became larger, surrounded by a growing accumulation 
of water impounded by the ice. These waters found escape over the 
ice to the south. This process of melting was continued until 
entire mountain ranges were exposed. 

Soon the rings of ice, which slowly retreated down the slopes of 
the mountain ranges, formed a huge ring isolating the Adirondack 
‘island’ from the rest of the State. This great ice ring prevented 
normal drainage to the sea and as a consequence many of the low 
spots within the barrier were flooded by water resulting from the melt- 
ing ice andrainfall. Many of the valleys, especially those with north- 
ward slope and drainage, held a succession of lakes whose existence 
was due to the ice barrier. These glacial lakes have left great sand 
plains, deltas, terraces, beaches and water-worn channels. Each 
lake was maintained at a fairly constant level so long as the ice 
permitted escape of the water only over some lateral pass, and sub- 
sequently was extinguished with the formation of a lake at a lower 
level when the ice retreated northward and uncovered a lower 
outlet. In each of two valleys in the more rugged portion of the 
mountains to the east, the writer has been able to identify at least 
a half dozen different levels, and including other portions of the 
Adirondacks, some twenty glacial lakes have been recognized. 


The South Meadows Lake 
The highest definite level, as shown by sand plains, terraces and 
beaches, recognized by the writer in the Adirondacks is one ranging 
from 1950 to 2210 feet in altitude. When the level was first appreci- 
ated some hesitation was felt in describing it as a glacial lake bottom, 
for no shore line features or outlets had been noted. It was con- 
sidered an outwash plain formed by the glacial streams that flowed 


5 


132 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 

from the melting ice, which were overburdened with debris, but as 
extended field work was undertaken, these phenomena were dis- 
covered or strongly suspected and hence the true nature of the plains 
was established. The best development of the lake bottoms is 
some distance from Lake Clear, in the more rugged section of the 
country, south-southeast of Lake Placid in the South Meadows 
country (in the northwest corner of the Mount Marcy quadrangle). 
The cause of the lake lay in the fact that normal drainage to the 
north was prevented by the ice that lay to the north, effectively 
damming the valleys. 

The writer considers that the glacier at this stage consisted of 
three distinct lobes: one covered the Lake Clear-Saranac Lake district 
with its southern edge stretching from Ampersand mountain, through 
the spot where the village of Ray Brook is now situated, to the 
northwestern slopes of Mount McKenzie. This lobe pushed a 
minor “thumb” into the depression where Ampersand lake is 
today. The second lobe was fed through narrow passes to the east 
and west of the Whiteface-Esther-Wilmington massif and covered 
the territory where Lake Placid now lies. The third and most 
eastern lobe, here considered, completely filled Keene valley (Mount 
Marcy sheet). i 

The South Meadows lake was of irregular shape, some ro miles 
long and wide, containing a number of islands, among which Mount 
Scarface and Seymore mountain may be mentioned. Its outlet has 
not as yet been definitely established but a very probable one is 
offered as follows: It begins at the swamp just south of Alford 
mountain in the Santanoni quadrangle, on the Essex-Franklin 
county boundary line (altitude 2020 feet), and passes westward 
through the narrow pass (altitude 1960) directly south of Van 
Dorrien mountain to Blueberry pond. Continuing westward into 
the Long Lake quadrangle, on the boundary between the two maps, 
it turns to the southwest and passes three-fourths of a mile south of 
Palmer brook. When within a mile of the Raquette river the course 
turns directly south over Brueyer pond. ‘This river course is a mere 
suggestion, as actual field work has not been undertaken in the rugged 
and inaccessible Santanoni quadrangle. 

The glacial sands, gravels etc. form a filling in the South Meadows 
country that is estimated to be at least 300 feet thick; this will be 
referred to again in another connection. 

A number of beaches of unmistakable character exist on the 
shoulders of the Sentinel range and on Scott’s Cobble. The altitude 


REPORT VOR) THE DEVE C TOR: VEO 17 133 


of a series of them range from 2146 to 2209 feet.1 These figures, in 
all probability, represent the water levels during the early stages of 
the lake. Sand plains with altitudes around 1960 feet strongly 
indicate that the lake was undergoing constant lowering, perhaps 
as the small ice lobe 3 miles east of Ampersand mountain retreated 
and allowed escape through the channel of the East branch of Cold 
brook and then south, lowering the level to 1960 feet as set by the 
Van Dorrien pass mentioned above. Remnants of the South 
Meadows lake, especially of the later stages, are found surrounding 
Seymore mountain, in the southeast corner of the Saranac Lake 
sheet. 

Although this lake apparently does not involve the area directly 
concerned here, it is described in rather a detailed manner so the 
striking succession of the glacial lakes of the region may be 
appreciated. 


Upper Lake Newman 


With the gradual retreat of the ice and its constant shifting 
position, new and lower outlets were exposed. Succeeding the 
South Meadows lake, the western portion of Upper Lake Newman, 
as the writer proposes to call it, was ushered in. As the present 
remnants are rather indefinite in character and its range is rather 
great (1800 to 1895 feet), the writer is not unmindful that stream 
filling, forming an outwash plain from the glacier, may be an altern- 
ative explanation; but in view of the fact that sand plains are found 
over considerable area confined within definite limits of range of 
altitude, they are assumed to represent a series of lake bottoms 
formed by a lake whose level was experiencing periodic lowering due 
to the downcutting of the controlling spillways. These spillways may 
have been the ice itself or a series of outlets which were over rock. 

Unfortunately, the outlets of the lake are not positively known, 
but in all probability the drainage was to the west, similar to that 
of the South Meadows lake. 

This lake is of more direct interest to us, for well-preserved remains 
can be seen in a number of places about Lake Clear. A remnant is 
located about Harrietstown as a complete ring around the hill west 
of the village, and two small patches are located to the west of 
Paul Smith’s station, one on the south and the other on the north 
side of the road leading to Paul Smith’s Hotel. 


1 Determined by a surveying aneroid barometer and checked against a baro- 
graph, hence as accurate as this method permits. 


134 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


A number of beaches of the lake have been located. One, well 
preserved, is on the north side of the hill, one-half of a mile north of 
Harrietstown, as is indicated on the glacial map. Others, of minor 
and insignificant nature, were seen in other portions of the region. 

The western portion of Upper Newman lake was even more 
extensive, if the writer’s conception of this body of water is correct, 
than the South Meadows lake. It covered the area occupied by 
Lake Placid, the western end of the Wilmington notch, sent a four- 
fingered bay into the South Meadows country, likewise a long arm 
into the valley of the Chubb river and flooded the Lake Clear-Saranac 
district. Eastward escape through the Wilmington notch was pre- 
vented by ice lying in the valley of the East branch of the Ausable, 
which, however, had retreated enough to allow a glacial lake to 
accumulate in the Keene valley, but no connection was possible 
between this area and our region for some time. The lake in Keene 
valley, the Keene lake, had a drainage to the south. 

The gradual withdrawal of the lobe of ice in the Keene valley in 
time progressed sufficiently to allow connection between Keene 
valley and the Lake Placid district by means of the Wilmington 
notch, permitting the eastern section to drain westward into the 
area immediately concerned here. This ushered in the eastern 
portion of Upper Lake Newman, a successor to the Keene lake. 
Thus for a short time Upper Newman was a very large lake involving 
considerable area. 

Lower Newman Lake 


Soon, however, after the formation of Greater Upper Newman, 
the outlet was lowered by a shift of escapes so initiating a body of ' 
glacial waters with a range of levels from 1740 to 1780 feet altitude 
(at the present time). This lake was very similar in general character 
to the one just preceding it. It extended a little farther north and 
washed the slopes of the hills at a little lower altitude. The reason 
for subdividing the lake into the upper and lower phases is that there 
exists a distinct line of separation in the terraces, particularly in 
the neighborhood of John Brown’s grave, along the West branch 
of the Ausable river. The Harrietstown beach, above referred to, 
is an excellent example. Its altitude is about 1800 feet and thus it 
belongs to the upper lake, but 20 feet or more below there is a fairly- 
steep bank that is the critical feature. Im the east, in) Keene wales 
this line of separation is apparently not present, for the life of the 
upper lake there was extremely short in comparison with that of the 
western section, and the amount of material available for building 


REPORT, OF THE, DIRECTOR LO17 135 


terraces and deltas was less. The name of the lake is derived from 
the town of Newman, the terminus of the railroad, where well- 
preserved levels occur on the north and south. The drainage of 
Lower Newman is assumed to be westward, perhaps following the 
course now taken by the Chateaugay branch of the Delaware and 
Hudson Railroad for some distance. 

On the map there is more area exhibiting the Lower Newman than 
there is showing the upper. West of Paul Smith’s station, about 
Harrietstown, west of Bloomingdale, south of Lake Clear Junction, 
and a mile southwest of Barnum pond are typical occurrences. 

The three glacial lakes above described all had, apparently, west- 
ward drainage, but in the succeeding lake (or group of lakes) we 
find a body of water whose outlets were to the east. 


Saranac Glacial Waters 


The series of sand plains, terraces etc., that come under this head! 
have such a wide range (1450 to 1660 feet) that they must have been 
produced by a series of glacial lakes, or by deposition by aggrading 
streams which no longer exist, or by a combination of both. Doctor 
Cushing is of the opinion that “these sands were probably deposited 
as deltas in a large and irregular, shallow lake formed back of the 
ice tongue which occupied the ‘lake belt’ during its slow retreat 
north, the material being furnished by the subglacial and englacial 
streams flowing into the lake at the ice margin.’ 

As nearly two-thirds of the Saranac sheet exhibits terraces and 
sand plains of this level, it was proposed that the name “ Saranac 
glacial waters’’ be applied to these levels. Perhaps this is not a 
very happy choice in the present case in view of the large number of 
names involving “ Saranac,’’ but it is thought best to retain it in 
consideration of the general history of the glacial lakes of the Adiron- 
dacks as a whole. 

Not all the areas indicated upon the glacial map were covered by 
the waters of this series of lakes. Some portions represent outwash 
plains from the glacier, deposited by the overburdened aggrading 
streams from the melting ice, forming deltas in standing waters, the 
surface of which, in many places, was above the water level. Such 
a case 1s shown in the northern portion of the great sand plain that 
stretches from Lake Clear Junction north to Paul Smith’s station. 
The district about the junction was probably under water, but the 


1H. P. Cushing, N. Y. State Mus. Ann. Rep’t of Dir., 1900. 


136 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


_ northern district was a delta lying just under or above the surface. 
The contours, in their concentric sweeps, clearly show this. 


Outlets 


When the outlets of the Saranac glacial waters are considered, we 
find that we deal with a bit of glacial geology that is intensely interest- 
ing, but unfortunately the district 1s quite removed from this area. 
Nevertheless, a short account is here given. 

Thirty-three miles directly east of Lake Clear, in a rather inacces- 
sible country, in the center of the Ausable quadrangle, there exists 
a long glacial channel running south a distance of some 9 miles with 
a dozen side outlets to the east that were successively opened up by 
an ice lobe that lay farther to the east. The higher spillways are to 
the south which furnished the escape for the higher levels; but as 
the lobe retreated northward lower and lower outlets to the north 
were opened.) Im several of these side outlet (channels Miecsiin wen 
abandoned falls and cataracts exist today entirely void of water. 
The channels are very impressive and furnish positive evidence of 
the former existence and nature of these levels. 4) Dhey aremwemer- 
worn by the heavy drainage that eventually found its way southward 
in the Hudson-Champlain depression. 


Cause of the Large Amount of Material Available for the Formation 
of Terraces 


One of the striking features of the glacial geology of the Adirondack ® 
is the small amount of true morainal material’ unmodified by water, * 
as contrasted with the vast quantities of sand and gravel in deltas, 
terraces etc., when compared with other districts, such as the Catskill 
mountains. The following hypothesis is offered to account for this. 
It is generally conceded that with the return of a warmer climate the 
Adirondacks were completely surrounded by a vast ring of ice that 
isolated the Adirondack highland from the rest of the State.* It 
was during this stage that the glacial lakes here described existed. 
_ The great ice sheet undoubtedly destroyed all vegetable life in both 
the Adirondacks and the Catskills. But im the) latter caseminence 


1 Glacial Lakes and Other Glacial Features of the Central Adirondacks, Amer. 
Geol. Soc. Bul., 27:658—59. 

2. Pe Cushimes Ne StatedVius, Balk ny peo: 

3]. H. Ogilvie, Jour. Geol., 10:397-412, 1902. 

TH. La) PamenildsyNe Verovave Niausiis tlh Gono ace 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9I7 137 


retreated northward as an irregular edge which allowed vegetable 
life to follow the ice in its withdrawal from the region. This con- 
dition was not possible in the Adirondacks where the ice ring pre- 
vented to any great extent any encroachment on the part of plants 
into the ice-deforested area. In the Catskill region the glacial 
drift was anchored by the roots of shrubs etc., and thus it was not 
easily washed by the streams into the standing waters in the valleys 
below, so a large amount of the drift still remains on the slopes. 
The glacial debris in the Adirondacks, on the contrary, was not thus 
anchored and most of it has been carried down into the valley 
bottoms, there worked over into lake deposits. This condition has 
an important bearing upon the forestry of the region. It explains 
the cause of the thin soil covering the slopes, which is easily removed 
by torrential streams when the mountain ranges are visited by 
destructive forest fires. This situation necessitates the employment 
of different methods in combating a raging fire in the Adirondacks than 
in regions that were nearer the ice front, such as the Catskills, which 
were not surrounded by a glacial ring and hence retained more of 
their soil. 


Postlacustrine Deformation 


It has been pointed out, under the head of Adirondack topography, 
that at the maximum extent of the ice sheet the load upon the land 
surface must have been tremendous, and compressed the land below 
its former level. Since the ice was thicker in the north than in the 
south, the amount of depression was greater in the northern part of 
the State. With the removal of the load by the melting of the ice 
the land sprung back, thus elevating the surface and tilting the 
shore line features of the glacial lakes. It has been shown! that 
the character of the postlacustrine uplift was a lifting in the 
form of a warped plane with the amount of warping greater 
rounemuona. Ihe lines of equal’ uplitt, since the 1ce~ period 
(isobases) incline south-northwest to east-southeast (20° from 
the latitude parallels). The zero isobase passes far south of 
New York City. The 560 foot isobase is near Lake Clear. This 
figure gives the approximate total uplift since the ice period for the 
area. The amount of tilting in our district, taken perpendicularly 
to the isobases, is about 2.85 feet a mile, declining southward. Thus 
all the sandy plains, their beaches and wave-cut shores are tilted to 


1H. L. Fairchild, ‘ Pleistocene Uplift of New York and Adjacent Territory,”’ 
Amer. Geol. Soc. Bul., 27:235-62; ‘‘ Post-Glacial Waters in Vermont,” Rep’t 
of Vermont State Geol., 1915-16, p. I-41, I917. 


138 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


the north today. The writer has determined the amount of tilt for 
a number of different glacial lake levels by direct measurement and 
has shown that very probably the land was experiencing uplift while 
the lakes were in existence, and thus each successive lake level has a 
slightly different degree of tilt, being greater for the higher lakes 
than for those lower down in a given series. 

This subject is introduced here, for it has a possible bearing on 
the origin of Lake Clear and its shore materials. 


The Lake Belt 


Lake Clear lies in what has been called the ‘‘ Lake belt ” through 
which, in preglacial times, the streams had their courses. The 
countless number of lakes “‘ range in size from fairly large bodies of 
water, several miles long and a mile or two in width down to the 
most insignineant of ponds. + Most? of themi, | have) Tecemedua 
north to northeast alinement from the faults’”’ as is easily seen in 
‘“ Upper and Lower Saranac, Big and Little Tupper and Long lakes.’””! 
Placid, Cranberry and Raquette lakes represent a ‘‘ somewhat 
different type in that they seem to occupy portions of more than one 
valley.’” 

' There are rock islands :; . . im all these larger lakeswana 
often in considerable number.” Lower Saranac and Big Tupper 
are full of them “ alined so as to suggest the drowning of adjacent 
small valleys.’ 

The outlets of many of the lakes in the region are over ledges of 
the old igneous rocks. ‘‘ Thus the level of Upper Saranac lake is 
maintained by the ledge of anorthosite over which its outlet pours 
at the Bartlett Club House; Lower Saranac has its outflow directly 
into the Raquette, and the level of that stream is determined by 
the ridge at Piercefield.’”* Other lakes owe their origin to morainal 
dams blocking valleys, while still others, especially the smaller ones, 
occupy kettle holes. A few occupy rock basins. Nearly all the 
lakes in the Lake Clear region are situated in depressions in the 
Saranac glacial water plain. 


DE. PB. Cushines Np. state Mis Bulhosa p. 420 ands: 

“leljen (Cusamie, IN, VW, Stes Ibs, IB, O55 Ds Avi aa0; 

3 (Oho, Chen 

4H. P. Cushing, ‘“‘ Preliminary Report on the Geology of Franklin County, ’ 
“Os Sq SA INSO IN, WW Siene (Cisolks iO. S2- 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9Q17 139 


The Origin of Lake Clear 


The great sand plain, left by the Saranac waters about the junction, 
is without much question fairly thick and buries a fault line valley 
that may have been a preglacial stream course. The rock bottom 
of this valley may have been deepened at the spot where Lake Clear 
is now situated by virtue of the weakness of the rocks at the crossing 
of the two fault lines (see petrological map), enabling the glacier to 
hollow out a basin. At this point, when the glacier was melting it 
perhaps left a block of ice 1n the depression which eventually became 
buried by the outwash and lake sands. The block was thus placed 
in a natural refrigerator and hence remained unmelted long after 
the withdrawal of the ice sheet and the draining away of the Saranac 


ve 
V 
V 
V 
V 
V 


Fig. 2 Diagram illustrating the origin of Lake Clear. BR=bedrock (Anor- 
thosite), F, F=fault line, I=buried block of glacial ice, T=till, SS=stratified sand, 
L=lake (a stage in the Saranac glacial waters), B, B=beaches of the lake. 

The glacier excavated the basin in which a block of ice was left on retreat. 
The block became covered by ground moraine (till). The Saranac glacial 
waters then deposited fine sand on top of the till. When the ice block melted 
it left a depression in which Lake Clear accumulated. 


waters. In time, however, it melted, lowering the surface, forming 
a depression which became filled with rain water, and marking the 
beginning of Lake Clear. There are a large number of these ice- 
block kettle holes, as they are called, all about Lake Clear, in the 
junction plain, and on the moraines, but in most cases they are 
small topographic features. 

With the extinction of the Saranac waters we should have to pass 
to other districts to follow the succession of glacial lakes in the 
central Adirondacks, but as they have no significance here they will 
not be discussed. 


I40 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Local Lake ‘*‘ St Germain”! 


On nearly all sides of the present Lake Clear there is an older 
beach or shore line belonging to an earlier lake Its altitude is 
about 16384 feet.” Dr W. M. Smallwood has traced it nearly around 
the lake.’ ‘On the south amd” eastern) ‘shores’ ihe” beacmiomianon 
Germain ”’ is close to the shore of Lake Clear, while to the northeast 
and especially toward the northwest and west the beach swings 
inland a mile or so. As can be seen on the glacial map, the beaeh 
has been traced to the shores of Upper St Regis lake, thus including 
. within the boundaries of Lake St Germain the swamps to the west, 
which were apparently waterways connecting the district of Grass 
pond with Lake St Germain and that in turn with Upper St Regis. 
It is probable that the beach of St Germain continues around the 
St Regis lakes, although the shore line is often indistinct and in 
places entirely missing. 


Fig. 3 Ideal diagram illustrating the beaches of the successive glacial lakes 
that preceded Lake Clear. SM=South Meadows, UN=Upper Newman, LN=Lower 
Newman, SWe=saranac glacial waters, G=StGermain, )@—Uake w@lean 
BR=bedrock 


On the southwest shore of Lake Clear there is a break in the St 
Germain beach, possibly indicating a connection between the area 
drained) ‘by former Lattle Wake’ Clear and \Bio) Vake@leanadine 
present drainage of Big Clear is southward into the Upper Saranac 
before flowing into the Saranac river and eventually northward 
into Lake Champlain, while the Upper St Regis drains northward 
into the St Regis river, finally into the St Lawrence. 


1A local name. 
* Measured by surveying aneroid and checked against a barograph and by 
spirit leveling, assuming the present lake to be 1610 feet above the sea. The 
height of the lake, at the time of visit, July 6, 1916, was measured at 1614 feet, 
which is regarded as higher than normal. 


g 


‘wuvorys oy} Aq oUOp BuTzNO Jo JUNOWL 44 SUIMOYG ‘OYL] SISOY IS JOMO'T jo 
Ja[JNO oY} SSOIow YINOS BUIYOOT “SYPUIG [AV JO JS0M Soprtt j[ey-ouo pue OMY ‘IoxSA JO WOTOOS SSOID) 


L161 ‘Buy “1TH Aq 070d 


OI 9}%Id 


— 


, 


as 


Pa 
i 
He 
bi 
4) 
i, 


i 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR 1917 141 


Where the divide between these two drainage systems crosses the 
swamp south of Upper St Regis it is trivial and unstable, its present 
position being of comparatively recent date. It is probable that 
since the extinction of ‘‘ St Germain ”’ this swamp has been developed 
in the waterway by vegetable filling.’ 

The writer attempted to measure the height of the “ St Germain ’ 
beach on the north and south sides of the present lake and was able 
to detect a very slight tilt to the north, indicating that Lake St 
Germain existed not long after the Saranac glacial waters drained 
away; the relative dip northward may have caused the drainage of 
the district to flow north. Whether it did positively do so can not 
at the present time be stated. The outlet of the chain of the St 
Regis lakes is a decidedly roundabout course and is through an 
esker which was responsible for the level of Lake St Germain before 
the present outlet was cut. 

Without much doubt the drainage af Little Clear lake (Little 
Clear pond on the map), Grass pond, Big Clear and Upper St Regis 
were connected, forming a single drainage system for a time, although 
today it comprises two separate systems. 

Wave and stream action of the waters are considered responsible 
for the sandy point on the west shore of Big Clear and the sand on 
the northeast side, although the little unnamed brook now flowing 
into this ‘‘ corner ”’ of the lake is adding its load to it today. 

Either upon the uplift and tilting of the land or the successful 
cutting of a new outlet the drainage was changed and a separation 
of the St Regis, Big Clear and Little Clear became complete. The 
present outlet of Big Clear is comparatively recent and is over sand 
and gravel which it was downcutting until man put a stop to this 
natural process by erecting a dam causing a flooding of the outlet. 


’ 


Present Conditions 


The attempt has been made in the preceding pages to outline in 
nontechnical language the geological story of the region so that the 
summer visitor can interpret the past from the present, appreciate 
the changes that have been wrought by the forces of nature that 
brought about the present conditions and understand the origin 
of Lake Clear. 

The lake is a typical Adirondack lake, lying in a rock basin sur- 
rounded by sand. It has existed for a comparatively few thousand 


1C. H. Smyth, jr, ‘‘ Lake Filling in the Adirondack Resioney Am. Geol., 
11:85-90. 


142 | NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


years and probably is only temporary, geologically speaking, for it 
is likely to be drained by stream erosion or filled with vegetable 
matter, which in either case would cause it to pass out of existence. 

The altitude is 1610 to 1614 feet above sea level, subject to a 
rise or fall of several feet, depending upon the precipitation. It is 
2 miles long, a mile wide and covers an area of 13 square miles (953 
acres, if the calculation of the writer is correct). It 1s essembiallly, 
a rock basin filled with water with sandy and gravelly shores, espe- 
cially on the west, northeast and east. A little distance east of the 
Lake Clear Inn a submerged shelf of sand and gravel extends some 
200 feet out from the shore with an average depth of about 15 feet. 
Beyond this the water deepens rapidly to the depth of some 35 
feet. This is the only place where such a shelf exists on the lake. 
We find the deepest spot in the lake along the fault lines as has been 
suggested before, the maximum depth being at the point where 
the two lines) eross, wihtere itis about 50 to 55 feet deep, eaceme 
to the northeast corner, the shore material is very fine and collected 
by the waves, assisted by the unnamed stream (on the map). The 
point that projects from the west shore is nearly all sand, the sur- 
face in many localities being composed of coarser material that 
appears to be the result of stream action during \elacial @iimacss: 
Near the south-central portion of the lake there is a shallow spot, 
a sort of submerged island. 

On the ‘south the anorthosite puts im an) appearancesanamss 
encountered all along the shore except where it dips below the level 
of the lake at the outlet. The material about the outlet is of glacial 
origin, composed of fine sand and ill-sorted till, forming an unstable 
barrier. 

The lake, when sounded, is shown to have an L-shaped channel, 
running from the southern shore to the deepest spot and from there 
turning at right angles, heading northwest for “St Germain” bay 
and for the swamp in the waterway which formerly connected this 
region with Upper St Regis lake. The channel thus follows the 
fault line. The bottom is composed of fine sand, gravel and bed 
rock. The sands were largely derived from the disintegration of 
the anorthosite and the syenite, the former predominating. The 
sand is quite free from organic material and loam and affords rather 
unfavorable soil for the growth of plants. This seems to account 
for the relatively few kinds of plants found growing in the lake. 
As all aquatic animal life depends more or less directly upon the 
plants for its subsistence, a rich supply of fish can not be expected. 


REEORT OF tit DIRECTOR 1O17 143 


Summary of Geologic History 


Although the Adirondacks offer an attractive field in which to 
study geology, their very complexity and age are a great hinderance 
in reaching accurate conclusions, and many steps in their develop- 
ment remain obscure so that it is impossible to set forth a concise 
statement giving the exact geological history of the region, but 
nevertheless a general summary is attempted. 

t The oldest rocks of the region are the Grenville series of sedi- 
ments deposited in marine waters. They were composed of sand- 
stones, limestones and shales. This deposit occurred under 
conditions of which we know next to nothing, as it perhaps occurred 
a thousand million years ago. 

(Age, Grenville, the base of the Precambrian) 

2 Following the deposition of the Grenville series, the land experi- 
enced an uplift that caused its appearance above the surface of the 
sea, thus 5 

3 Enabling erosion to remove huge quantities from its mass, and 

4 Followed by a period when a granite intrusion worked its way 
into the overlying sediments. 

(Age, probably Laurentian)! 

5 The granite and the Grenville were then subjected to mountain- 
making disturbances that apparently were more intense in the 
northwest part of the Adirondacks than in the southeast. These 
dynamic forces materially altered (metamorphosed) them, folding 
them together into a very involved mass. 

6 Erosion continuing lowered the altitude by removing huge 
quantities of all the foregoing rocks. 

7 Then followed the great intrusions of 

a Anorthosite 
b Syenite, with its granitic differential phase 
c Gabbro 

(Age, perhaps Algoman) 

8 An uplift of the region followed, accompanied by great vertical 
compression that altered and foliated all the above-mentioned 
formations. These metamorphic agencies in contrast to those 
‘mentioned in paragraph 5 were most active in the southeast, becom- 
ing less and less effective toward the northwest. 

9 Erosion continuing through a long period of time gradually 
reduced the elevation of the entire region. 


1 Recent investigations of the writer show that a basic rock, of Laurentian (?) 
age, followed the granite. This ‘‘ metagabbro”’ has not, as far as the writer 
knows, been noted in the Lake Ciear region. 


144 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


(The Precambrian peneplane) 

to Through cracks in this plain, the diabase dikes forced their 
way upward toward what may have been active volcanoes on the 
surface. : 

(Age, probably Keweenawan, the top of the Precambrian, or the 
base of the Cambrian) 

tz A period of erosion followed that removed the surface evidences 
of volcanic action, if such existed. 

(The pre-Potsdam peneplane) — 

12 Then came submergence of the land, followed by 

13 The deposition of the basement bed of the Potsdam sandstone, 
which may have been of continental or desert origin, as contrasted 
with sedimentaries formed under water. (The ‘“‘ Ausable’’ sand- 
stone of some authors.) 

14 The land sank below the surface of the encroaching sea, in 
which occurred : 

- 15 The deposition of the marine or “white Potsdam ”’ sandstone, 
(The Keeseville sandstone of many.) 

(Age, Cambrian) 

16 The later limestones were next deposited. (The Beekmantown 
limestone, the Chazy group, the Lowville limestone, the Black River 
limestone, the Trenton limestone, and finally the Utica shale.) 

(Age, Ordovician) 

17 Regional uplift that raised the sediments above water. 

(Age, Taconic uplzft) 

18 Succeeding erosion removed most of the above sediments from 
the central Adirondacks. 

1g A series of uplifts affecting the New England region much 
more than the Adirondacks, nevertheless causing block faulting to 
take place on a large scale throughout the region, especially in the 
east, the downward displacements being to the east. The amount 
of displacement was often very great, several thousands of feet in 
some cases. 

(Time, Devonian through the Permian) 

20 During the period of uplift occurred the intrusions of tke 
later syenitic (trachytic) dikes in the Champlain district. 

a1 Erosion continuing, * produced) my time they) \Creraezo sa. 
pene plane. 

22 Then the last continental ice sheet came from the north, 
rounding the hills, modifying the drainage and destroying all vege- 
table and animal life. 

(Age, Pleistocene) 


REPORT OF THE, DIRECTOR 1917 TA45 


23 The gradual withdrawal of the ice, by melting faster than its 
forward rate of movement, caused the damming of the valleys and 
the flooding of the district by a succession of glacial lakes. 

24 Extinction of the glacial lakes by the complete withdrawal of 
the ice, leaving a drift-covered surface dotted with lakes and ponds. 

25 Postlacustrine uplift and warping of the land. 

26 Slight readjustments of the streams. 

27 Present condition; Lake Clear. 


Acknowledgment 


The writer takes pleasure in expressing his indebtedness to Dr 
W. M. Smallwood, who opened the way for this little paper; to 
Dr H. P. Cushing for advice freely given on points on the petrology; 
to Prof. George H. Chadwick, who assisted by critically reading 
the manuscript; and to Mr R. J. Howard for assistance in the field. 


A 
it ‘ ¥ 
” { ks iy 
eet or " 
~ a » (Eye 2 r u ‘ 
i Fy s . 
| A : 
| ne i 4 i : ft tS 
. ; : ‘ Ay te | 
2 . ‘ | aes =, ; } 
) ; 
( 
| ; - r y i 
se , o.) 
| “i Bacet 1 bint i bi i 
’ 3 
- Pl 4 

| ‘ ‘ . 
: : i z r 
| u ' N : S. 

i 7) - 

/ ‘ 5 
( Pa ! . } 
7 7 x i a 
i yal: 
l p \ . 
ip j Z 
: 

} 
i ued : PU 
i . 2 : - 

1 


hy 
j Ne 


wir. iM 
" meee 


EIS MEPS PERALTA RIE CREA BENE 2 RRP 


i a 
oe 


A PSS hee Se ey 


aS 


\e 


we Ua (ae) 1-—— Pru) 


‘et we 


-e- 


Me 


JOHN M. CLARKE, DIRECTOR NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM BULLETIN 207-§ 


Tt 
i] 


MAGNET/G NORTH 


MMA I IBA 


GEOLOGICAL MAP 
OF 
PERCE P.Q. 
BY 
JOHN M. CLARKE 


yy, 


LEGEND 


Bonaventure sandstone and conglomerale [9] Silurian-Murailles section 


LowerDevorian. Dipterus shale raz Cambrian Ordovician limestones ord slates 


Silurian Mt Joli section 


Middle Lower Devonian. Pie diaurore series Low ground largely covered by beach wash and shingle 


Wy) 
Lowest Devonian. Barré limestone F; Y Buried pavement oP vertical paleaxotes 


Submarine extension of Barré limestone Glacial Ul probably: local 


’ Soule Lunlle-<A2 inches approximate “ee 


GEOLOGICAL MAP OF THE PENINSULA OF PERCE, 
PO AND is, ISLANDS.” 


BY JOHN M. CLARKE 


So much has been ‘published in these reports regarding the geology 
of Percé and other parts of the Gaspé peninsula, that 1t seems proper 
to insert here a completed and detailed map of the highly disturbed 
but exceedingly instructive Paleozoic geology of the Percé penin- 
sula. The accompanying map is based upon a corrected plane 
survey of the geographic outlines of the region made preparatory 
to the meeting of the International Congress of Geologists in 1913. 
No more exact plane map exists nor has any topographic map of 
Percé been made. It is not designed here to indicate the sectional 
structure of the region; for these details other publications may be 
consulted, as they are all a matter of record. The map explains 
itself but the following brief annotations may be added: 

The rock sections are essentially sea-cliff sections. The exposures 
are otherwise shown only around and beneath the cliffs of the Table- 
a-Rolante and in streams cutting down to the sea. The interior of 
the country back of the mountain referred to is a rolling, heavy 
timbered wilderness entered only by trails, with few streams and 
very rare rock exposures. The rocks of the Bonaventure con- 
glomerate, which is believed to represent in a broad way the forma- 
tions of the later Devonian and earlier Carboniferous, are approxi- 
mately horizontal and when not so have been apparently subjected 
to comparatively recent dislodgment. hese beds are thought to 
be of continental or delta origin, and while they cover the greater 
area of the peninsula and its islands, they are the latest rock deposits, 
resting upon a pavement of Paleozoic strata upturned at a very 
high angle. About the front of Mount St Anne the soil consists 
of a sheet, largely of residual material, lying in depressions which 
are more or less swampy because of obstructed drainage. That 
this area has been invaded by the sea in comparatively recent times 
is quite certain, as corroborative evidence of negative and positive 
movements of the coast is very clear, and the level submarine rock 
floor intimates the seaward extension of the present rock cliffs. 

[147] 


RENE JUST HAUY AND HIS INFLUENCE 


An address by Herbert P. Whitlock on the occasion of the 175th anniversary of 
the birth of Abbé Hatiy 1743, given at the Abbé Haiy celebration in New York, 
February 28, 1918 


Reviewing the history of the modern sciences it appears to us 
remarkable that in so many instances the person of one individual 
assembles the scattered observations and deductions of his prede- 
cessors, unifies and crystallizes the thought of his epoch and gives 
to his special branch of learning that impetus which, kindling at 
the fire of his genius, lights his successors along the way to modern 
scientific attainment. In this way we speak of Newton as the 
father of mechanical physics; of Cuvier as the originator of com- 
parative zoology and of Linnaeus as the founder of biological classi- 
fication. The year 1743, to which we direct our attention on this 
its 175th anniversary, was remarkable in that it saw the birth, in 
France, of two such intellectual giants — Lavoisier and Hatt. 

It is not without significance that modern mineralogy, based as 
it is on chemistry and crystallography, should, by a mere coincidence, 
be heralded into existence by these twins of genius. It is not without 
significance that, caught in the whirlwind of the Revolution, they 
should have together endured imprisonment. 

To what heights the mind of Lavoisier would have attained had 
his life been spared, we of course have no means of estimating. 
Suffice it, however, that the Abbé Hatiy emerged from that supreme 
experience as one of the most profound analytical thinkers of two 
centuries. 

Réné Just Hatty, honorary canon of Notre Dame, member of the 
French Academy, creator of the science of crystallography, was 
born February 28, 1743, in the village of St Just, about 70 kilometers 
north of Paris and directly on that now historic line which marks 
the limit of the Teuton drive of 914. Asa child Haity early showed © 
a marked taste for church music, which trait coupled with his interest 
in religious ceremonies attracted the attention of the prior of an 
abbey at Prémontres who, perceiving his aptitude and intelligence, 
arranged to have him instructed by some of the monks. His progress 
was such that his instructors prevailed upon his mother to spare 
enough from her meager livelihood to enable him to go to Paris in 
search of ampler educational advantages. In Paris Hatiy was 
forced to earn his living as a choir boy and became a good musician 

[149] 


I50 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


on the violin and harpsichord. ‘‘ This employment,” said he with 
some naiveté, “had at least this agreeable quality that it does not 
permit me to bury my talent for music.’”’ Meanwhile his patrons 
were not idle, and before long Hatty received a scholarship in the 
College of Navarre, which enabled him to pursue his education in 
the classics. At Navarre application and intelligence advanced 
him from the role of student to that of instructor, the gift of teaching 
which so distinguished his career being thus early recognized and 
fostered. Here as well under M. Brisson he developed a taste for 
physical experiments, particularly those relating to electricity. 
Shortly after attaining his majority and with it his clerical degrees, 
he entered a broader field of study and teaching at the College of 
Cardinal Lemoine in Paris. , 

Among his colleagues at Paris was numbered Lhomond, the 
grammarian, whose passion for botany gave to Hatty his first insight 
into the realm of natural science and by directing his attention to 
the symmetries of plant life paved the way to those more intricate 
and beautiful symmetries of crystallization which were to render 
his name renowned. By a happy accident the Jardin du Roy 
adjoined the college and proved a favorite scene of the botanical 
walks of Hatty and his “ chosen companion and director of con- 
science.’ Thus it was that, noticing on one occasion the crowd of 
students entering the class of mineralogy conducted by Daubenton, 
he entered with them and found the real goal of his scientific aspira- 
tion, the study to which he was to devote his life. Coming to this 
new world of inorganic shapes, complex and yet regular, fresh from 
the contemplation of the geometrical symmetry of the forms of 
plant life, Hatty was struck with the apparent lack of orderly arrange- 
ment where his scientific instinct had told him order must be. How, 
he reasoned, can the same stone, the same salt, reveal itself in cubes, 
in prisms, in points, without changing its composition to the extent 
of a single atom, while the rose has always the same petals, the 
acorn the same curve, the cedar the same height and the same 
development. 

To what extent can we assume that the Abbé Hatty owed his 
great discovery to an accident? Such accidents are only the guiding 
threads held out by the hand of Opportunity. We know that in 
the house of his friend M. Defrance, Hatty dropped the now historic 
group of prismatic crystals of calcite and gathered from the ruin 
of a fine specimen the cleavage pieces, to him recognizable as of the 
same form as other crystals of calcite, and it appears that he had 


MT 
4 Us 


ANvedananadvratuevatvatatitliviell nie 


ae he FE Neferd par Re Db loarise sat 
“eis Uuter des Prates de Liopsigee de Mineralogie if 


Abbé Réné Just Hatiy, 1743-1822 


175th Anniversary, New York, 28 February, 1918 


i 
4 


Tye 
aS ie 


REPORDL TOE CEs DIRECTOR TOQ17 I5I 


inevitably thrust upon him the key to the mystery of the mathe- 
matical interrelation of these forms. But without a mind prepared 
to interpret this chance occurrence, without the imagination reaching 
‘out to its interpretation, the incident would have meant no more 
to him than to his friend who stood beside him. Bergman, although 
unknown to Hatty, had had an almost identical incident called to 
his attention by his pupil Gahn, without fully realizing its signifi- 
cance. Bergman did not voice the cry, which on the lips of his 
illustrious successor has become historic, “7 out est trouvé.” 

Returning to his cabinet, Hatty lost no time in verifying the 
principle which was thus revealed to him. Under his hammer 
were sacrificed successively a scalenohedral crystal of calcite of the 
form known as “ dog tooth spar,’ and another of a low rhombo- 
hedral habit; in each case the primitive cleavage rhombohedron 
appeared from the fragments as he expected that it would. With 
the idea of developing the “ primitive form ”’ from other species he 
ruthlessly attacked the other treasured specimens of his little collec- 
tion and his sacrifice was fully justified by the results, for the cleav- 
age fragments in many instances furnished him with the basis, 
significantly termed by him le noyau, upon which the complicatedly 
modified crystal combinations were, as it were, built up. He con- 
ceived the theory of modified forms, built up from the primitive 
by diminishing layers of crystal particles (dicroissements), each 
successive layer having a definite relation to the preceding one and 
to the primitive nucleus. 

But the Abbé Hatty had spent fifteen years of his life in teaching 
Latin and had, like so many of us, forgotten what little geometry 
he had acquired at the College of Navarre. He sat himself assidu- 
ously but tranquilly to master enough mathematics to enable him 
to prove his law. In the introduction to his Tvraité de Cristallo- 
graphie we find this very illuminating paragraph which represents 
his experience during these days. He says: 

“In the solution of analytical problems, the object of which 
is to represent the progress of nature, we are led by very rapid 
methods to results which are often overlooked and which now and 
then excite our surprise by the paradoxical form in which they are 
presented. But when, guided by simple reasoning, we return step 
by step over the course which was so quickly bridged by calculation, 
we end by perceiving the action of the principles which have given 
birth to these results.”’ 

The researches of the Abbé Hatiy communicated to his master 
in science, Daubenton, and through him to Laplace, won for him 


152 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


in 1783 a place in the academy left vacant in the class of botany, 
and in 1788 he was ranked as associate in the class of natural history 
and mineralogy. 

Nor was it long before, armed with this new torch of truth, the 
science of mineralogy at the hands of Hatty began to undergo a 
rejuvenation; from the nebulous mineral group which up to that 
time had gone by the generic name of schorl, there emerged fourteen 
well-defined species. The zeolites yielded six species, the garnets 
four and the zircons five. 

In 1784, having been in the service of the university twenty 
years, on the advice of his friend Lhomond, Hatty availed himself 
of the right to retire on a pension as emeritus and proceeded to 
devote himself to research. 

A man of Spartan. simplicity in his secular and religious life, it 
is said that he, through ignorance of the formalities and etiquette 
of the Louvre, appeared at his first lecture before the court in a. 
long ecclesiastical gown, doubtless grown shabby by much wear in 
his daily round of prayer and teaching. 

The Revolution by depriving him of his pension further aug- 
mented the rigors of his life, but although forced to earn his living 
the placidity of his disposition and the simplicity of his tastes 
rendered him to an extent immune to the privations of this period 
of his life. Indeed, so immersed was he in the daily round of worship, 
labor and study that it was with astonishment rather than fear 
that he received the delegation of citizens who came to arrest him. 
They demanded of him his fire arms and he showed them the spark 
of an electric machine; they searched his papers and found only 
algebraic formulae, Nevertheless he was apprehended and lodged, 
together with all the other priests and regents of that part of Paris, 
in the Seminary of Saint Firmin which had been turned into a 
prison. For Hatiy it was but the exchange of an ecclesiasticalror 
a secular cell. In the midst of his friends and brothers in religion 
he prevailed on his jailors to send for his cabinets of crystals and 
was soon again in the midst of his interrupted researches. And it 
was thus that his former pupil and colleague, Geoffroy de. Saint 
Hilaire, found him when armed with the order for his release he 
penetrated the prison which had become in reality a retreat. Arriv- 
ing late in the day he was unable to persuade Haty to exchange his 
tranquil incarceration for liberty until the following day, which was 
the 31st of August just two days before that fatal 2d of September 
which, had it dawned upon the Abbé Hatty in prison, would have 
inevitably seen him mount the steps of the guillotine. 


REPORT VOR STEP DIRECTOR “LOT 153 


The unobtrusive and almost shrinking modesty which always 
characterized Hatty, together with his sober garb and peaceful 
bearing, must have preserved him from further outrage, for we do 
not hear of his being again molested. Later the Convention nom- 
inated him as one of the Commission of Weights and Measures 
(1793-94). Under the Republic he was constituted Minister of 
Mines and prepared his great work, the Trazté de Mineralogie, which 
was published im 1801. Of this work Cuvier writes: 

“He has made of mineralogy a science just as precise and just as 
mehiocicall asvastronomy, 5). 95) In a word, we may say that 
M. Haty is to Werner and Romé Delisle what Newton was to Kepler 
and Copernicus.” 

One incident may be cited to illustrate his characteristic charity 
and lack of self-assertion. On the death of Daubenton in 17099 
when, according to precedent, Dolomieu, his assistant, would have 
been named as a successor to the chair of mineralogy at the Museum 
of Natural History, it happened that Dolomieu had been arrested 
and held as a political prisoner in Sicily. Hatty, who was the obvious 
candidate for this honor, so urged the claims of his absent rival 
that, through sentiment rather than merit, Dolomieu was given the 
chair, which, however, he never lived to fill, his premature death in 
1802 leaving the field free to his generous colleague who was immedi- 
ately elected to the professorship. 

Haity had never relinquished his studies in physics; indeed he 
constantly drew upon his skill and knowledge as a physicist in his 
mineralogical researches. On being asked by the government, 
however, to prepare a treatise on physics, to be used as a textbook 
in the schools, he hesitated to undertake a task which would cause 
iim TO, abandon even temporarily his: chosen field. ihe Abbe 
Emery, the ancient superior of Saint Sulpice, advised him in these 
words: 

“ Do not hesitate; you would commit a grave mistake if you lost 
this ‘occasion, in treating of nature to speak of its Author 
and do not forget,’’ he added, “‘ to take on the title page your title 
of Metropolitan Canon.”’ , 

The treatise on physics, like everything else from the pen of Haty, 
is a model of purity of thought and clarity of expression to which 
sterling literary qualities his natural love of teaching has added a 
charm of interest calculated to inspire the young students with his 
own love of the natural sciences. 

The closing years of his life were marked by another reversal 


154 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


of fortune, when, under the Restoration, he was deprived of his 
pension and honors. But no administration, no political reversal 
could take from him the fame which he had earned or the satisfac- 
tion of a life well spent in the elevation of the science which he loved. 
Cuvier has given us a striking picture of the true greatness of the 
unassuming Abbé of Revolutionary France — sought out by every 
visitor of distinction who entered Paris, yet never inaccessible to 
the poorest and humblest student. He never changed the hours 
of his meager meals, of his rising and retiring, day by day he took 
the same exercise, he traversed the same streets, losing no oppor- 
tunity to exercise the small kindnesses and courtesies which so 
distinguished him, directing strangers whom he found embarrassed 
by the intricacies of Paris and distributing to them cards of admis- 
sion to the collections. On his occasional visits to his native village 
none of his ancient neighbors could detect by his manner that he 
had in Paris become a person of distinction. 

His death was hastened by a fall which fractured the crown of 
his thigh bone and resulted in a painful abscess. Despite his condi- 
tion he labored to the end on a new edition of his Trazté de Miner- 
ologie which appeared in 1823, a year after his death. 

Such was the man whose name we honor today. As to his influ- 
ence, no one of us who has dipped more than casually into the 
wonderful science of crystallography has failed to have felt it. 
Beginning with that admirable mineral species calcite, called by 
him ‘‘ the Protheus’’ among minerals, from a meaningless chaos 
of unrelated forms he produced an ordered science. To anyone 
who will consult the literature of mineralogy in the latter half of 
the eighteenth and the first half of the nineteenth centuries there 
will appear a well-marked line of distinction between the old and 
the new, between those who wrote before Hatiy published his Essaz 
d'une theorie sur la structure des cristaux and those who succeeded 
him and profited by his teachings. 

William Phillips, writing in 1823, says: 

“The labors of the Abbé Hatity have shed over mineralogy a 
purely philosophical luster which indeed has been one of the chief 
causes of raising the study to the rank of a science; this he has done 
by showing the consonance of the laws of crystallization with rigid 
calculation: he has proved that in crystallization there is a natural 
geometry.” 

It was as though he took as his motto the inspired words of 
Gulielmini uttered nearly a century before the publication of his 
LTraité de Mineralogie: 


REPORT OF FHE DIRECTOR IQI7 155 


“ Crystallization 1s a curtous and wonderful operation of Nature’s 
geometry, and therefore worthy of being investigated with all the genius 
of man and with the whole energy of the mind, not because of the pleasure 
which always attends the knowledge of wonders, but because of its great 
usefulness in natural science; for Nature here as it were discloses 
herself, and having cast aside every veil, permits us to behold not merely 
the results of her operation, but the very processes themselves.” 

The century and three-quarters since the birth of Hatty has been 
marked by many crystallographic milestones. Deep cut on the 
cornice of this Hall of Fame are the names of Weiss and Nauman, 
of Miller, Mohs and Zippe; of Haidinger, Dana, Von Rath and 
Goldschmidt; high priests of the altar of mathematical crystallo- 
graphy, the fire of which was first kindled by that other priest whose 
name we honor today. And beside these names I read the names 
of those others no less illustrious, Bravais, Sohncke, Schonflies, 
Von Fedorow, Barlow, Tutton and last and greatest, the elder and 
the younger Bragg. 

Just as inthe Mont Cenis tunnel the engineers of France and Italy 
could hear each other’s blows from the other side of the barrier of 
rock, so today the advance guard of workers in organic and inorganic 
sciences seem to hear rumors from the other side of that wall of the 
unknown which hides the origin of life. Who can say but that 
when the future has yielded up that supreme secret, biologist and 
crystallographer may not reecho the words of Hat: 

Se Mottmest: irotyers 


CRYSTALLOGRAPHIC STUDIES OF BARITE 


BY HERBERT P. WHITLOCK 


The following crystallographic notes on three hitherto undescribed 
occurrences of barite are submitted, not because these localities 
furnish crystals which are unique in new forms or rare habit, but 
because it is the firm conviction of the writer that all contributions 
to the study of species rich in forms are of value in shedding light 
on the problems involved in crystal habit. 

The specimens which form the basis of these studies are from the 
genera! mineral collections of the New York State Museum, and 
have been acquired by gift and exchange during a period covered 
by the last eight years. 


1 Barite from Five Islands, Nova Scotia 


The series of crystals which furnished the material for this note 
were obtained from a single specimen (no. 719.11) acquired by 
exchange from the Museum of the University of Toronto, and 
bearing the label as above. The specimen consists of a crested 
‘aggregate of crystals of uniform habit, tabular parallel to the basal 
pinacoid, and showing on the termination, in close proximity to the 
zone of the macrodomes, a series of somewhat dull but well-defined 
planes which correspond to several macropyramids new to the species. 

Habit. The crystals, some of which are 30 mm by 20 mm in 
size, show considerable dome development, in habit somewhat 
resembling the combination from Sajohaza, Hungary, described by 
Zimanyi.| The planes of the prism m (110) are developed to a 
considerable habit, the zone [100:001] being emphasized by two and 
sometimes three pyramids, present in minute development. A 
feature of the habit which also suggests the Sajohaza occurrence 
mentioned above, is the reentrant angles formed by the parallel 
group development or oriented growths (Fortwachsungen) of the 
planes of (165). It was at first suspected that these growths, which 
are shown in the shaded section accompanying figure 1, might be 
due to twinning, but an examination of the optical behavior of the 
crystals proved that this was not the case. Figure 1, which shows 
the habit of these crystals, is drawn with the a and b axes reversed 
with respect to the usual orientation. 


1Zimanyi, K. Féldt., K6z6l. 1909. XX XIX, fig. 8. 
, iS 


158 


NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQ17 159 


Forms. The following forms were recorded on the twenty crystals 
studied: 


b (o10), ¢ (oor), m (110), 9 (320), A (270), 71 (034), 
Olen) <7, (O53). @ (x02). w (non), 2 (G15), 7 (113), 2 Grn): 
y (122), © (313), be (165)*, b (166), Y3 (167)*. 


The forms marked with an asterisk (*) are new. 

j1 (034). This brachi dome was present on most of the crystals 
measured, as a series of narrow faces, giving poor reflections. 
Although rare, (034) has been observed by Samojloff! on geodic 
barite crystals from the .beds of the rivers Ischma and Uchta, 
northern Russia, and by Slavic ? from Mies, Bohemia. 

jz (053). This new brachi dome was present on a number of the 
crystals measured, as slightly rounded planes of fair development. 
Although dim, the signals yielded consistent readings and there 
seems to be little doubt regarding the validity of the indexes as 
assigned. 

The above rare domes were identified from the following measure- 
ments upon a single circle Feuss goniometer: 


Number Cal 
Letter Symbol of Measured | ee 
readings culated 
xine ce oon ieee ee ree Rs ae OOI :034 3 44° 20! 44° 348" 
C243 DSO ONO CONG OBOE LOUONC (GeO how Orch tbe Dan OOT 7053 4 65 35 05 27, 


Developing the zone of the brachidomes into an harmonic series 
and splitting at the obvious knot point (o11), we have for the 
recorded brachidomes of barite: 


C oc oC ae S A g WA ji Eo B E3 = 0 
Forms 001 0.1.12 018 016 014 O13 025 O12 047 035 023 034045 056067 O89 o11 
1 if 1 il 1 2 1 4 3 2 3 4 5 6 
Symbol O {2s Ga MCA Te ORS EOP ORCC (es Co peau. Ae Be Bye ae 
w-V 1 fi aot 1 1 1 2 £8 é 
a Oe ee ce a ee eee Se AN 5 OP Sains 
Vo-V 
0 ikl NS ead eda g A A, b 
MEGS) Ol O53 O21 031 OAT O71 0.10.1 0.16: \G:20.1 oro 
Symbol 1 BDO Nos Sud apy IO 16 20 ore) 
V-I 
ee ree eg RE ce 


2 


1 Samojloff, J., Verh. Min. Ges. Petersb. 1900, 2, 38, 323. 
2 Slavic, Fr., Abh. d. bohm. Akad. 1905, 19, II. 


160 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


It will be noted from the above that both (034) and (053) fall in 
normal series N3, the first series being disturbed by but one extra 
. form of normal series N., (047), between the limits $ and 3, and the 
second having no extra form between these limits. Also between 
these limits, the first Nz series 1s complete, and the second lacks 
but two terms. . 

, (165). This new form is the first of a series of three brachi- 
pyramids, all having the same 9 value and constituting the dis- 
tinguishing characteristic of the occurrence. The faces of this 
pyramid were fairly prominent on most of the crystals studied, and 
although somewhat dull gave quite well-defined images of the signal. 
The form was determined by measurements of the e angle and by its 
position in zone [to1:or1: IIo]. 

YW (166). This brachipyramid, which was first recorded by Schrauf! 
on barite crystals from Pribram, has since been noted by several 
observers. It was present on a number of the Five Island crystals 
as a series of small, dull planes, identified by the value of the e angle 
and by the fact that they lay in zone [orr: 111]. 

v3; (167). This new brachipyramid belongs in the same series as 
the two mentioned above, and was observed with them on several 
of the Five Islands crystals as a series of small, dull planes. The 
planes of (167) were identified by measurement of the e angle and 
by their presence in the zones [oo1: 166] and [165:011:167:1ro1l. 

The following are the measurements upon which identification 
of these brachipyramids is based: 


Number 


Cal- 
Letters Symbol of Measured 
readings culated 
ORR UIR Rc h oN Teli Ke. eel eR aa na Ota OOT:165 14 58 2m 5a. On 
Ca Dee ederim smieen Range aiid i OOI :166 8 53.0 12 5a Lg 
Oo tonme peeninemeay wanes Me couk deg | O11 :166 5 9 4 Oy iy! 
CHEERS Paso menet Mere aise: Lk OOI:167 4 | 48 47 48 58 


2 Barite from Black Cape, Quebec 


The specimens which furnished the material for this study were 
collected in the summer of 1914 by Mr C. A: Hartnagel of the State 
Museum staff, at Black Cape, on the north shore of Chaleur bay, 
in the province of Quebec, Canada. The barite crystals were found 
in the interior of calcite geodes, the latter being obtained from 


1 Schrauf, A., Ber. Akad. Wien. 1871. 64. 199. 


REPORDMOM Stitt) DURE ETOR \ LOL] 161 


steeply tilted beds of red shale, and especially from those portions 
of these beds which lie in close proximity to intrusions of amygda- 
loidal diabase. Secondary hematite in shotlike globules and fine, 
scaly, crystalline plates marks the stage of deposition of both the 
barite and the calcite crystals occurring implanted on the surface, 
and included in the body of the crystals. 

Habit. The barite crystals are thin tabular in habit parallel to 
the basal plane, and are of nearly square basal outline owing to a 
dominant dome habit. They vary in size from about 3 mm to about 
25 mm, and are clear and transparent with sharp, brilliant faces. 
A series of seventeen were selected for measurement from a lot of 
over fifty crystals. The following forms were observed: 

Ei@on a (ico) (T10)) VN \(@30), 1 (120), X (30) 

IFATAS) OMOnm) 4) (oA), eanoe)hnad (uo2). 1% (ion). Di (soz); 

HAs) 7 Gaz) 2 rt) phys (122) (124), Us (168), § (142). 

Figures 2, 3 and 4 show some of the combinations observed, and 
may be considered representative of the habit of these crystals. 

U, (168). The only form observed which is noteworthy by reason 
of its rarity 1s the macropyramid (168). This had previously been 
feCcOmdcdetonml our One ocaliiyen mame. Wites) Bohemia,’ wiere ult 
was figured on two combinations, both of which are domadic in habit. 
In the present instance the form occurs as a series of very thin planes 
beveling the edges between o (o11) and d (102) from which readings 
could be obtained only by resorting to a method of multiple 
reflections, five readings being averaged on each face observed and 
the average of these averages taken as follows: 


Number Cale 
Letter Symbol of Measured Pai) 
readings 
BS (Dinis Ree NE ATOM SN Te TRIN SNA ett 102:168 2 50° 20’ , 50° 207 


3 Barite from McCormick, S. C. 


In 1909 the New York State Museum received as a donation from 
Mr James Ross a large and interesting suite of specimens illustrating 
the mineral occurrences constituting and associated with the man- 
ganese ore of McCormick, S. C. Many of these consisted of stalac- 

titic psilomelane in varied botryoidal and coralloidal shapes, on the 


1Slavic, Fr., Bul. Ac. Sc. Boheme 1905, fig. 7 and 8. 


NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Black Cape 


H.PW. del. 7. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR 1917 163 


surface and in the interstices of which occurred barite crystals of 
several generations and types. These have been judged of sufficient 
interest to warrant a short description. 

Type 1. Crystals of this type are the largest as well as the simplest 
of those under consideration. They average ro mm in length, measured 
on the a axis, and are tabular prisms bounded by the planes of 
¢ (oor) and m (110) in relative habit-development of about 8:1. 
The crystals are sharply defined, transparent and show parallel 
bands of inclusions which, although following in the main the outlines 
of the prism m, also parallel the macrodome d (102) and the prism 
i (210), forms absent from this type although occurring in well- 
developed habit on the crystals of type 2. This evidence would 
suggest that the type under present consideration represents a later 
generation of barite formed around preexisting crystals, possibly of 
type 2. Figure 5 illustrates this type. 

Type 2. A large proportion of the barite crystals occurring 
implanted on the botryoidal masses of psilomelane are representative 
of this type. They are of prismatic habit, thicker parallel to the 
¢ axis than those of type 1, and have for the dominant prisms 4 (210) 
and m (110), the former in rather larger development, giving to the 
crystals a thin, pointed aspect. The planes are roughened by etch 
pits, but give sufficiently good reflections to admit of their being 
easily identified, and in general the type seems to represent an early 
stage of barite deposition. The observed forms are: 

c¢ (oor), a (100), b (010), A (210), m (110), X (130), 

ON(onm) a (co2)), 2 (rer): 

Figure 6 represents the habit of this type. 

Type 3. Crystals representative of this type are of a later gene- 
ration than those of the two preceding, and are probably the result 
of solution. and recrystallization from individuals of a previous 
genetic phase. In habit they resemble the crystals of type 2, but 
are more transparent than these latter and are also characterized by 
smoother and more highly reflective faces, characteristics which 
argue in favor of a slow process of crystallization under more or less 
ideal conditions. The observed forms are: 

Goo) BD (onohnc (Gow)! 2a(sto). % (aro), 1 (320), 

m (110), N (230), F (380)*, B (370), X (130), @ (102), 

Ay (13), o (err), 2 1), f (223), g (124); 0 (105), As (235).” 

The forms marked with an asterisk (*) are new. 

x3 (sto). This new prism was observed twice on crystal [/ and 
once each on crystals V and VI of the series measured. The reflec- 

6 


164 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


tions were given by extremely narrow faces and the images of the - 
signal although distinct were very weak. The average of the four 
readings which identified the form is as follows: 


Letter Symbol Measured | Calculated 


TO REE HSE ees Gitta GS cyt A An aE Q10:510 Oma 80° 44’ 


F (380). This new prism was observed on only one of the series 
of crystals measured. The reading from a narrow but sharply 
defined plane gave: 


Letter Symbol Measured | Calculated 


ee | sss 


BTA at CEO MAR rap a Set CO arr are aeind pee dil eh“ 010:380 2a wad Dee AoY 


As (215). This new pyramid was observed on one crystal of the 
series measured. The observed plane, although. small, was sharp and 
well defined, yielding measurements in two zones, which admit of 
.ts identification by zone equations as well as by the measured angles. 
[t was identified by the following observations: 


Zone Angle Measured | Calculated 
LOOTTO2 iii eee eas ace aa eee ar 2: OIT:215 47° 45’ Anu 
LOOM: 2 TO] aa emer werteeenbe occ tale) ls ate. OOI:215 BA Sy; 24 505 


A crystal of type 3 is shown in figure 7. The same crystal which 
furnished readings on the new pyramid (215), yielded a faint and 
somewhat obscure reflection in the zone [o1r: 102] which corresponded 
to the hitherto unrecorded pyramid (5.1.11) as follows: 


Letter Measured ee 
CEP ae PEL Je cB pe GON a ect eL a Sh ek A a acy PR a 56° 56’ 55° 45/ 


The form must be considered of doubtful establishment. 


CHAMPLAIN'S ASSAULT ON THE FORTIFIED TOWN OF 
THE ONEIDAS, 1615 


BY ARTHUR C. PARKER 


In viewing Nichols pond and the region about it we behold a spot 
over which many disputes have raged and about which much has 
been written and said. Unfortunately for the historian, however, 
the written story of this ancient site is all too meager, yet the careful 
student possessed with imagination is able from the facts which are 
available to weave a romantic tale of adventure. 

Surely, there are much more thrilling episodes in our colonial 
history than the narrative of Nichols pond, and yet there are events 
connected with this spot that have drawn the attention of the 
historian to it and made it worthy of record. 

The first conflict here was that of the Iroquois for possession of 
the country; and later that of the Oneidas to reclaim a portion of 
the wilderness for their homes and farms. The next conflict was 
the attempt of Champlain and his allies to devastate the fields and 
burn the Oneida town that stood here. The third struggle was 
that of the English settlers to acquire title to the land and occupy it 
by right of treaty with the Oneidas, who were virtually forced into 
an agreement to part with their ancestral homes for a few cents 
an acre. The last conflict concerning the land abutting these shores 
is that of the historian: for it must not be supposed that when the 
centuries had obscured the written record, it was easy to determine 
that Nichols pond deserved a place in history. For how modest 
this shallow pool, now grown to swamp land, and how little to suggest 
the clamor of battle, the cry of the Huron savage and the angry 
commands of a captain of the French army! 

Parkman, who wrote so charmingly of the great war party, makes 
no attempt to tell us where Champlain and his party of Hurons 
engaged the Entonhonorons. 

O. H. Marshall, the historian of the Genesee and of colonial 
western New York, from his interpretation of the Champlain 
accounts, was confident that the scene of Champlain’s battle of 
October 10, 1615 was on the south bank of Onondaga lake, but 
Brodhead, with equal assurance, places the spot at the north end 
of the same lake near the present site of the village of Liverpool. 
Geddes, on the other hand, inclines to the opinion that the fight took 
place at Fort Saint Mary’s. 

165 | 


166 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


O’Callaghan places the scene of Champlain’s defeat somewhere 
along the shores of Canandaigua lake and several historians have 
taken his opinion as fact, for even Parkman leads us to believe, at 
least in his earlier editions, that the onslaught was made upon a 
town of the Senecas. It remained for Gen. John S. Clark of Auburn 
to identify definitely the Nichols pond as the site of Champlain’s 
battle. His reason seemed so sound to the historian with archeologi- 
cal experience, that in recent years no one has arisen to controvert 
it. Earlier, however, General Clark’s conclusion was disputed in 
lengthy articles by O. H. Marshall; but in the end Clark’s opinion 
was sustained. 

The greatest interest in determining the scene of the conflict whose . 
three hundredth anniversary has been celebrated was awakened 
during the centennial year of 1876. At that time both Marshall 
and Clark were eagerly scanning French accounts of the journey 
of Champlain and the military maps preserved in Paris. Hearing 
of Clark’s conclusion, Marshall wrote a masterly article in the 
virile, fascinating style which so characterized his productions. 
This article appeared in volume 1, no. 1 of the “‘ Magazine of Ameri- 
can History ”’ and asits initial article. Throughout the first volume 
there are replies and counter-replies and even a careful translation 
of Champlain's journal!) .’ 

The years have passed by and these painstaking students of half- 
obscured pages printed in the quaint type and phraseology of the 
seventeenth century French, have passed into the great beyond 
and we today pause to consider the subject that so engrossed their 
attention. 

The cautious business man as well as the analytic student of 
human events has a right to inquire as to the justice of devoting any 
special attention to the story of Champlain’s march in the wilderness 
at the head of the half thousand revengeful, disorderly savages and 
their defeat in this sequestered hilltop region of the present Madison 
county. What are the facts of the case and of what special signifi- 
cance it is, are natural inquiries. 

Our subject leads us back to the time in the history of our continent 
when the French were the dominant European power. For, long 
before the days of Jamestown or Plymouth, Jacques Cartier had 
penetrated the St Lawrence and found the Huron village of Hochelaga. 
And from that time onward the hardy Briton and Norman fishermen 
had brought back tales of mystery and adventure from the fishing 
banks and coasts of the new world, These stories without doubt 


“punoi3yo"q oy} UI puod oy} sMoYs pur ‘suULIPUT BplsUG 94 jo Sortysnpur oyy sjordep dnors sty, *WNasnyy o4v1S 9Y} UI SolJoS ay} ul Sdno1s ayy Jo suo 


qnessy s,urejdureyd jo 941g 9yy ‘puod spoyoiN 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 167 


reached the ears of young Samuel Champlain and slumbered in the 
mind of this venturesome Frenchman. Champlain was born in a 
little village on the Bay of Biscay and his blood was tempered with 
the love of the sea. Master of the mariner’s art, he entered the 
services of the King of France fighting so well as captain of the royal 
navy that when that eventful war was closed Champlain received 
decorations of honor and Henry IV granted him a comfortable life 
pension. 

The tales of the golden cities and of the wonderful empire of the 
Montezumas in the land of Mexico across the sea strongly appealed 
to Champlain’s imagination and love of adventure. He was able to 
secure passage in a mercantile capacity to the West Indies, and later 
during his trip visited Vera Cruz and traveled inland to the city of 
Mexico. Later he coasted down to the isthmus, where, like Balboa, 
he paused in wonder at this narrow dividing strip between the 
Atlantic and Pacific, but unlike Balboa he was not elated with this 
narrow continental bridge. Champlain’s imagination went farther 
and visioned the plans for a great ship canal that should divide the 
continents and shorten the route to Cathay. 

Returning to France Champlain became attached to the staff of 
DeChaste, who had received an American land patent from the 
king of France. This land never having been seen or owned by the 
king was easy to give away. Champlain thus became wedded to 
the new world. | 

After varied adventures on land and sea, Samuel Champlain, born 
of the sea, mariner and captain of the royal navy, became an explorer 
of the continental new world. He was to plant the banner of France 
in the valleys and upon the hilltops of Acadia, bring respect and 
dominion to the crown of France, secure profitable trade for the 
merchants and fur dealers of his country and “ Do all things for 
the glory of God and the good of the church.”’ 

Champlain made friends with the Algonguins and Hurons, among 
whom he mingled with intimacy and privilege. Using all measures 
of diplomacy, he extolled the strength of France, the magnificence 
of her king and courts and craftily suggested to the Hurons the 
advantage of supporting the emissaries of his king. Champlain 
early in his experiences in the:St Lawrence basin had learned the 
prowess of the: Five Iroquois Nations and of the hatred that the 
Hurons and Algonquins bore toward the Maquas and Ossinikas. 
Indeed Champlain saw in these people living on the south shores of 
Lake Ontario and the St Lawrence a formidable impediment to the 


168 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


success of his plans. After discussing the matter with many wander- 
ing bands that traversed Canada from Quebec to Lake Simcoe, he 
found his .opinion confirmed; the Iroquois were foes to be reckoned 
with; Huron and Algonquin alike dreaded them and the power of 
their arms. Ele therefore conceived the plan!) of uniting \Canaeram 
tribes in a military alliance to be under the direction of the French, 
with himself as the supreme dictator. Thus it was that, when in 
1608 a young Ottawa chief implored Champlain to bring his men 
together and lead the Ottawas and Hurons with their allies down 
the south trail from Montreal and attack the Maquas in their 
stronghold, he resolved to make the attempt. In the following 
year after having waited for the Ottawas to appear, Champlain 
mustered a chosen troop of musketeers and led a band of Montagnais 
down the south trail and over the waters of Lac Saint Sacrament 
which later became known as Lake George. There in the vicinity 
of Ticonderoga he encountered a squadron of Iroquois canoes. 
Champlain’s Indians raised the cry of battle, the Iroquois withdrew 
to the land, and the battle famous in history took place. Iroquois 
flesh for the first time had been torn by the leaden teeth of the French 
“thunder poles.’’ Champlain returned a hero in the eyes of his 
savage horde. With his magic weapons he had forced the Iroquois 
retreat. Algonquin scalping knives had lifted Iroquois scalps! The 
fame of this adventure brought great credit to Champlain and the 
fact that the Iroquois could be defeated when Champlain led the 
host against them was heralded throughout lower Canada. ‘The 
Hurons and Algonquins hailed Champlain as a deliverer and both 
French and Indians believed they saw the vanquishment of the 
Iroquois in sight. The plan for uniting every enemy of the Five 
Iroquois Nations was again discussed. 

A thousand warriors promised to follow Champlain in another 
expedition, “By rors both French and Huron, yoadediiayaaume 
revengeful attacks of Iroquois bands, resolved to strike the 
crushing blow upon the Iroquois by swooping down upon _ their 
capital city, killing its inhabitants and devastating its surround- 
ing fields. By the first of September 1615, five hundred eager 
Hurons bedecked for the fray set out for Caihague, the capital 
town of the Hurons, situated somewhere on Simcoe’s shore. Cham- 
plain had a selected company of arquebusers and every savage had 
a full supply of clubs, spears and arrows. The great war party that 
was to humble the Iroquois to the dust and by their deeds make 
Champlain’s name blaze with new magnitude was on its way. 


REPORT TOR Ee, DIRECTOR 1O17. 169 


Down the river Trent they traveled rejoicing over the victory they 
thought already won. Champlain in his journal describes the beau- 
tiful scenery en route and says that though the land was devoid of 
habitation the trees and shrubs along its banks appeared to have been 
planted by human hands. He vaguely hints to the mind of the 
archeologist of a mysterious people who lived before the Hurons 
came. Champlain particularly describes the majestic pines and the 
chestnuts. After a journey, with no greater excitement than that 
of a Frenchman shooting a Huron by mistake for a deer, the expe- 
dition reached Lake Ontario. With their bark flotilla they crossed 
the entrance of the St Lawrence and skirted the east shore of the 
lake, paddling from island to island and disembarking at length at 
Hungry bay where they hid their canoes. They were greatly con- 
cerned lest the enemy discover them and puncture their bottoms, 
and so made a very cautious concealment. 

With the release from the arduous task of paddling we can imagine 
the elation of the Hurons upon treading the sandy beach that formed 
part of the Iroquois fishing domain. We may picture the ceremonies, 
the repair of accoutrements, the repainting of face and body, the 
propitiation of the okis, and the invocations of the medicine bundles. 
Then again the march. 

Champlain records that he journeyed along the sandy shore for 
ten or twelve miles, crossing several rivers and brooks. By his 
description we know he must have crossed the mouth of the Salmon 
river, and the Big and Little Sandy in the present Jefferson county. 
Then striking inland the party crossed the mouth of the Seneca 
river, closely skirting Oneida lake. After a journey of four days 
they saw traces of the enemy. The Huron scouts found four women, 
three men, three boys and a girl, surrounded them and triumphantly 
made them prisoners. The Huron blood was stirred. Asa beginning 
of their onslaught they cut off a finger of one of the women whereupon 
Champlain roundly upraided the varlet both for his inhumanity and 
lack of chivalry, whereupon the Huron replied that this was the 
custom and that the Iroquois certainly would have done the same. 
Champlain forcibly scolded the culprit, again laying particular 
emphasis that defenseless and tearful women ought to have better 
treatment from a noble warrior. Unabashed, the Huron answered 
' that since Champlain was so much concerned about the ladies he 
would desist for his sake from any further indignities to them, but 
he would not guarantee what he would or would not do if he laid 
hands on a male prisoner. Champlain records no remonstrance but 


170 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


no doubt it consisted of an expressive shrug and a mental ejaculation 
that there was no teaching of manners to a Huron. 

The next day the party began to pass through outlying fields of 
the enemy. Their march had carried them inland‘and upward into 
the hilly country. Champlain knew the enemy only by the name of 
Entonhonorons and it is not likely that he knew the tribal identity 
of the Indians he was about to attack. If he had ‘hoped to strike 
the Onondagas he had failed to turn his route far enough to the west, 
for he was now running directly into the dominion of the Oneidas. 

On the roth of October the Hurons found the village fields of the 
enemy mature with their harvests of corn, squashes and beans. 
They quickly saw the company of harvesters and then raised their 
battle cry. This annoyed Champlain, who writes that he had not 
intended to discover himself immediately. His intent was to locate 
the town and then draw up his forces for an orderly attack; but the 
Hurons having given the alarm discharged their arrows into the 
company of harvesters, whereupon the enemy’s archers rushed forth 
and covered the retreat of their women, putting six snore: hors de 
combat the while. 

In the distance Champlain saw the enemy’s stockade and his 
quick discerning eye noted its great superiority over the fortified 
Huron towns which he had so much admired. The enemy had 
reached their gates and closed them and Champlain, following his 
onrushing troops, endeavored to direct the fight which they had so 
impetuously precipitated. The Hurons were confident and over- 
-eager. At any moment they expected reinforcements of 500 men. 
With showers of flint tipped arrows they assailed the fortress but 
were unable closely to approach it, because of the ardor and efficiency 
of its defenders. Champlain yelled himself hoarse trying to bring 
about a systematic attack, but failed to produce any apparent effect 
upon the frenzied Hurons. They shouted, screamed and whooped 
with all their hideous genius and Champlain’s commands in this 
bedlam were but acroaking whisper. Nevertheless he writes that he 
shouted orders until he thought his throat would crack. He was 
disgusted and angered at his hare-brained allies. They tried to set 
fire to the fort, he writes, but placed the flaming fagots 6n the 
leeward side and all the brush wood brought by the bold Hurons and 
thrown upon the fire was unavailing, for the enemy merely poured 
down water from troughs specially designed for flooding the stockade. 

Champlain soon designed, according to his journal, a, movable 
fighting top with tall legs that would lift to a height overlooking the 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9QI7 17a 


stockade. In this contrivance he stationed several Frenchmen with 
blunderbusses, shielding them by an arrow-proof front. Two hundred 
Indians carried this fort on stilts to a convenient place. Then the 
French gunners opened fire, so discomforting the enemy that success 
would have been with the invading party if it had been possible to 
enter the fort. 

After three hours of this blundering warfare the Hurons withdrew 
with their dead and wounded. Champlain, crippled by an arrow 
wound in the knee and one in the leg, was borne off to the camp 
tormented by the agony that the enemy’s arrows had inflicted. 
The Hurons continued their frenzied whooping, momentarily expect- 
ing the arrival of reinforcements, but these failing to come the Hurons 
became disheartened and would not renew the attack. They 
immediately began to care for their seventeen wounded comrades 
and build the basket litters in which they were to be carried back 
on the homeward trail. Champlain reports how he was woven into 
a basket frame and trussed so securely he could not move. His 
agony was excruciating and in his quaint French he exclaims: “ Oh, 
it was Hell!” 

The attacking party waited a week, hoping for new forces or the 
surrender of the enemy. They could scarcely believe that Cham- 
plain’s magic had failed. They blamed him scornfully for the lack 
of success, not knowing, says Champlain, that it was their own 


stupidity. 
On October 18th there was a severe snow storm. The great war 
party’s luck seemed to be frost.- “‘ The party began its retreat, and 


this was one thing,’ Champlain says, ‘‘ the Hurons knew how to do 
admirably.” The company formed into a hollow square with 
strong young men in the lead and in the rear, and with the weak 
and wounded in the center. , 

When the Iroquois found the invading force had withdrawn and 
was on the march they sallied forth from their fort and for a time 
inflicted considerable annoyance. They were afraid of the French- 
men’s guns, which alone prevented the Iroquois from massing an 
attack upon the retreating party. They were bitter in their thoughts 
and invited the Hurons to fight them alone next time without French 
aid. Likewise they called out to the French, advising them not to 
interfere in their intertribal wars. | 

The party continued their journey with great apprehension; they 
feared their canoes had been destroyed, but upon reaching Hungry 
bay they rejoiced to find their birchen transports safe and intact. 


[72 NEW? VORKS TALE MUSE UIE 


The disorganized band, with their means of escape secure, began 
to plan to scatter for the fall hunt”) @he ehiets could) nourconuel 
their men nor could any be induced to escort Champlain to Quebec. 
The glory of the hero with a charmed life, with armor and with 
“thunder poles’’ was gone. No longer did his magic inspire the 
Huron. Failing to induce an escort, Champlain was placed in a 
perplexing position, but Durontal, a Huron chief, came to the relief 
by offering the shelter of his well-stocked cabin, which Champlain 
accepted. 

The war party scattered and the magnitude of the star of hope 
in luster diminished. Instead of the beginning of the downfall of 
the Iroquois, this fight was the beginning of their domination. Year 
by year they were to increase in military power and in influence; 
Champlain’s attempts to crush them not only failed but began the 
irritation that finally led to the burning of every French settlement 
from Mackinac to the mouth of the St Lawrence. Eventually the 
Iroquois, as allies of the English, broke the power of the French, 
destroyed the dreams of a new France, cut off the scattered detach- 
ments of the French and by their vigor saved this region for settle- 
ment by an English-speaking people. 

And the Oneidas? Faithful always to the defense of a righteous 
cause, they not only fought the French but when Wnelamd@inad 
extended her sovereignty over the colonies they perceived her injust- 
ness and united with the patriot fathers in the Revolution as loyal 
Americans. In the war of 1812 nearly every able-bodied Oneida 
fought, and so inflamed by patriotism were they that more than 
20 Oneida women shouldered muskets and fought Britishers along 
the Niagara frontier. These men and women, let us remember, 
were descendants of the very people who 200 years before had 
defended their stockaded town at Nichols pond. 

At Nichols pond we behold the spot from which history grew; 
here we see one of the famous Oneida stones, here we behold where 
Champlain stood dreaming of the glory of France and here before 
us is the spot where a blaze was kindled that became a light in the 
heart shrine of every Oneida. ‘This flame kindled the resolve that 
right, justice and patriotism should triumph. Here we learn a 
lesson of how these things did triumph because a people were pre- 
pared by force of arms to resist unjust invasion. 

When we learn of the success of the Oneidas today, in New York 
and Ontario, and especially in Wisconsin, where all are citizens and 
mostly brilliant, capable men and women, when we learn of their 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 7/2 


participation in the wars of defense not only of their country but 
ours, we may well offer our gratitude. But after our huzzas have 
ended let us soberly remember that that nation endures that is able 
to resist force by force, and that no soft-spoken diplomacy on the 
part of the Oneidas would have saved their town and stockade. 

Even the disorganized Hurons might have turned the tide of 
history and changed the entire complexion of subsequent events. 
Hurons might have occupied this region and invited their Algonquin 
allies to dwell with them; the banner of France might have waved 
from a citadel in central New York. But because the Oneidas resisted 
successfully, the Iroquois took on new courage, and history tells us 
of Champlain’s death in the forest, of the annihilation of the Huron 
nation, of the downfall of France in the New World. In all these 
momentous events the fight at Nichols pond had a primary influence. 
It is well that we pause to remember this critical small event in the 
formative period of our country. 


ON THE GENETIC SIGNIFICANCE OF FERROUS SILICATE 
ASSOCIATED WITH THE CLINTON IRON ORES 


BY C. H. SMYTH, JR 


In earlier papers dealing with the Clinton iron ores, the writer! has 
called attention to the occurrence of small quantities of gray and 
green odlites, intimately associated with the ores but more or less 
clearly characterized by their peculiar colors. 

The paper last cited refers briefly to the possible bearing of these 
odlites upon the problem of the genesis of the ores and, in this con- 
nection, mention is made of similar occurrences in association with 
other ores that seem to be of the same general type. 

The present paper is a further discussion of this phase of the ore 
problem and is therefore largely confined to certain features shown 
chiefly by the gray and green odlites and to a less extent only by the 
ordinary ores. 

In this connection, particular interest attaches to a dark gray, 
nearly black, odlite which is well shown at the upper end of a ravine 
on the Burns farm, about one-half of a mile east of the Borst mines 
(the only mines now in operation) at Clinton, N. Y., at a point 
where a small stream flows through some abandoned surface work- 
ings. The ore has been removed but the underlying shales and 
thin sandstones show in a section about 15 feet in thickness. The 
gray oolite forms a bed 1 to 2 inches thick, lying about a foot below 
the ore horizon and separated from it by a dense, tough, arenaceous 
shale. The odlite layer is made up of nearly, or quite, discontin- 
uous lenses, the upper surface being marked by convexities measured, 
vertically, by the thickness of the bed and, horizontally, by a foot 
or thereabouts, while the lower surface is approximately plane. 
The shales above and below the odlite cling tenaciously to it when 
specimens are broken out. 

The general appearance of the odlite ae be that of a low- 
grade Clinton odlitic ore, were it not for the difference in color, the 
spherules being dark gray to black, instead of red, and dominating 
the color of the rock as a whole. There is, however, a subsidiary 


1QOn the Clinton Iron Ore: Am. Jour. Sci. (3) 43, p. 487-96, 1892. 
Die Hamatite von Clinton in den éstlichen Vereinigten Staaten: Zeits. prakt. 
Geol., Jahrgang 1894, p. 304-13, 1894. 
The Clinton Type of Iron Ore Deposits: Types of Ore Deposits. H. F. Bain 
et al. p. 33-51, 191. 
[175] 


17A®) NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


reddish tinge which is due to the presence of some finely divided 
hematite scattered through the cement. ‘There is a relatively large 
amount of pyrite present, together with rather well-rounded grains 
of quartz. 

A noticeable feature of the occurrence, indicating the conditions 
under which deposition took place, is the presence of the gray spher- 
ules in the filling of mudcracks in the underlying shale. It is quite 
clear that, whatever their subsequent history, these spherules were 
formed, as such, when the odlitic layer was deposited upon the 
cracked surface of the underlying muds—obviously under very 
shallow water conditions. 

In thin section the odlite shows pale grayish green spherules, 
each one composed of many concentric shells inclosing, usually, a 
well-rounded grain of quartz (plate 1, figures 1 and 2).1_ This green 
mineral shows the cross of aggregate polarization and, in general, 
behaves like chamosite, to which species it was provisionally assigned 
in the paper last referred to.? 

While spherules are often isolated, they more commonly coalesce 
to some extent, different nuclei having the outer layers of their 
shells in common (plate 2, figures 1 and 2), and it seems clear that, 
while the deposition of the shells began during the free movement 
of the nuclei, the process was completed only after the latter had 
come to rest. Moreover, the frequent bent and twisted shape of 
the shells strongly suggests a somewhat soft, jellylike condition 
during their formation (plate 3, figures 1 and 2). | 

In addition to the spherules, the sections contain a good deal 
of fine, angular quartz, rhombohedra of a carbonate, and irregular 
grains of pyrite. A few fossil fragments are present, in part cal- 
careous and, in part, silicified, while frequent pale-brown, isotropic 
fragments, occurring scattered at random through the rock, or 
sometimes as nuclei of spherules, are unquestionably of the same 
nature as those occurring in the Wabana, N. F., ores, shown by 
Hayes® to be derived from lingulae and, probably, to be the source 
of the phosphorus of the ores. It may be added that the gray odlite 
under consideration has many features in common with certain 
varieties of the Wabana deposits, which have been described in 
detail by Doctor Hayes in the paper cited. 


1For the accompanying photomicrographs, the writer is indebted to the © 
kindness of Mr W. E. Cockfield, fellow in geology in Princeton University. 

2 Types of Ore Deposits, p. 48. 

3 Hayes, A. O., Wabana Iron Ore of Newfoundland: Memoir 78, Geol. Survey 
of Canada, p. 40 and 57, I9QI15. 


Plate 1 


ite, with 
1ameters 


Magnified 30 di 


lated spherules of chamos 


f quartz 


1SO 
10 


ing 


te, showi 
tructure and nucle 


ics 


Gray odli 


concentr 


Figure I 


1C 


1c concentr 


t 
fied 93 diameters 


1S 


. 


Magni 


the character 


ing 


te showt 


Spherule of chamosi 


2 
structure and core of rounded quartz. 


Figure 


Plate 2 


yi 


oy 
GY TLUS ey 


safes 


Gray odlite, showing both isolated and coalescent spherules of 
Magnified 


Figure I 
chamosite, with marked concentric structure and quartz nuciei. 


30 diameters 


Figure 2 Gray odlite made up largely of coalescent spherules of chamosite. 
Magnified 30 diameters 


ified 


Magn 


ite 


torted spherules of chamos 


30 diameters 


ith dis 


tew 


i 


Gray o6l 


Figure 1 


Magnified 


te. 


i 


chamos 


ed spherules of 
30 diameters 


te with distort 


1 


Gray o6l 


Figure 2 


ney 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 17, 


The chemical composition of the gray odlite is shown by analyses 
rt and 2, for which, as well as for the remaining analyses, the writer 
is indebted to the skill of Prof. E. W. Morley. 

The residtie left from digestion in hydrochloric acid contained 
much gelatinous silica which was subsequently dissolved in sodium 
hydroxide, affording most of the soluble silica shown by the analyses. 


I 2 

Sol. Insol. Sol. Insol. 
SiOz. 9.20 ZAG2 Ti 10.45 28.81 
Al:O3;3 oF il 0.39 10.03 0.62 
Fe.0; 70 ah TET 0.83 I.40 
BO) 2 ee ale DAs ate kt ecard 5 Cee ae 16.00 .0O 18.41 .00 
MgO 6.18 0.06 5.60 0.07 
CaO 9.25 0.12 7.65 mele) 
Na.O 0.06 0.03 0.23 Onng 
Keo". . 0.07 0.09 0.14 0.09 
H20+ 4.41 ae BAS ht de, eee 
H.O— OCs) | eee iy eee Onr2 
CO> F2202 .0O SSeS 3) lt eae eee 
Anos. 0.05 0.15 OF O07 Ole d7/ 
POs. 02 .0O 1.42 00 
DGGE 00 2.58 ile 1.05 
MnO. 0.29 - .00 0.30 0O 
IEE) aS eo Se i ee eee er 0.00 OO 215) eee 
orO. ONONales Baeie OLOO" Sask ae 

68 .69 Bula 67 .33 32.34 
IL GSS: (OS pe ie a ea Se Le 0.64 eft Wie Ce ales a ee 

68.05 

100.43 99 .67 

SiOa sole Misth Crs ee ak Ceca ee ORD Slt the. ne oetee ©). Sin See es 


1 Chamosite odlite, Burns farm, Clinton, N. Y. Princeton Catalog, no. 6070. 
E. W. Morley, analyst 
2 Chamosite odlite, Burns farm, Clinton, N. Y. Princeton Catalog, no. 6108. 
E. W. Morley, analyst. = 


The large amount of insoluble material is what would be antici- 
pated from a comparison of the gray odlite with the ordinary odlitic 
iron ore, and its composition is also what would be expected — 
essentially quartz, of detrital origin, and pyrite, formed 7 sztu. 

It is, however, the soluble portion which is of chief present interest 


178 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


and here, again, in spite of the somewhat heterogeneous nature of 
the material analysed, the results are what had been anticipated. 

A proper interpretation of these results involves a simple recalcula- 
tion, the phosphorous being treated as Ca3(POu.)e, the calcium 
and magnesium as carbonates, and the ferric oxide as disseminated 
hematite. S102, AloO3, FeO, remaining MgO and the H.O’are then 
recalculated to too per cent, giving the results shown in 1a and 2a 
below. 


Ia 20% 
(38.84%)|(44-41%)| % | 4 2 : i 2 ° 
SHO A Ne 4 23.68 22053) 25.19) 22).28| 25/23) 21-35) 20440lmaor 25 oe 
IMNAD a. 4 3) 21220 22 ASO etn 7/1125 A0|O) O71 oleae One eae 76 8.92 
Bes Oe a ae eee ae Lee eee nts OxOG| ayes Tt 571) 23052 sae 24.40 
eOneer: AN 21 AI .46 AI. 45 327.41) 37.51| 36.81) 36.02) ieee eee 
IMBEKO) So 5c 2 By AO6| Hi sAO|e 52) 12) Aol) OO) mene 25 G7) esas 
CAO oes ioret ce rears te lohan sts Hein te (NMOS alls acre Tall Lue aorta an ee 57| r.26 
Na.O. BeAr 98] 0.25 
K.0.. ee 9.54) 4.21 
Sd Tea 7.77\ 12.13| 10:25] 12:90} 8.78] 0.07) 4oaleeamae 
IN Litt ©) ee capt oe aS ae cea ah On2i tr 


100.00 100 .00!T00O .00|1TO0 .O0;TOO .OO;100.T 1/100 .00}/100.35)100.23 


1a Chamosite of gray odlite, Burns farm, Clinton, N. Y. Princeton Catalog, 
no. 6070. E. W. Morley, analyst. 

2a Chamosite of gray odlite, Burns farm, Clinton, N. Y. Princeton Catalog, 
no. 6108. E. W. Morley, analyst. 

3 Chamosite, Schmiedefeld. Mean of two analyses recalculated to 100. 

Zalinski, Neues jabra i) Ming ete: Bab. De pn 77 oor 

4 Chamosite, Wabana, a 1B Recalculated to 100. Hayes, Memoir 78, Geol. 
Survey of Canada, p. 59, 1915. 

5 Chamosite, Windgallen. Recalculated to 100. C. Schmidt, quoted by 
Zalinski, Op. cit., p. 78. | 

6 Thuringite, Gebersreuth. Zannski@psicit i oiae 

7 Greenalite, Mesabi. Anal. by Steiger, recalculated to 100. Leith, C. K., 
The Mesabi Iron Bearing District, Mon. 43, U. S. Geol. Survey, p. 246, 1903. 

8 Glauconite, Padi, Russia. K. Glinka, Zeits. Kryst. Min. XXX, p. 390, 
1899. 

g Glauconite, Station 164B, Challenger Expedition. Thomson, C. W. & 
Murray, J. Report of Challenger Expedition, Deep-Sea Deposits, p. 387, 1891. 


In view of the variable character of the rock analysed and the 
large amount of material calculated out, these figures, in spite 
of some lack of agreement, are in sufficient accord to justify 
conclusions as to the nature of the mineral composing the shells of 
the spherules, and it is, evidently, a hydrated, ferrous aluminous 
silicate. Both its composition and its physical properties show that 
the mineral is a member of the rather indefinite group of chlorites, 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9Q17 179 


such as cronstedite, thuringite, delessite, and its closest affinity seems 
‘to be with the chamosite variety of thuringite — that is, the variety 
rich in ferrous iron and poor in ferric iron. 

Zalinski,! with much reason, regards chamosite as a distinct 
species, but whether or not this conclusion is finally accepted 
is unimportant in the present connection. His analyses, shown 
averaged and recalculated to 100 in no. 3, were made on carefully 
separated material and with a purely mineralogical end in view, 
while Doctor Morley’s analyses were made to show the nature of 
the rock as a whole, as well as that of the particular mineral in ques- 
tion, and considerable lack of agreement is inevitable. 

But, in view of this essential difference in the nature of the data, 
as well as the peculiar and variable character of the minerals con- 
cerned, the divergence of results is no more than would be expected. 
As a matter of fact, the results of the present analyses agree better 
with Zalinski’s analyses of chamosite than do the latter with most 
analyses of thuringite (illustrated by no. 6) of which mineral chamo- 
site is generally considered a variety. 

From the analytical results given above, Zalinski derives the 
formula H,(FeMg)3AlsSi2O1;, while for thuringite, he derives the 
formula Hys(FeMg)s(AlFe)sSisO4:. 

The ferrous silicate 1a gives the following molecular equivalents, 
Al.O; being taken as 1 in the second column: 


Sil Me en ees einen irate) ks ei Eo A ok Wirelelist ie apres akecibe .439 1.87 
PNT OR Ne Te se) wads CON cs Mee wndomy Sma AS jen aKa eel So! 0 M2371 1.00 
steal esa a ieee eee 
TREO} inc RR ah RO ea STA Mele egNE NE aa rr an ST te te .705 3.00 


While the silica ratio is low, the evidence points toward the same 
formula as that obtained by Zalinsk1. 
In the case of the ferrous silicate 2a, the corresponding figures are: 


STO eee ce nae aN lik NN Gee, ORIN ated rab apamestct ai tayi aN ler iep 2) 9 othe ia .416 ite vl 
PARI @ eee ateni, cea earn he oitel sed SCR MM cect Mas eich iatan' i,t a. 225; 1.00 
Pe ae er aan) -738 etsy 
JEU AG) iat Ae oes eet ange DEAS AA Ce ie pL Ae NB Aes ae eee ce eu . 460 1.95 


The ratios here are even less satisfactory than in the preceding 
case, but, so far as they may be trusted, they indicate the same form- 
ula, with one less molecule of water, or H,(FeMg)3S12O 12. 


1 Zalinski, E. R., Untersuchungen ttber Thuringit u. Chamosit aus Thtiringen u. 
Umgebung: Neues Jahrb. f. Min. etc., B. B. Dex pa dO, 845 lOOd: 


180 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


It is obvious that the data in hand are quite insufficient to estab- 
lish the precise formula of the mineral or minerals involved, but 
they indicate very clearly the general nature and mineralogical 
associations of the compounds. The data necessary for the precise 
determination of the silicate formula could be obtained only by 
analysing carefully separated samples, and the nature of the 
material is such as to make separation by heavy solutions an 
exceedingly arduous task. 

In the foregoing recalculations of analyses 1 and 2, to determine 
the composition of the ferrous silicate, 1t was assumed that all the 
CO. present was combined with calcium and magnesium. As a 
matter of fact, this is doubtless not the case for, almost without 
question, some CO» is combined with iron, thus reducing the amount 
of iron and increasing the amount of magnesium in the silicate. 

The limit in this direction is obtained by calculating all the CO2 
left from calcium carbonate to iron carbonate and including all the 
magnesium in the silicate. 

The results of such calculation are shown in 1b and 2b as follows: 


1b 26 
Si@aC Miwa ericia ee Vat Gr Ri Can ie ana nd eae eee 26.49 25.09 
TEMS OE Age ne Et Mee RR NIDA genet ARMREST Nea ae csi et, 23.93 24.08 
FO Scere thy cate on ah es a OB WR DN Sign Oe SFR akg AB MRO Ey MUON Rees eg 19.09 2G ait 
A Gad a oN Te Ne ey an bane Na ter her LMU MAEM Ape eters Ae Mace yf 7/8) 12a 
1 Oar ALB ed car DAMIR E Ly tern NAME Nel len meu pA. G'S 1270 8.28 


100.00 100.00 


While the figures depart considerably from those of ta and 2a, 
the replacement of FeO by an equivalent amount of MgO does not, 
of course, change the essential composition of the mineral as expressed 
by a formula. The true composition is doubtless somewhere 
between the extremes represented, respectively, in ra and rb and 
2a and 2b. 

Thus there appears to be sufficient evidence for classing the ferrous 
silicate of the gray odlite as chamosite, at least if the name be used ~ 
in the rather general sense given to it by Lacroix! and many others, 
even if not in the more exact sense assigned to it by Zalinski.? 

It is evident that the silica in the above analyses is of two sources — 
clastic and chemical — being, in part, detrital quartz and, in part, 
precipitated from solution. The same is true for the Clinton ores, 
in general, but in the ores, as contrasted with the gray odlite, by 
far the larger part of the silica is of the former origin. 


1 Lacroix, A., Mineralogie de la France I, p. 397, 1893-95. 
2 Talinski Wy. Wocw ett: 


Figure 1 Green odlite resulting from the alteration of odlitic ore. 
centric structure evident. Magnified 30 diameters 


Figure 2 Green odlite resulting from alteration of odlitic ore. Concentric 
structure evident. Magnified 30 diameters 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9Q17 181 


A further fact made clear by the analyses is the small amount of 
potassium in the odlite. This is a matter of interest in its bearing 
upon hypotheses, to be treated later, which explain the Clinton ores, 
and others more or less similar, as resulting from the alteration of 
glauconite. _In this connection, too, it may be noted that while 
the silicate of the gray odlite is ferrous, glauconite is essentially a 
ferric silicate. | 

By way of comparison, analyses of other minerals are given which 
are related to chamosite either mineralogically or in manner of 
occurrence, as well as, possibly, of origin. Further reference will 
be made to these in the sequel. 

A second variety of odlite, differing markedly in appearance from 
that just described, occurs somewhat frequently in small amounts, 
not as a separate bed, as is the case with the gray odlite, but scat- 
tered irregularly through the ore itself, and differing from it chiefly in 
being of a pale grayish green color instead of red (plate 4, figures 1 
and 2). The relation of this green odlite to the ore clearly shows the 
former to be merely a secondary modification of the latter. avine 
two varieties pass into each other by imperceptible gradations and 
it sometimes happens that, when the ore is traversed by a joint or 
irregular crack, the original red color has given place to green, 
obviously as the result of the action of solutions passing through 
the opening. Indeed, it is quite evident that this green odlite 1s 
strictly analogous to the green spots and bands so commonly 
developed in red formations by circulating solutions. 

Samples for analysis, representing the green odlite and the red ore 
from which it is derived, were taken from a single large specimen 
of the ore, shading gradually into the green odlite at one end. 

The results are shown below, analysis 9 being the green oodlite 
and 1o the ore. 

Recalculation of the analyses of the soluble portions, by the same 
method that was used for the dark-gray odlite, gives, for no. 9, a 
total of 37.23 per cent of ferrous silicate, whose composition is shown 
- in oa, and, for no. 10, a total of 22.07 per cent of ferrous silicate, 
whose composition is shown in toa. 

These results are less trustworthy than those derived in the pre- 
ceding cases because of certain peculiar features of the materials 
analysed. The green odlite, no. 9, shows a deficiency in CO2 which 
requires the calculation of all MgO to the ferrous silicate while, on 
the other hand, the red odlite, no. 10, has a large excess of CO2 
which uses up not only all of the MgO but, in addition, a consider- 


182 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


able amount of FeO, indicating the presence of an unusual amount of 
siderite. Moreover, in the latter case, the total amount of silicate 
is small and tends to exaggerate any errors in the combinations 
assumed. 

In spite of these difficulties, however, the agreement of the ferrous 
silicate composition is fairly close, both for the two samples them- 
selves and for the preceding odlites. Allowing for errors in making 
the combinations, for the somewhat heterogeneous character of the 
rocks and, even more, for the uncertain and variable nature of the 
minerals concerned, the agreement is, on the whole, as good as could 
be expected and quite sufficient to justify the conclusion that the 
ferrous silicate of the green and the red odlites is essentially the same 
as that of the gray odlite and is, therefore, chamosite or a closely 
related mineral. 


9 (GREEN) 10 (RED) Qa . 10a 


Sol. Insol. Sol. Insol. | @7.22 9%) @2no7 7) 


S102. 9.51 8.03 5.45 S678) 25.54 24.70 
Al.Os 7.07 0.00 4.94 Ona 18.99 22,20 
Fe.0s; BRO 6.69 11.59 0.41 . a are 
FeO. ano? 0.00 29.64 0.00 a7 aaa 41.90 
MgO 2.35 Omg 1.39 0.06 6235 |. Ape 
CaOz PER OR 0.24 1,5 O513 wie dit ue 
Nae Ont ee eee Oni 0.16 Oesies || 
ON Bia anes o.15 | f 0.03 ee Reka 
H.O+ Ae Omics pecente 2 SAR Lente may in 12.03 DL Or 
Hs@e eae ORM anaes OTT PII ake sane (Ook) ee eee A hye eee 
COn SOD lie eo DD: Omens 
BiO yn eee ae 0.05 0.12 O.O1 0.01 ier. «ae eee 
P20s.. ey Ore 0.97 O).O4 4) 0 Meare 
Saree AEN BY QO heat ceo O02 | |:..0o hee rr 
INU O)S oe We ieve oh 0.56 0.00 0.94 O.12)) ss oo. al eee 
BaQ te oe eos reee OLOOP | esa 0.03 Seas ll a i or 
Sr Oke Ae COVEN T/ahl Weer eset O.05 | ueleee ea ul) [he's ose ee 
VOR 20.82 92707, 6.86 100.0 100.0 
100.53 99 .93 


9 Green oolite, Clinton, N. Y. Princeton Catalog no. 6110. E. W. Morley” 
analyst. 

10 Oolitic ore, Clinton, N. Y. Princeton Catalog no. 6111. EE. Wa eMiorley; 
analyst. 

ga Ferrous silicate of green oolite. 

10a Ferrous silicate of oolitic ore. 


Figure 1 Odliticoreshowing typical spherules, but their concentric struct- 
ure masked by the opacity of the hematite. Magnified 30 diameters 


Figure 2 Minette ore of Lorraine. The spherules are much smaller 
than those of the Clinton ore and lack the quartz cores, but have similar 
concentric structure. Magnified 57 diameters 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 183 


The molecular proportions of 9a are shown below, the second 
column being based upon Al,O; as 1 and the third on (MgFe)O 
ais: 3). 


OE Neat ery eee Gee ge ee oe Bayh .422 226 1.86 
£1190). oA SLSR RIC BUR et eae ee a iene nae ae . 186 1.00 83 
EO eis eR on eae che cta sae ers BAS 3 

MeO. \ 673 3.60 3.00 
H.O.. 668 3.60 3.00 


STC cr ae et Mee ey es hei le nn ee Sea gD .409 1.86 2.097 
PO oe) ee set en eg Reg ha, .219 TOO 1.128 
FeO.. IRE os orb Tad cee hears ge ee nC Ae 

Ree Pe aes 

TEL C) 2. eb: SoS eR ene ice DOO ee reo OO rw .610 Dh acly] 2eie 


The divergence from theoretical quantities is even greater here 
than in the preceding cases, but a rough approximation to the same 
simple ratios may be seen. 

These specimens of green and red odlite, while closely related to 
the typical odlitic ore, differ from it in certain respects, being, in a 
sense, intermediate between it and the gray odlite. Therefore, to 
carry the series farther, and to its normal limit, analyses 11 and 12 
were made, the first representing the spherules of the ordinary odlitic 
ore (plate 5, figure 1) and the second representing the irregular 
grains of the so-called fossil ore, both collected from the type deposits 
aeumton. N.Y. 

The spherules and grains were separated from the fine clastic 
material and cement in order to secure as large an amount as 
possible of the ferrous silicate, which is largely confined to the 
former. 

The low P20; shown in these analyses is, doubtless, due to the 
elimination of phosphatic lingula fragments during the separation 
of spherules and grains from cement, while the same operation has 
increased the amount of insoluble silica in no. 11 because this occurs, 
largely, as rounded quartz grains, forming the cores of spherules. 

Of this sample, 73.66 per cent is hematite, 11.61 per cent is con- 
sidered ferrous silicate, 11.91 per cent quartz, the remaining 3 per 
cent being calcite, pyrite etc. 

This composition is in sharp contrast with that of the gray odlite, 
numbers 1 and 2, with only 1.70 per cent and 0.83 per cent, respec- 
tively, of hematite, 38.84 per cent and 44.41 per cent of ferrous sili- 
cate and 24.21 per cent and 28.81 per cent of quartz. 


184 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


II I2 Ila I2a 


Sol. Insol. Sol. Insol. | (11.61%) | (14.48%) 


SiO2 3.00 it Ot 2.59 4.56 25.83 L789 
Al:O3 3.08 0.31 Uh 07) 0.18 26.52 28.80 
Fe.Q;3 73.66 0.32 41.21 O213. [Oe 
Pe OR ir ais mein Heat Ah Mee ZOO |Nienerd: 27,2328 24.86 
Mie ON sae een 0.56 0.07 6.81 0.06 4.82 10.42 
Cale vanes Gey aeuee Tor 0.08 14.55 0.05 | edie le 
Na.O 0.07 0.04 0.19 O.II 

K.0 Ovite2 0.08 0.07 OOP ier eae eae 

H.O+ 1.80 Ok: DAO ales val 15.53 18.03 
15 Ore 0.22 OLCOGI ue ane he 

COs Ain ie Ea ier ORT Mae 47 17; SOO | aha eselns ih aieeseeere 

Os Oey kurka hate On ies O22 [RON UR RE SAAS, 

PQ ig ieee eee ee 1 1g On22 0207) | .6... 008 2a 
SHER iniete yeaa iia oe Mocha’ ONO 2 TAN Sean OROBuie ee eee 

MnO.. Opeigh adore une 0.46 ee Woh. ol OS 
BAO rues i veeng ke CONE O)Z ills paca O03" Pace. Wi. Se 
SEOM a ers v ania OOD eee tL) (OF i aig| MOET Au IM ees 


87.44 2 15 94.50 56 3l fi settee 


100.19 99.81 100.00 100.00 
SiO. sol. in HCl... 0.06 0.04 


11 Spherules of oolitic ore, Clinton, N. Y. Princeton Catalog no. 6107 


E. W. Morley, analyst. 
12 Grains of fossil ore, Clinton, N. Y. Princeton Catalog no. 6109. E. W. 


Morley, analyst. 
11a Ferrous silicate of oolitic spherules. 
12a Ferrous silicate of fossil grains. 


The composition calculated for the ferrous silicate in no. 11 and 
in MO, 12,19 shown im no. ta@ and im mo, 120.) One) tovalyaaneuon 
of silicate ini the fist Case is 11/01 per cent) im’ the secon@lmenns 
Pence: 

Compared with the composition of the silicate of no. 1, there is, 
in tra, more silica, alumina and water, with very considerably less 
ferrous oxide. This might be explained by regarding part of the 
ferric oxide, all of which is treated as hematite, as being combined 
in the silicate, bringing it closer to true thuringite. But, like other 
explanations that might be suggested, this one does not admit of 
proof, nor is it indicated by the limited data at hand. Doubtless, 
the chief cause of discrepancies here, as in the other cases, lies in 
the small amount of silicate present, with consequent multiplica- 
tion of errors in making the calculation. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9QI7 185 


The really interesting point brought out by the analysis is the 
actual presence of a ferrous silicate similar to the chamosite of the 
gray oolite. Other interpretations of the analysis might be offered, 
but this one not only fits the individual case but is supported by the 
evidence of the preceding cases. 

The results from the recalculation of no. 12, shown in no. 124, 
are unsatisfactory. This is due, in part, to the fact that the deter- 
mination of CO, is only approximate and, in part, again, to the 
small amount of silicate present. But, that it actually is present, 
there can be little doubt. 

This last analysis, taken by itself, would shed little if any light 
upon the constitution of the ores, but it falls in line with the other 
analyses and, when all are considered together, while at the same 
time their geological and mineralogical relations are kept in view, 
much that is of interest appears. 

As already stated, many specimens of Clinton ore from various 
localities, have been treated with acid and in every case a residue 
of gelatinous silica, soluble in alkalies and retaining perfectly the 
form and structure of the spherules and grains, has been obtained; 
and the same thing has been noted by several observers in ores of 
similar character and of various regions and ages. 

The gray odlite, represented by analyses nos. 1 and 2, behaves in 
precisely the same manner and, in this case, the gelatinous silica is 
evidently derived from the ferrous silicate chamosite or a related 
mineral. In spite of some variation in composition, the same con- 
clusion is justified in the case of the green and red odlites, nos. 9 and 
to, the latter of which is a low-grade ore. For the two ores, nos. 
11 and 12, the evidence is not so satisfactory but suggests the 
presence of a similar silicate. 

Thus the conclusion might seem warranted that, in all cases where 
iron ores of the Clinton type leave a gelatinous residue on digestion 
with acids, this residue results from the decomposition of a ferrous 
silicate. While this may be too sweeping a conclusion, it is clear 
that a ferrous silicate is a frequent constituent of such ores and, 
when present, is the source of the gelatinous residue. 

It is evident that, if the ferrous silicate is so generally present 
in the Clinton ores, any hypothesis attempting to explain their 
genesis must take the silicate into account, as has been done in the 
case of other ores of a more or less similar character. 

Approaching the problem from the side of the silicate, the gray 
odlite, though leaving much to be determined, presents certain facts 
which seem to have a very definite bearing upon its origin. 


186 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


As already indicated, the spherules of the odlite are of simple 
composition, consisting of the silicate, alone, surrounding cores, 
usually, of rounded quartz. Obviously, this silicate must either be 
primary or derived from the alteration of an earlier mineral, 
presumably oxide or carbonate. As to the latter compound, though 
present in the cement, no evidence has been found that it has played 
an important réle in the formation of any of the odlites, either gray 
or red, similar to that which Cayeux assigns to it in the French 
ores. 

The case of hematite is, of course, entirely different, this mineral 
being the chief constituent of the spherules in the red odlite, or ore, 
and appearing in small amount in the gray odlite, though in the 
cement rather than the spherules. 

That, under certain conditions, the silicate might be derived 
from the oxide, there can be no doubt but on geological grounds 
such derivation’ can not be accepted in the present caseummmne 
association of the gray odlite and the ore is such as to show that 
both have been subjected to essentially identical conditions ‘since 
their formation. The gray odlite, unlike the green variety in the 
ore, is a definite layer and no reason appears why, if deposited as 
oxide, it should have been altered to silicate any more than the 
ore less than 2 feet above it. Moreover, it is difficult to see how 
the small amount of hematite in the cement of the gray odlite could 
escape alteration which was so markedly changing the spherules. 

These spherules, furthermore, differ in detail from those of the 
ore, being often less nearly spherical, showing evidence of distortion 
while soft and, frequently, blending one with another, so far-as 
their outer layers are concerned (plates 1, 2 and 3). These are 
doubtless somewhat accidental distinctions, but they are thought 
to have some significance. 

The total impression made upon one who has studied the gray 
odlite in the field and laboratory is that the ferrous silicate is distinctly 
primary and that the absence of hematite is due to some slight 
variation from the ordinary ore-forming conditions, rather than to 
its secondary conversion into silicate. 

The green odlite, resulting from alteration of the red ore, 1s 
evidently analogous to the green streaks and blotches of red shales 
and sandstones. From this it might be concluded that the green 
silicate is secondary, resulting from the alteration of the red oxide. 
But, while this may be true in part, another explanation is possible. 

The analyses show that the ore contains practically the same 


REPORA ORT THE, DIRECTOR -1Ot 7 187 


ferrous silicate that the green odlite contains, but in less amount, 
the respective quantities being 22.07 per cent and 37.23 per cent. 
While the weak green color of the silicate in the ore is wholly masked 
by the strong red of the oxide, in thin section the ore is green by 
transmitted light, though bright red by reflected light. 

In the change from red to green odlite there has been, through 
the action of percolating solutions, doubtless of a reducing nature, 
a loss of hematite, to which the red color was due, while the silicate 
is relatively increased in quantity by this removal, as well as by the 
elimination of the unusually abundant iron carbonate. ‘The presence 
of the large amount of the latter in the ore strongly suggests that its 
formation is the first step in the removal of the oxide, while the 
marked decrease in total iron in the green odlite as compared with 
the ore is added evidence of leaching. 

If this interpretation is correct, the silicate of the green odlite 1s, 
in part at least, not formed by the alteration of oxide in the red ore, 
but is simply rendered conspicuous by the removal of the oxide. 
That, at the same time, some silicate may be formed is evident. 

So far as the typical odlitic ore and the fossil ore, represented 
by analyses 11 and 12 are concerned, the silicate can be determined 
only by indirect means, and nothing definite is indicated as to its 
relation to the oxide. Streaks and blotches of green odlite occur 
sporadically in the odlitic ore bed and are essentially identical in 
nature with those just described. As yet nothing similar has been 
noted in the fossil ores, probably because of merely accidental over- 
sight. In both varieties of ore the association of silicate and oxide 
is most intimate and, apparently, constant. 

Thus, it is concluded that the chamosite, or related ferrous silicate, 
which occurs as a distinct bed associated with the Clinton hematites, 
as well as the silicate intimately mingled with hematite in the ores 
themselves, is a primary deposit rather than an alteration of some 
other iron compound. 

If this conclusion is correct, the intimate and, apparently, constant 
association of ferrous silicate with the oxide of the ores suggests 
at once the possible derivation of the Clinton ores from a primary 
silicate. 

Such an explanation of the ores would account very well for 
their constant yielding of gelatinous silica when treated with acids, 
the silica resulting from the decomposition of a residual portion of 
the silicate that had escaped alteration. This, however, as will be 
shown later, is not the only possible source of silica, though distinctly 


188 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


indicated when the proportions of the various constituents conform 
to a definite silicate formula. 

If the ore is derived from primary silicate, it is evident that the 
gray odlite, represented by analyses 1 and 2, must have escaped the 
alteration and retained its original composition. This involves a 
‘difficulty similar to that met with in the attempt to explain the 
gray odlite as derived from primary oxide — the fact that both 
silicate and oxide have been subjected to the same geological con- 
ditions. If the ore represents altered silicate, why has not the 
much thinner bed of silicate, just below it, been similarly altered? 
As a matter of fact, both beds appear to have retained essentially 
their original condition, with little change, and it is impossible to 
examine them in the field without concluding that their differences 
are primary. 

Furthermore, if the ore is derived from silicate, why does it never 
grade into the unaltered original material? This happens repeatedly 
in the European cases, where such an origin for the ores has been 
maintained, while the Clinton ores never, so far as the writer is 
aware, grade into unchanged silicate, even under covers exceeding 
a thousand feet. This is really the serious, not to say fatal, obstacle 
to the hypothesis of derivation of the ores from silicate. An alter- 
ation so complete and uniform, extending to such depths, over so 
great an area, and with such widely varying topography, seems 
impossible. It is true, McCallie! states that, in Georgia, the hard, 
unleached ores carry 4 per cent of ferrous iron while the soft, leached 
ores carry only about 0.3 per cent. But while this is the relation 
that would be expected if ferrous silicate is a general primary con- 
stituent of the ores, no proof is afforded that this silicate was ever 
the only, or the dominant, iron mineral. For were this the case, 
there would certainly be parts of the formation, under heavy cover, 
not reached by the oxidizing solutions where the entire bed would 
consist of silicate. 

The nearest approach to this that the writer has seen is the bed © 
of gray odlite described above, and the complete preservation of 
the chamosite in this, with no special protective conditions, 
strengthens the conclusion that the same mineral would some- 
times hava remained intact in the ore beds, had it ever formed 
a chief constituent of the latter. 

If more positive evidence were needed upon this question, it 


1 McCallie, S. W.; Fossil Iron Ores of Georgia. Geol. Survey of Georgia, 
Bul. 17, p. 180, 1908. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9Q1I7 189 


would be afforded by the iron minerals of the Wabana deposits of 
New Foundland, described by Hayes.’ 

Here again the main ore is hematite, occurring in vast bodies, 
with subsidiary chamosite and siderite. In the same section there 
are sharply defined beds of odlitic chamosite which, as is the case 
with the gray odlite at Clinton, have been subjected to all the 
vicissitudes that have affected the ore but have retained what is 
clearly their original constitution. In both the Wabana and the 
Clinton cases, which are closely parallel, except in the matter of 
scale, it seems perfectly clear that the chamosite and hematite 
beds are distinct in character now, not because of secondary changes, 
but because they were originally distinct and have in both cases 
preserved their original characteristics with little modification. 

It is on these purely empirical grounds that the derivation of the 
ores from silicates is rejected, for not only is there no theoretical 
obstacle to the hypothesis, but the cases of the Mesabi ores, the 
Minette ores of Lorraine, and many others, are evidence of the 
possibiltty of such derivation on a large scale. The field relations 
of the Clinton ores, however, (and the same is true of the Wabana 
ores) seem to preclude the possibility of such origin. Should further 
deep exploitation of the Clinton ores show a general passage into 
beds of chamosite, this conclusion would of course have to be aban- 
doned; but in view of the depth to which they have already been 
worked, without change of character, it is deemed most improbable 
that any such change will appear. Even the occasional occurrence 
of chamosite varieties of the ore would not be sufficient evidence to 
establish the silicate hypothesis, ‘for if, as shown above, chamosite is 
a widespread and presumably primary constituent of the ores, it is 
quite conceivable that it would sometimes surpass the hematite in 
quantity without at all indicating that this is a general relation. 

As to the precise method of formation of the ferrous silicate, 
little can be said with certainty. 

In the case of the gray odlite, the silicate is of very shallow water 
one having been deposited ona) cracked mud surface) @he 
silicate was deposited in concentric shells, coating rounded quartz 
grains, the deposition beginning around isolated grains but gradually 
cementing these together so that, in a late stage of the process,, 
there was some blending of the shells of adjacent spherules (plate 3, 
figures 1 and 2). That the iron was first precipitated as hydrated 


1 Hayes, A. O., Wabana Iron Ore of New Foundland. Geol. Survey of 
Canada, Mem. 78, p. 17 and 19, I9I15. 


190 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 

® 
oxide with adsorbed silica and subsequently changed to silicate, 
under reducing conditions due to organic matter on the sea bottom, 
is possible, as suggested by Leith! in his first discussion of the 
Mesabi ores; and certain facts derived from examination of modern 
lake ores, to be discussed later, support this view. But direct 
precipitation as ferrous silicate is thought more probable. 

In this connection, the artificial precipitation? of greenalite is of 
great interest but, while the laboratory conditions involved, with 
their high temperatures, approximate those indicated for the natural 
precipitation of greenalite, they are quite unlike the conditions 
under which the Clinton silicate was formed. In spite of this, 
however, they indicate the readiness with which ferrous silicate 
may be formed, while the difference in conditions may account 
for the difference in the minerals produced. 

In the case of the Clinton ores, there seems to have been a delicate 
equilibrium between silicate and hydroxide and, while the latter 
was formed in larger amount, there was still, as a rule, a certain 
amount of the former. A slight shift in one direction, that: of lack 
of oxygen, would increase, while a similar shift in the opposite 
direction would decrease, the amount of silicate. 

It appears, then, that primary precipitates of ferrous silicate 
and ferric hydroxide, the latter easily dehydrated, may form 
simultaneously, and that, with varying conditions, either one may 
predominate in a given case, though as a rule both are present. 
That subsequent oxidation, under new geological conditions, may 
convert the silicate to oxide is undoubted; and it is almost equally 
certain that reducing conditions may, in the presence of sufficient 
silica, convert the oxide to silicate, reference being made to alteration 
under moderate cover, in the region of cementation, not to deeper 
seated conditions, where any silicate formed would be of the type 
characteristic of the crystalline schists. . 

Stapfi* long ago pointed out that modern lake and bog ores, when 
treated with acid, leave a residue similar to that left by the Clinton 
and other ores, and concluded that there was iron silicate present. 

The writer has examined a large number of samples of modern 


1 Leith, C. K., The Mesabi Iron Bearing District; U. S. Geol. Survey, Mon: 
PIOIUUE Fo), BOs OOS 

2 Van Hise, C. R. & Leith, C. K., Geology of the Lake Superior Region; U. S. 
Geol: Survey, Mon! Wil; sp: 521-22, rom. 

3 Stapff, F. M., Ueber die Entstehung der Seeerze; Zeits. d. Deutsch. Geol. Ges. 
18, p. 110 and 166, 1866. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR 1017 idl 


pisolitic and odlitic sedimentary ores and in every case has obtained 
such a gelatinous residue. Indeed, in cases of spherules of similar 
size, it is difficult to distinguish residues of modern origin from 
those of the Clinton ores. 

In order to determine whether or not the similarity extends to 
the presence of ferrous iron or even ferrous silicate in the modern 
ores, Professor Morley determined FeO and soluble silica in seven 
modern lake ores, with the results shown below. 

For six of the specimens from which the samples for analysis 
were taken, the writer is indebted to the kindness of Prof. J. H. L. 
Woanom Chasiiantay Norway (aos. 1.14 and 15) Dr Broil Sarin 
of Helsingfors, Finland (nos. 16 and 17), and Dr C. Wesenberg-Lund 
of Copenhagen, Denmark (no. 18). Number 19 was purchased 
from F. Krantz of Bonn, Germany. 


13 14 15 16 09/ 18 19 
Gia” Gis) (Gane (GeO) Guo) gi) = (eaen) 
Re Oren tice st cs On72 O16) I.9O 29 i 5 aXe. 0.34 1.49 
SHOE, halal aay 1.44 D 1B 1 it 2 0.88 1.40 133 
Sil Op thay Gal RG 0.81 0.38 1.50 O37, OLOO 1 OY 0.34 
Rotalsols SiOz... 2D 2.51 2EOB 7) Te One VIG 7 i Oy 


* Princeton catalogue number. 

13 Pisolitic limonite (lake-ore), Widastern, Aminne, Smaland, Sweden. E. W. 
Morley, analyst. 

14 Limonite (lake-ore “ Shilling ore ’’) Bolmen, Aminne, Smaland, Sweden. 
E. W. Morley, analyst. 

15 Odlitic limonite (lake-ore), Herresbad, Aminne, Smaland, Sanden: Dia Ws 
Morley, analyst. 

16 Pisolitic limonite (lake-ore), Suontsenjaroi, Joutse, Finland. E. W. Mor- 
ley, analyst. 

17 Pisolitic limonite (lake-ore), Palkjaroi, Finland. E. W. Morley, analyst. 

18 Pisolitic limonite (lake-ore), Lake Fureso, Frederiksdal, Denmark. E. W. 
Morley, analyst. 

19 Pisolitic limonite (lake-ore), Binnensee, Husaby, Sweden. E. W. Morley, 
analyst. 


The material represented by analysis number 14, as its familiar 
name suggests, is largely composed of lenticular masses with a 
diameter of about 1 inch. 

Analysis 15 is made from material which consists of small, uniform 
spherules strikingly similar to those of the odlitic Clinton ores, 
differing from them only in color. 

Analysis 18 represents material of particular interest in con- 
taining many shells coated and replaced by limonite! and giving 
the same siliceous residue that the ordinary spherules do. Thus 


1 Wesenberg-Lund, C., Studier over Sokalk, Bonnemalm og Sogytje 1 danske 
Indsoer; Medd. Dansk. Geol. For., no. 7, p. 79-87, 159, plates I and II, 1g9or. 


192 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


it is strictly analogous to the fossil ores of the Clinton and points 
clearly to the coating and replacement of the organic fragments of 
the latter during, and immediately after, their accurrulation on the 
sea bottom and before the deposition of the overlying sediments. 

The results of the analyses give an affirmative answer to the 
question as to the presence of ferrous iron, but leave in doubt the 
matter of the ferrous silicate for, unlike the Clinton ores, these 
lake ores show no approximation to constancy of proportion between 
ferrous iron and soluble silica. It is evident that, in every case, 
there is an excess of silica over that required to form the ferrous 
silicate, which suggests the presence of the latter. 

Assuming the presence of silicate, however, the question remains 
as to the mode of occurrence of the remaining silica. The tendency 
of collodial ferric hydroxide to adsorb various substances, to which 
Van Bemmelen! has called attention, strongly suggests that this 
is the correct explanation in the present instance, while Sosman? 
says: “ The intimate association of silica with many ores, amounting 
even to chemical combination, as in some of the siliceous ores of 
the Lake Superior region, may, represent a simultaneous 
agglomeration of colloidal silica and ferric oxide, or an adsorption 
of ferrous and ferric iron by agglomerated silica.’’ It is quite possible 
that a ferric silicate is present, though there is no definite evidence 
achauestiehwis vmeycase: 

In the Clinton ores, where all the silica is regarded as forming 
ferrous silicate, the absence of excess of silica, like that of the lake 
ores, may be an original character or, may be due to either ja 
leaching out of silica or its conversion to the insoluble form. In 
addition to the amount of silica present, an obvious controlling 
factor in the formation of ferrous silicate is the quantity of oxygen 
available to precipitate the iron as ferric hydroxide. The chamosite 
layer points clearly to a deficiency of oxygen, while in the ores the 
oxidation was much more nearly complete. That silica adsorbed 
by ferric hydroxide, under strongly oxidizing conditions, might, 
under subsequent reducing conditions, combine with ferrous iron 
to form a silicate, as suggested in discussing the origin of the gray 
odlite, does not admit of a doubt, and this may be a frequent method 
of formation of the silicate. | 


1Van Bemmelen, J. M., Ueber das Vorkommen, die Zusammensetzung und 
die Bildung von ea ates an in und unter Mooren: Zeits. f. Anorg. Chem. 
DOULS TOs B77 Tshoe). 

2Sosman, R. B., Some Problems of the Oxides of Iron: Jour. Wachineton . 
ACadh SCle uN ill; ome Ale ani 


REPORT Oh, TLE DIRECTOR TOL 193 


But whatever the explanation, the simple fact that both types of 
ores under consideration, the Paleozoic Clinton ores and the modern 
lake ores, generally contain both ferrous iron and soluble silica, 
is strong evidence of a similarity of origin and, as the latter are 
obviously direct chemical precipitates, there is this added evidence 
that the same is true of the former. 

In both cases the details of the process of precipitation constitute 
a difficult problem in colloid chemistry whose solution must be left 
to the future. 

Sosman! has recently said, with reference to iron oxides in nature, 
“Even the layman can get a vivid realization of the complexity 
of the problems involved; he has but to walk out through the country 
round about Washington and notice the bewildering play of inorganic 
colors everywhere about him, ranging from deep brown-black through 
various shades of drab, brown, purple and maroon, and through 
the many tints of pink, ochre and rose to the most brilliant reds 
and orange-yellows, and then realize that almost every one of these 
hundreds of colors is due to an oxide or hydrated oxide of iron; 
he will begin to realize then that our chemical knowledge of these 
oxides is almost infinitesimal.’’ This passage, of course, refers to 
geological conditions quite different from those under which the 
iron ores were deposited, but the chemical problems involved are 
essentially the same, and certainly are not simplified by the intro- 
duction of the ferrous silicate factor. 

That the latter is something to be reckoned with in all attempts 
to solve the problems, both geological and chemical, of the sedi- 
mentary iron ores, seems to be a definitely established fact. 

In any given case, the relations of the silicate and the oxide must 
be controlled by local conditions. For the Clinton ores, a pre- 
dominant precipitation of hydroxide, with only subsidiary silicate, 
is indicated. For the Wabana district, Hayes? reached the same 
conclusion, while for European ores resembling the Clinton ores, 
and notably the Minette ores of Lorraine, which are such a vital 
factor in the present war, much difference of opinion exists. 

In most of these cases the amount of silicate, as compared with 
oxide, is much greater than in the Clinton ores and the two grade 
_ back and forth into each other repeatedly. That they have a most 
intimate genetic relationship is evident and that one is derived from 
the other by secondary processes is generally held, but there is no 


EO cit. 9: 72. 
2 Op. cit., p. 67-80. 


194 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


agreement as to which is primary and which secondary, some 
investigators regarding the oxide as derived from a primary silicate 
and others regarding the relation as just the reverse while in both 
cases various views are held as to the conditions of formation of 
the original mineral. 

For example: while Beck! gives the impression that chamosite 
and thuringite are primary precipitates, Zalinski? considers them 
secondary after deposits of indeterminate nature. Van Werweke? 
in his important contribution to the geology of the Minette ores, 
concludes that they were originally precipitated, in part, as ferrous 
silicate which was subsequently altered to oxide. 

In the case of similar ores in Germany, on the other hand, Lepsius* 
and Gaub® regard the limonite as the primary precipitate and the 
silicate as formed from it by secondary processes. 

More extended references would give further evidence of this 
diversity of view. : 

Another solution of the silicate problem for the Clinton ores was 
offered some years ago by McCallie® who, finding scales of a green 
mineral in the Clinton ores of Georgia and noting that some ferrous 
iron was reported in analyses, suggested that both phenomena 
indicated the presence of glauconite, and concluded that the Clinton 
ores were originally deposited as glauconite and subsequently altered 
to hematite. Such an explanation of the ores is exeecedimely, 
attractive, particularly because it connects them with deposits now 
forming over extensive areas of the sea bottom; although it must 
be said that geological evidence points to distinctly shallower water 
conditions for the Clinton ores than those under which glauconite 
is now forming. 

But, as was pointed out in the paper on Types of Ore Deposits, 
there are other and more serious objections to this hypothesis, 
and the evidence presented in the foregoing pages argues most 
strongly against it, leading to the conclusion that the green mineral 
of the Clinton ores is not glauconite, but chamosite or a related 


1 Beck, R., The Nature of Ore Deposits, p. 84-85, 1905. 

4 (O} 0), Gthks (Oy Ole, . 

3 Van Werweke, L., Zusammensetzung u. Entstehung der Lothringisch-luxem- 
burgischen odlitischen Eisenerze (Minetten). Oberrhein Geol. Verein., Separat- 
abdruck, April, 1900. 

4 Lepsius, R., Geol. von Deutschland, 2 Lief. I, p. 219, 1903. 

> Gaub, F., Die Jurassischen Odlite der Schwabischen Alb. Neues Jahrbuch 
fi. Wink eter 1908sellesao4: 

S Op eits py ra5-04) 


Plate 6 


Figure 1 Chamosite, Nucitz, Bohemia. Very similar to the chamosite 
of the gray odlite, but lacking the quartz nuclei. Magnified 30 diameters 


Figure 2 Greenalite, showing the rounded form of the grains and complete 
absence of concentric structure. Magnified 57 diameters 


; 
re 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR I9QI7 . 195 


silicate. This is shown by the marked concentric structure of the 
spherules and their close agreement in optical properties with 
Chamosite from well-known localities (compare plate 6, figure 1 
with plates 1 and 2) as well as by the analyses of the gray odlite, 
indicating a nonpotassic ferrous silicate of a composition similar 
to certain chlorites of the thuringite type, instead of a potassic 
ferric silicate, like glauconite (see analyses 8 and 9). 

There can be little doubt that the ferrous iron of the Georgia 
ores is, in reality, derived from essentially the same silicate as that 
of the Clinton specimens. Unfortunately, the analyses of the 
former are not sufficiently complete to admit of a calculation of 
the silicate. Indeed, the determination of ferrous iron in Clinton 
ores is very unusual, most analysts, with purely commercial ends 
in view, determining merely the total iron and calculating all of 
it as ferric. It is most desirable that more complete analyses should 
be made, representing different localities and varying depths. 

The existing data, however, are distinctly adverse to the glauconite 
hypothesis and leave the problem of the precise origin of the silicate 
unsolved. 

In this respect the situation is somewhat analogous to that which 
arose in connection with the Mesabi ores some years ago. Spurr’ 
explained the ores as due to the alteration of extensive deposits of 
ferrous silicate, occurring in round grains without concentric 
structure; and of green color (plate 6, figure 2), which he classed 
tentatively as glauconite and supposed to have been formed under 
conditions similar to those under which glauconite is forming at the 
present time. 

This gave, for the time being, a very complete and satisfactory 
explanation of the Mesabi ores, but Leith? has since shown that 
the green mineral, from which they are derived, is not in reality 
glauconite but a nonpotassic ferroso-ferric silicate, which he calls 
greenalite (analysis 7). 

As, in contrast with the case of glauconite, the geological con- 
ditions under which greenalite is formed are determinable only 
indirectly, and not by the study of deposits now forming, this 
leaves the first concentration of the Mesabi ores in relative obscurity 
as compared with Spurr’s hypothesis. 


1 Spurr, J. E., The Iron Ores of the Mesabi Range; Amer. Geol. GUN Os 2S 
45, 1894, and The Iron-Bearing Rocks of the Mesabi Range in Minnesota, Bul. 
Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey of Minn., no. 10, 1894. 

2 Leith, C. K., The Mesabi Iron Bearing District of Minnesota, U. S. Geol. 
Survey, Mon. XLIII, 1903. 


7 


196 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


So, in the case of the Clinton ores, even were it proved that they 
resulted from the alteration of the silicate, the fact that this silicate 
is not glauconite would, as.shown above, leave its origin or, in other 
words, the nature.of the first concentration of the iron, unsettled. 

For ores of the Clinton type, the problem of the genetic relations 
of oxides, silicates and other compounds of iron has been most 
elaborately treated by Cayeux! in a magnificent monograph of which, 
unfortunately, only the first part is as yet available. The iron 
silicate is regarded as the usual stage intermediate between the car- 
bonate and the oxide, the genetic sequence being (1) calcium car- 
bonate, (2) iron carbonate, (3) iron silicate, (4) iron oxide, the last 
three compounds, in the order named, being regarded as replacing 
calcium carbonate. 1 

The importance of these conclusions can not be doubted and, 
throughout the foregoing discussion, they have been kept constantly 
in mind. But at the same time the actual geological conditions 
have been taken as the key to the solution of the genetic problem 
and these have indicated a relatively minor réle for the secondary 
processes. Cayeux, on the other hand, regards these processes as 
the essential cause of ore formation, starting with the replacement 
of calcium carbonate by iron carbonate. : 

As the data at present under consideration shed no important 
light upon the possible formation of the Clinton ores by the replace- 
ment of limestone, it would be futile to repeat, here, the discussions 
of this phase of the problem which have been published in earlier 
papers. 

In general, it may be said that the writer’s conclusion, that the 
ores are primary, is based much more upon their larger geological 
relations than upon any minute details of structure and composition. 
Important though the latter be, they are often capable, as appears 
above, of diverse interpretation; while the larger features of dis- 
tribution, relation to other rocks, limitation to certain horizons, 
shape of deposits, continuity in depth etc., to the writer, seem to 
admit of but one interpretation — that of deposition of the iron 
in each bed before the deposition of the overlying bed, in other 
words, primary deposition. 

Repiacement of calcium carbonate, when it has occurred, is 
regarded as of the contemporaneous type, taking place during the 
accumulation of the calcareous materials on the sea bottom; and, if 


1 Cayeux, L., Les Minerais de Fer Oolithque de France, Fasc. I, Minerais de 
Fer Primaires, Paris, 1909. 


REPORT. OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 197 


the replacement hypothesis is given this limitation, not only are the 
chief evidences against it removed but, as clearly indicated in all pre- 
vious discussions by the writer, its acceptance, for certain phases of 
the ore, is inevitable. 

Subsequent relative enrichment of ores, by the leaching out of 
calcium carbonate by ground waters, is clearly recognized, but that 
the same waters actually brought in the iron and replaced the 
carbonate, thus converting limestone into iron ore, is not accepted 
_as a factor of any considerable importance in the genetic process. 

Though not bearing directly upon the foregoing discussion, a few 
words may be added with regard to the various minor constituents 
determined in Doctor Morley’s analyses of which no mention has 
been made. 

Manganese, as might be expected, has undergone some con- 
centration as compared with its average amount in the lithosphere, 
the latter being, according to Clarke,! 0.05 per cent while the mean 
of the six specimens analysed is 0.47 per cent. The range is from 
0.13 per cent to 1.06 per cent, the variation being exceedingly irregular 
and independent of the iron. Indeed, the minimum amount of 
manganese and the maximum amount of iron occur in the same 
specimen, the odlitic ore, no. 5. 

The small amount of K.O, particularly in nos. 1 and 2, has already 
been referred to as indicating that the green silicate can not be 
regarded as glauconite. Beyond this, the alkalies have no particular 
significance but their accurate determination in rocks of this char- 
acter is unusual and affords data that may prove valuable in other 
connections. . 

Sulphur is, practically, all present as pyrite, a mineral of quite 
varying distribution in the rocks and one whose genetic relations 
are of much interest, in themselves, but not sufficiently worked 
out to shed real light on the ore problem. In general, it may be 
said that the pyrite appears to be for the most part of distinctly 
secondary origin. 

TiOs, averaging for the six analyses 0.165 per cent, is considerably 
reduced, not only as compared with its amount in the lithosphere 
as a whole, 0.77 per cent, but also as compared with sedimentary 
rocks in general, the amount falling between that of sandstones 
and of limestones, and far below that of shales. In view of the 
known geochemical behavior of titanium compounds, this is what 


Clarke, F. W., The Data of Geochemistry; U. 5S. Geol. Survey Bul. 616, 
p22, 1016. 


198 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


might be expected. Unlike the manganese, titanum shows a very 
limited range, in quantity, in five out of the six samples analysed. 

The determinations of BaO and SrO were made in an attempt to 
get evidence as to the first stage of concentration of these oxides 
which occur somewhat frequently in Clinton rocks as aggregates 
of celestite and strontianite, containing barium. 

As a matter of fact, the average content of BaO, 0.016, indicates 
dilution rather than concentration while, on the other hand, SrO, 
with an average amount of 0.08, shows slight concentration, but 
no long step toward the segregated minerals. As the latter usually 
occur near the horizon of the ‘“‘ fossil ore,’’ no. 6, it is rather sur- 
prising to find no greater concentration of SrO in this rock than in 
no. 2, many feet lower down. 

In analyses numbers 5 and 6, the results for all the minor con- 
stituents are probably affected by the manner of preparing the 
samples, as was pointed out with reference to the small content 
of P.O; in comparison with the amount. commonly present in Clinton 
ores. 


1 Chester, A. H., Mineralogical Notes from the Laboratory of Hamilton Col- 
ege, Am. Jour. Sci. (3) XX XIII, 1887, p. 284-91. 


RADIUM AND URANIUM 
THEIR ORES AND OCCURRENCE IN NATURE 


BW Re Aah. eB NROSEyik: 


INTRODUCTION 


The following article is intended to give a short description of 
the occurrence of radium and uranium in nature. The brief space 
available for it does not permit the discussion of all the chemical 
and physical phenomena manifested in the origin of radium from 
the disintegration of uranium through the intermediate element 
ionium, and of the various products of the disintegration of radium 
itself, with the formation of various more or less temporary prod- 
ucts, and with perhaps the eventual production of lead. These 
subjects are treated in many published papers and textbooks. The 
present article is confined largely to a discussion of the minerals 
and other ores from which radium and uranium are derived, and 
of their geographic and geologic distribution. 


RELATION OF RADIUM AND URANIUM 


Radium is a metal and is a product of the disintegration in nature 
of the metal uranium. Both radium and uranium are elements. 
Radium has been isolated in its metallic state, but is not used in 
that form and is known better in the form of its salts, among the 
“most important of which, so far as their uses are concerned, are 
the bromide, chloride and sulphate. 

Wherever uranium occurs in nature, radium is associated with 
it in certain definable quantities. Uranium can contain, however, 
only a certain maximum amount of radium at a time, and when it 
has reached this stage, the radium and uranium ratio is said to be 
in equilibrium. In this condition the amount of radium per gram 
of uranium has been calculated by Rutherford to be 3.4 x 107 
gram.t This corresponds to 1 gram of radium element to about 
3000 kilograms of uranium element, or 1 part of radium element to 
about 3,000,000 parts of uranium element. Uranium minerals as 
mined are usually impure and carry only a small percentage of 
uranium element, so that the ratio between radium and the crude 
uranium ore may be 1 to several or many times 3,000,000. 


1E. Rutherford, Radio-Active Substances and Their Radiations, p. 462. 
1913. 
[ 199 | 


200 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Sometimes uranium minerals, even when comparatively pure, are 
found to be lacking in the amount of radium required for equilibrium. 
Some authorities believe this to be due to a natural leaching of the 
radium from the uranium; while others believe that such vast 
periods of time are required for the original establishment of equi- 
librium, estimated in the millions of years, that the minerals which 
show a deficiency in radium have not existed for a sufficiently long 
time to have yet acquired equilibrium, and that only /thevolder 
uranium minerals have existed long enough for this purpose. 

These great spaces of time required for the formation of radium 
from uranium would, of course, render it impracticable, from a 
commercial standpoint, to keep uranium, from which radium has 
been artificially extracted, until the latter has been restored. 

The production of radium from uranium is usually stated in mil- 
ligrams or grams, and even in the richest ores there is usually only 
a small fraction of a gram to a ton, while in the ordinary lower 
grade ore there are only a few milligrams to a ton, corresponding 
toa small traction’ of a grain to a ton. Wess than twemingayeame 
ago it was estimated that probably not one gram of radium element 
in the form of its refined salts had been extracted in the world. 
Today a great many times, perhaps a hundred times or more, this 
amount has been extracted and isin use. The annual production of 
radium today in the world is probably several grams. The annual 
production of uranium in the world is probably several hundred 
pounds. ; 

The unique position of uranium as the source of radium in nature 
makes it necessary to discuss both materials together. 


UsES OF RADIUM 


Radium is a heavy white metal which is very unstable and alters 
rapidly ini the air.) It is mot used in its metallic) State) bit omlyaanm 
the form of its salts. A few years ago these salts were supposed 
to have a) generally beneficial effect im the treatment of camcenramel 
other malignant growths, but more recent investigations seem to 
conime their influence to only certain forms of /these ailienioms 
Their influence in other diseased conditions is often very marked, 
but the full extent of the field of usefulness of radium for medical 
purposes has not yet been very clearly defined. 

In recent years radium has been applied to other important 
purposes, especially in luminous paint for watches, clocks, com- 
passes and other instruments; and this use has so greatly increased 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQ1I7 201 


in recent yéars, especially for military purposes, that it now con- 
sumes more radium than is used in medicine. Radium salts are 
more or less luminous when seen in a darkened room, and this 
quality is often increased by the admixture of certain other materials, 
notably zinc sulphide. Hence their value in luminous paints. 
Radium salts also cause certain minerals to fluoresce, notably the 
zinc minerals willemite and sphalerite. In Germany, where radium 
during the war has become scarce on account of the shortage of the 
ores from which it is extracted, radium salts are said to be pre- 
served for medical purposes, and mesothorium and other radio- 
active substances are said to be used in making luminous paints. 


USES OF URANIUM 


Uranium is a heavy white metal, which slowly tarnishes on expos- 
ee cie air. he ciel use of uranium today is as a source ob 
radium. For many years before the discovery of radium, however, 
uranium compounds were used in a small way in coloring glass and 
porcelain, in photography, in reagents for chemical analysis, in 
mordants for dyeing and for other small purposes. The use of 
uranium metal in small quantities in steel manufacture has been 
tried with some degree of success. 


ORES OF RADIUM AND URANIUM 


General statement. The principal uranium minerals at present 
known in nature, which are therefore the principal sources of both 
uranium and radium, are carnotite and uraninite, with the impure 
amorphous form of uraninite known as pitchblende. Torbernite, 
autunite and some of the rarer uranium minerals have produced a 
little radium and uranium. 

Carnotite and uraninite or pitchblende as mined for ores are 
generally more or less mixed with other materials and are rarely 
found pure. The uranium in the ores is usually stated commer- 
cially for convenience in the form of the uranium oxides represented 
by the formula UO,+2U0Os, briefly expressed as U30s. Most car- 
notite ore varies from 1 per cent to 3 per cent of U3;0s; a 5 to 10 
_ per cent ore is considered high grade; a 20 to 4o per cent ore is 
remarkably rich. Uraninite and pitchblende ordinarily contain 
more uranium than carnotite contains, and even in the impure 
forms in which they are mined as ores, they often show this greater 
uranium contents. The ordinary uraninite and pitchblende ores 
carry from 2 to 3 per cent to 8 or 10 per cent U30s, and a 20 per 


202 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


cent ore is very high gerade, though) some ore suns) Go oni7emecs 
Cemt: 

Carnotite. Carnotite is an amorphous, soft, powdery material, 
sometimes more or less coherent and of a talcose or waxy character, 
generally of a brilliant canary yellow color, though sometimes dis- 
colored by iron, organic matter and other substances. It has a 
formula K»,O.2U03.V20s5.(?)H2O, in which the amount of water 
(H.O), has been variously estimated at from 3H2O to 8H.O. It 
is essentially a hydrous potassium uranium vanadate and is some- 
times associated with the hydrous calcium uranium vanadate known 
as tyuyamunite, having the composition CaO.2UO3.V20;(?)H2O in 
which the amount of water is uncertain, as in carnotite. Some 
authorities believe that carnotite is not a distinct mineral, but a 
mixture of different minerals. 

Uraninite and pitchblende. The terms uraninite and pitchblende 
are often used synonymously to designate the same mineral, but 
more properly the term uraninite is a general name for all forms of 
the mineral and especially for the purer and distinctly crystalline vari- 
ety, and the term pitchblende is applicable to the impure amorphous 
form. When crystalline, the mineral belongs to the isometric 
system, and when amorphous is in a massive form, often with 
botryoidal surfaces and a conchoidal fracture. It is black or grayish 
black in color, opaque, often has a submetallic, glossy or pitchlike 
luster. It has a hardness of about 5.5, and a specific gravity of 
g or over when pure, but both these qualities vary when the mineral 
is impure. It is often remarkably lacking in distinctive character- 
istics, so that its presence might frequently be overlooked. For 
this reason it seems possible that this mineral, now known in only 
comparatively small quantities, may some time in the future be 
found more abundantly. 

Uraninite, like carnotite, has a somewhat indefinite formula, but 
is essentially a combination of the two uranium oxides UO, and 
UOs;, in which UO, seems to act as a base and UO; as an acid. A 
number of both the rarer and commoner elements are often asso- 
ciated with them. The relative amounts of the two oxides vary 
considerably in different specimens, especially in the impure form 
of pitchblende, and no definite formula can at present be given, 
In pitchblende a notable amount of water, perhaps sometimes in 
chemical combination, is often present. Several other minerals 
much rarer than uraninite or pitchblende are related to them in 
composition, among them being cleveite, bréggerite and nivenite, 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQI7 203 


Other ores. Though carnotite, uraninite and pitchblende are 
the most abundant of all the radium and uranium mater a!s in 
nature, and produce almost all the radium and uranium of commerce, 
yet many other minerals contain both metals, and though as yet 
known only in such limited quantities as to be of small commercial 
value, may in the future be found in quantities of importance. 
Among them may be mentioned tyuyamunite, a hydrous calcium 
uranium vanadate often associated with the hydrous potassium 
uranium vanadate described above as carnotite; autunite, a hydrous 
calcium uranium phosphate; torbernite or chalcolite, a hydrous 
copper uranium phosphate. Still other rare radium uranium min- 
erals are gummite, samarskite, uranocirite, fergusonite, mackin- 
toshite, thorogummite and numerous other rare forms, many of 
them of very vague composition, and not as yet known in sufficient 
quantities to .be more than mineralogical curiosities. 


CHOGRAPHIC AND GEOLOGIC DISTRIBUTION OF 
RADIUM AND URANIUM 


The only regions of the world that have as yet produced any 
large amounts of radium and uranium minerals on a commercial scale 
are Colorado, Utah and Austria. Cornwall, Australia and Germany 
have produced a small quantity of these minerals. They are known 
in small quantities in France and Portugal, and have been, reported 
in India and German East Africa, but in these regions they have 
not yet become commercially important. They occur sparingly, 
so far as yet known, and practically as only mineralogical curiosities, 
in Connecticut, North Carolina, Canada, Norway and many other 
regions, but may in the future be found in larger quantities. 

Minute quantities of radium or its products of disintegration 
occur in almost all rocks, and in the atmosphere, and in the waters 
of the sea and land, but in such small amounts as to be unavailable 
as a source of these substances. The source of all radium of com- 
merce at the present time is in the certain few uranium minerals 
already mentioned. They, as will be shown later, are found in 
formations of various geologic ages from recent superficial deposits 
to the older crystalline rocks. They often, however, show a tend- 
ency toward certain modes of occurrence, such as in southwestern 
Colorado and southeastern Utah as an impregnation in sandstone; 
in eastern Colorado, Cornwall, Austria and South Australia as one 
of the gangue minerals in veins of other ores; in North Carolina, 
Canada, Norway and West Australia in pegmatite or other felds- 
pathic dikes, 


204, NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


RADIUM AND URANIUM RESOURCES OF THE UNITED 
STATES 


General statement. The commercially important deposits of 
ores of radium and uranium in the United States are, so far as yet 
known, confined to the carnotite regions of southwestern Colorado 
and southeastern Utah, and the pitchblende deposits of Gilpin 
county in eastern Colorado. In Connecticut, North Carolina and 
elsewhere, some little uraninite, pitchblende and other uranium 
minerals have been found; and near Mauch Chunk in Pennsylvania, 
small quantities of carnotite! have been discovered, but these occur- 
fences are, SO lat as ‘known, in quantities too, smallitommemer 
commercial value. 

Colorado and Utah. The carnotite deposits of southwestern 
Colorado and southeastern Utah are the most important sources of 
radium and uranium in the world. In Colorado the largest quanti- 
ties of ore have come from many mines in Montrose county, 
especially in Paradox valley, while Mesa, San Miguel, Dolores, Rio 
Blanco, Routt and other counties have been producers. In south- 
eastern Utah the ores are carnotite, as in southwestern Colorado, 
and occur especially in Grand, Emery and San Juan counties, but 
have not been worked to the same extent as in Colorado. 

The carnotite of Colorado and Utah occurs as an impregnation 
in.sandstones and shaly sandstones, mostly in the McElmo and 
the La Plata formations, lying at the top of the Jurassic beds and 
below the Cretaceous sandstones and conglomerates of the region. 
The deposits seem to have been formed by the precipitation of 
carnotite from solution along certain strata of these formations, 
and the material occurs along bedding planes, in fissures and small 
cavities, in layers or irregular masses from a fraction of an inch to 
several inches in width, and sometimes as a general impregnation 
of the sandstone for several feet in thickness. ._It seems to be 
especially abundant in strata impregnated strongly with vegetable 
or animal matter, and is often in unusual quantities in lignitized 
or petrified trunks of trees. This phenomenon suggests the influence 
of organic matter in precipitating and segregating the carnotite. 

The rocks carrying the carnotite lie horizontally or dip at low 
angles in most parts of the Colorado region; in Utah they le often 
in the same way, but occasionally dip at steep angles. Where they 
appear on the surface, the carnotite sometimes impregnates certain 
strata for several hundred feet or more along the outcrops, but 


1 Edgar T. Wherry, A New Occurrence of Carnotite, Amer. Jour. Sci., 33:574- 
SOW LOL. 


REPORT OF THE DIRECTOR IQ17 205 


more generally it occurs in spots along them, with little or no car- 
notite in the intervening spaces. As these outcrops are followed 
into the hillsides, the ore appears to be even more irregular in its 
distribution than on the surface, and in many or most cases it - 
becomes much scarcer the further it 1s explored underground, until 
within 10 to 4o or 50 feet from the surface it often mostly or entirely 
disappears. There are exceptions to this feature, but the gradual 
and often rapid decrease in quantity and grade of the carnotite ore 
as it is followed into a hill is generally recognized. ‘This fact sug- 
gests that the carnotite may have been red'ssolved in the sandstone 
and carried to the surface by capillary action in this arid climate, 
forming rich, superficial efflorescences. 

In many of the carnotite deposits, vanadium minerals occur 
independently of the vanadium in the carnotite, but this assoc!ation 
is not always observed. They occur in sandstone and often give 
it a dark-gray or blackish color. 

In eastern Colorado several mines near Central City, Gilpin 
county, have produced limited quantities of pitchblende. Among 
these are the Kirk, the Wood, the Belcher, the Alps, the German 
and the Calhoun mines. The pitchblende occurs as a subordinate 
constituent in the gold-bearing veins of that country. The veins 
intersect old metamorphic rocks intruded by igneous rocks. The 
mines of Gilpin county are today producing little if any pitch- 
blende, and the total production has been small, amounting in all 
probably to only a few tons. Much more pitchblende, however, 
was let go to waste in former days when the mines were worked for 
other ores and the value of uranium was not recognized. 

Production. The United States is today by far the largest pro- 
ducer of radium and uranium ores in the world, and is also the 
largest producer of manufactured radium and uranium compounds. 
Before the war, England, France and Germany, especially Germany, 
imported large quantities of American ores and extracted the radium 
in a refined state as its different salts, much of which was returned 
to the United States for sale. Now, however, American ores are 
almost entirely treated in the United States, with the exc2ption 
of a little shipped to England and possibly to France. The Stand- 
ard Chemical Company of Pittsburgh was a pioneer in .this work 
and others quickly followed, among them the National Radium 
Institute of Denver, the Schlesinger Radium Company of Denver, 
the Chemical Products Company of Denver, the Cummings Chemical 
Company of Landsdowne, Pa., the Radium Luminous Materials 
Corporation of New York, and others. 


206 NEW. YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Before the discovery of radium in 1898, but little attention was 
given to uranium ores in America, though some little pitchblende 
was shipped from the Central City, Colorado, region for use in 
making uranium compounds. Shortly after the discovery of radium, 
however, mining was begun on the carnotite of southwestern Col- 
orado, and from 1900 to 1910 several companies were formed to 
work these ores both in Colorado and Utah. The pitchblende of 
Central City also began to attract renewed attention. For a few 
years active work was done in prospecting for it, but the quantities 
have so far proved to be small. A few tons probably represent the 
total amount derived from these mines since the search began. In 
the meantime, however, the production of carnotite increased rapidly 
until 1915, when it greatly decreased on account of the curtailment 
of shipments to Europe. In the latter part of 1916, however, the 
production increased again, on account of the increased consump- 
tion of ore in this country, and today the production is very active, 
largely on account of the increased use of radium not only in medicine 
but especially in luminous paints. 3 

The amount of radium and uranium ores produced in the United 
States, Or in fact amywhere, during a given period, is cimecHlnare 
determine on account of the different bases on which reports are 
made. Some reports give the weight of crude ore produced with- 
out giving the per cent of uranium; others give the weight of uranium 
oxide contained and not of crude ore; others give the amount of 
radium element or uranium element produced without giving the 
amount of ore used in the production. For these reasons only 
more or less vague and disconnected estimates of production are 
available, but it may be said that the tonnage is small compared 
with that of ores of commoner metals, a few thousand tons being 
a large amount of carnotite, and simply a few tons or pounds being 
a large amount of pitchblende. Though the mining of radium and 
uranium ores in the United States began about 1900 or shortly before, 
no very large quantities were produced until 1912, when about L100 
tons were mined, consisting chiefly of Colorado carnotite. The pro- 
duction has gradually increased until now it is several thousand tons 
yeariy, practically all of which is carnotite from Colorado and Utah. 


RADIUM AND URANIUM RESOURCES OF EUROPE 
Joachimsthal, Austria. The most important radium and uranium 
ore at present in Europe, is the uraninite or pitchblende found in 
the mines of Joachimsthal in Bohemia, Austria. It occurs as a 


REPORT OF THE) DIRECTOR! 1OL7 207 


subordinate gangue mineral in certain silver veins of that region, 
which intersect metamorphic and igneous rocks, and has been actively 
worked ever since the discovery of radium by M. and Mme. Curie 
in 1898. Before that time the mineral. had a certain value as a 
source of uranium compounds. 

These Austrian mines are second to those of the United States 
as a source of radium and uranium, but their production equals 
only a very small part of that of this country. Until the present 
war began this production was controlled largely, if not wholly, 
by the Austrian Government, and as the production is said still 
to continue, it is probably still controlled in the same way. 

Cornwall, England. Next in importance in Europe to the uran- 
inite or pitchblende ore of Joachimsthal as a source of radium and 
uranium, is the similar ore in some of the mines of Cornwall, Eng- 
land.1_ It occurs as a subordinate mineral in the gangue of some 
of the old tin,and copper mines in veins intersecting metamorphic 
and igneous rocks, especially at St Just, St Ives, Grampound Road, 
st Austell and elsewhere. The production and treatment of the 
ore has been under private or corporate auspices and the amount 
produced has not been large. 

Germany. In Germany the production of radium and uranium 
ores has always been insignificant. A small quantity of such ores 
has been produced at Schneeberg, Johanngeorgenstadt, Annaberg 
and elsewhere. Before the war, Germany was a large producer of 
manufactured radium and uranium compounds, but they were 
derived mostly from imported American ores. 

Other localities. With the exception of Joachimsthal and Corn- 
wall, Europe has produced but small quantities of radium and 
uranium minerals. A little uraninite or pitchblende has been 
found in other localities in Austria, such as Przibram and else- 
where, and sparingly in Norway. Autunite and other uranium 
minerals have been found in small quantities near Autun, France, 
and near Sabugal and Guarda, in Portugal, but no important quan- 
tities have been produced. 


RADIUM AND URANIUM: RESOURCES OF AUSTRALIA, 
JONIDIVAL AINIDY GEPIRIUC IES 

Australia. In South Australia carnotite, autunite, torbernite and 
other rare uranium minerals occur in regions of metamorphic and 


1R. A. F. Penrose jr, The Pitchblende of Cornwall, England, Econ. Geol. 
NO? lO; TOl—70.,  elOLs: 


208 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


igneous rocks at Radium hill near Olary, and at Mount Painter in 
the Flinders range. A few hundred tons of ore containing these 
minerals have been mined by private or corporation interests. Most 
of this has been sent to Woolwich, near Sydney, New South Wales, 
or to England, for the extraction of the radium. Since the war 
started no very active mining operations in such ores have been 
carried on in the South Australian region. 

At Cooglegong in Western Australia, the uranium mineral fer- 
gusonite and to a less extent the uranium mineral euxenite occur 
in the surface detrital material of the region. At Wodgina the 
minerals mackintoshite, thorogummite and pilbarite, all hydrous 
silicates of uranium, thorium and lead, occur in an albite pegmatite 
dike. No important quantities of these Western Australia ores 
have yet been produced. : 

India and Africa. Radium and uranium minerals have been 
reported in India and German East Africa, but no important quan- 
tities have yet been produced. 


PROSPECT OF FUTURE DISCOVERIES OF RADIUM AND 
URANIUM ORES 


The prospect for increased discoveries of radium and uranium 
minerals at the present time seems best in the carnotite regions of 
Colorado and Utah. The workable deposits seem to be more or 
less superficial, and perhaps no large quantity of ore may be found 
in any one spot, yet the great extent of the region in which the for- 
mations carrying carnotite occur, will supply an immense aggregate 
amount of ore. 

The prospect for increased discoveries of uraninite, pitchblende 
and other uranium minerals in Europe is possible, even though that 
continent has already been well explored for them. Moreover, new 
discoveries of different radium and uranium minerals may very likely 
be made in still other parts of the United States than those men- 
tioned, and in less explored parts of the world, especially certain 
regions of South America, Australia, Asia and Africa, - Many on 
these minerals, especially pitchblende, have no very distinctive 
features when first observed, and might readily be overlooked many | 
- times before their true nature was discovered. Hence the possibilities 
of future discoveries. 


1Edward S. Simpson, Western Australia Geological Survey, Bul. 59, 1914. 
** The Rare Metals and Their Distribution in Western Australia,” p. 53-54. 


IGINED EX 


Accessions to collections, 76 

Adirondacks, geology of the Lake 
Clear region, paper, III-45 

Alling Harold L., study of graphite 
deposits, 36; Geology of the Lake 
Clear region, III-—45 

Ancram, Columbia county, mangan- 


ese, 93 
Apple maggot, 59 
Archeological © Association, New 


York State, 23 

Archeologist and ethnologist, report, 
69 | 

Archeology, accessions to collection, 
80 

Areal geology, 40 

Arnold collection of birds eggs, 20 


Barite, crystallographic studies of, 
paper, 157-64 

Bird day, 23 

Birds eggs, Arnold collection, 20 

Bonaventure island, water fowl, 24 

Botanist, report of, 53 

Botany, plants added to herbarium, 
55 

Buddington, A. F., study of pyrite 
deposits, 35, 38; Foliation of gneis- 
soid syenite-granite complex of 
Lewis county, IOI—I0 

Bulletins, 34 


Canaan, manganese, 93 

Carnotite, 202 

Catskill mountains, glacial survey of, 
45 

Chadwick, George H., 
Phelps quadrangle, 42 

Champlain’s assault on the fortified 
town of the Onhneidas, paper, 
165-73 

Clark reservation near Jamesville, 33 

Clarke, John M., Geological map of 
the peninsula of Percé, P. Q., and 
its islands, 147 


report on 


Clinton iron ores, genetic significance 
of ferrous silicate associated with, 
paper, 175-98 

Codification of State Museum Law, 
10-18 

Columbia county, postglacial man- 
ganese in, paper, 85-100 

Concreting materials, inventory of, 
37 

Crinoids, Devonian, 47 

Cryptozoon park, 33 

Cushing, H. P., report on Gouver- 
neur quadrangle, 40 


Dale, Nelson C.,study of manganese 
deposits, 36-39; Postglacial man- 
ganese in Columbia county, 85-100 

Devonian crinoids, 47 

Dyes, exhibit, 22 


Economic geology, accessions to col- 


lection, 7 

Entomologist, report, 58; publica- 
tions, 65 

Ethnology, accessions to collection, 
84 


Exhibits, 22 

Fairchild, Professor, studies on 
glacial geology, 44 

Field crops, 61 

Flies and other pests, 62 


Foliation of gneissoid syenite-granite 


complex of Lewis county, paper, 
IOI—-I0 

Forest tree pests, 62 

Fossils, George Lasher Taylor collec- 
tion, 21; invertebrate, restoration 
On 23 

Fruit tree:insects, 58 


Gall insects, 64 

Geological science, exhibits associ- 
ated with, 22 

Geological survey, report on, 35 


209 


210 NEW YORK STATE MUSEUM 


Gipsy moth, 60 

Glacial geology, 44; 
region, 129 

Glass sands, study of, 36 

Gneisses of Lake Clear region, 115 

Gneissoid syenite-granite complex of 
Lewis county, foliation of, paper, 
IOI-I10 

Gouverneur quadrangle, 40 

Granteiok, Bakes Gleanunecionwn1S 

Graphite, 36 

Grass and grain pests, 60 

Greenhouse and garden. pests, 62 

Grenville series of Lake Clear region, 
II4 


Lake Clear 


Hartnagel, C. A., work on Richfield 
Springs quadrangle, 43 

Hauy, Réné Just, and his: influence, 
paper, 149-55 


Hillsdale, Columbia county, man- 
ganese, 90 
Igneous contacts of Lake Clear 


region, IIQ 

Indian basketry, 21 

Insect pest survey and information 
service, 63 

Iron ores, Clinton, genetic signifi- 
cance of ferrous silicate associated 
with, paper, 175-08 ) 

Iroquois bark lodge, 72 

Iroquois halls, decoration of, 19 


Keene gneiss, 41 
Lake Clear region, geology of, paper, 


III-45 
Lake Placid quadrangle, report on, 


40 
Law, State Museum, codification 
of, 10-18 


Leaf roller, 59 

egal) status sand 
Museum, 9 

Lester ledge or Cryptozoon park, 33 

Lewis county, foliation of gneissoid 
syenite-granite complex, paper, I0I— 
10 


scope of State 


Light screens, 19 
Limestones of Lake Clear region, 114 
Lorraine formation, 46 


Manganese deposits, 35, 39 

Manganese, postglacial, in Columbia 
county, paper, 85-100 

Miller, W. J., report on Lake Placid 
quadrangle, 40 

Mineralogy, 51; accessions to collec- 
tion, 76 

Minerals, war, resurvey of, 35 

Mining and quarry bulletin, 37 

Molybdenum, 36 

Mushroom exhibit, 22 


Naples fauna, 2. 

New York State, what it is doing 

for science, 26 

New York State Archeological Asso- 

ciation, 23 

Newland, David H., investigation of 
zinc-pyrite deposits, 35, 39; study 
of graphite deposits, 36; study of 
molybdenum deposits, 36 

Northumberland volcano at Schuyler- 
ville, 33 

Nursery inspection, 67 


Paleontology, 46; accessions to col- 
lection, 79 

Parker, Arthur €., Champlainseas- 
sault on the fortified town of the 
Oneidas, 165-73 

Pear psylla, 60 

Pear thrips, 60 

Pegmatites of Lake Clear region, 
II9 

Penrose, R! A. E., js) Radiumgand 
uranium, 199-208 

Percé, geological map of the penin- 
sula and its islands, 147 

Phelps quadrangle, 42 

Pitchblende, 202 

Plants added to herbarium, 55 

Potsdam sandstone, of Lake Clear 
region, 123 

Publications, 30, 34 

Pyrite deposits, 35, 38 


—" 


INDEX TO REPORT 


Radium and uranium, paper, 199-208 

Red bug, 59 

Reservations, scientific, belonging to 
State Museum, 33 | 


Rich, John L., glacial survey of Cats- 


kill mountains, 45 

' Richfield Springs quadrangle, 43 

Road-making materials, inventory of, 
Sy) 

Ruedemann, Rudolf, study of Utica 
and Lorraine formations, 46 


Salt supplies, restudy of, 36 

San José scale, 50 

Sandstones-quartzites of Lake Clear 
region, I14 

Schroon Lake quadrangle, 40 

Science, what New York State is 
doing for, 26 

Scientific reservations belonging to 
State Museum, 33 

Sedimentary rocks, of Lake Clear 
region, 120 

Seneca bark lodge, 20 

Shade tree insects, 62 

Smyth, G. H., jr, investigation of 
zinc-pyrite ores, 39; on the genetic 
significance of ferrous silicate as- 
sociated with the Clinton iron ores, 
175-98 

Sodium salts, 36 

Spencertown, Columbia county, man- 
ganese, 88 


OF DIRECTOR IQI7 Peal 

Stat of Department, 74 

Starks Knob, 33 

State Museum, legal status and 
scope, 9; present condition and 


activities, I9 

State Museum Law, codification of, 
10-18 

Syenite-granite complex of Lewis 
county, gneissoid, foliation of, 
paper, IOI-I0 


Taylor, George Lasher, collection of 
fossils, 21 

Thompson, Mrs Frederick F., gift of 
Indian baskets, 21 


Uraninite, 202 
Uranium and radium, paper, 199-208 
Utica formation, 46 


War minerals, 51; resurvey of, 35 

Water fowl of Bonaventure island, 
24 

Weather service, 27 

Whitlock, Herbert P., retirement, 23; 
Réné Just Haity and his influence, 
149-55; Crystallographic studies of 
barite, 157-64 

Wild flowers of New York, 30, 53 


Zinc-pyrite ores, 35, 38 
Zoologist, report, 68 
Zoology, exhibits in, 21 


1h 


New York State Museum 


JoHN M. CrarKE, Director 
PUBLICATIONS 


Packages will be sent prepaid except when distance or weight renders the 
same impracticable. Oa I0 or more copies of any one publication 20% 
discount will be given. Editioas printed are only large enough to meet 
special claims and probable sales. When the sale copies are exhausted 
the price for the few reserve copies is advanced to that charged by second- 
hand booksellers, in order to limit their distribution to cases of special 
need. Such prices are inclosed in [ ]. All publications are in paper covers, 
unless binding is specified. Checks or money orders should be addressed 
and payable to The University of the State of New York. 


Museum annual reports 1847-date. All in print to 1894, 50c a volume, 75c in 
cloth; 1894-date, sold in sets only; 75c each for octavo volumes; price of 
quarto volumes on application. 


These reports are made up of the reports of the Director, Geologist, Paleontologist, 
Botanist and Entomologist, ene museum bulletins and memoirs, issued as advance sections 
of the reports. 


Director’s annual reports 1904-date. 


1904. I38p. 20c. Toro. (Bul. 149) 280p. il. 42pl. soc. 

1905. I102p. 23pl. 30c. I9gtt. (Bul. 158) 218p. 4opl. soc. 

1906. 186p. 4Ipl. 25c. 1912. (Bul. 164) 2t4p. Sopl. soc. 

1907. (Bul. 121) 212p. 63pl 5oc. 1913. (Bul. 173) 158p. il. 29pl. 4oc. 

1908. (Bul. 133) 234p. 390pl. map. 4oc. TOA (Silez7) 7A pede saiplasAges 

1909. (Bul. 140) 230p. 4ipl. 2 maps, 4 charts. 1915. (Bul. 187) ro2p. il. 58pl. 5 maps. 50c, 
Out of print 1916. (Bul. 196) 308p. il. 5opl. maps 55¢c. 


These reports cover the reports of the State Geologist and of the State Paleontologist. 
Bound also with the museum reports of which they form a part. 


Geologist’s annual reports 1881-date. Rep’ts 1, 3-13, 17-date, 8vo; 2 
14-16, 4to. 


In 1898 the paleontologic work of the State was made distinct from the geologic and was 
reported separately from 1899-1903. The two departments were reunited in 1904, and are 
now reported in the Director’s report. 

The annual reports of the original Natural History Survey, 1837-41, are out of print. 

Reports 1-4, 1881-84, were published only in separate form. Of the 5th report 4 pages 
were reprinted in the 39th museum report, and a supplement to the 6th report was included 
in the 40th museum report. The 7th and subsequent reports are included in the 41st and 
following museum reports, except that certain lithographic plates in the 11th report (1891) 
and 13th (1893) are omitted from the 45th and 47th museum reports. 

Separate volumes of the following only are available. 


Report Price Report Price Report Price 
I2 (1892) $.50 17 $.75 21 $.40 
I4 o's 18 3S 22 .40 
i Ohio 2 19 .40 23 .45 
16 I 20 .50 [See Director’s annual reports] 


Paleontologist’s annual reports 1899—date. 


See first note under Geologist’s annual reports. 

Bound also with museum reports of which they form a part. Reports for 1899 and 1900 
may be had for 20c each. hose for 1901-3 were issued as bulletins. In 1904 combined 
with the Director’s report. 


Entomologist’s annual reports on the injurious and other insects of the 
State of New York 1882-date. 


Reports 3-20 bound also with museum reports 40-46, 48-58 of which they form a part. 
Since 1898 these reports have been issued as bulletins. Reports 3-4, 17 are out of print, 
other reports with prices are: 


Report Price Report Price Report Price 
I $1 13 Out of print 24 (Bul. 134) $ 35 
2 .30 iA (BHU, 22) S5 BO Bs (CO Batali 5 BE 
5 25 15e Cin psi) abs 20 (si LAT) PSS 
6 15 TOPCO) 225 27 (ile TSS) ia 
7 720) TOC in 64) 20 28m (Gero) 40 
8 25 ne) (( 710) LS AX ete SUAS Gale 
9 nos 2Or Cre O7) eed 0 se oF aeheXo))) | ey 'sK0) 
Io 5 BE oy (CW S¥oyit)) 9 G8 201i L860) 35 
II 325 BA shi) 525 Bent 198) Ao 
12 Boo 23m i 124) e275 Sou Cue zoe 35 


The University of the State of New York 


Reports 2, 8-12 may also be obtained bound in cloth at 25c each in addition to the price 
given above. 


Botanist’s annual reports 1867-date. 

Bound also with museum reports 21-date of which they form a part; the first Botanist’s 
report appeared in the 2Ist museum report and is numbered 21. Reports 21-24, 29, 31-41 
were not published separately. 

Separate reports for 1871-74, 1876, 1888-98 are out of print. Report for 1899 may be had 
for 20c; 1900 for 50c. Since 1901 these reports have been issued as bulletins. 

Descriptions and illustrations of edible, poisonous and unwholesome fungi of New York 
have also been published in volumes 1 and 3 of the 48th (1894) museum report and in volume 
1 of the 49th (1895), 51st (1897), 52d (1898), 54th (1900), 55th (1901), in volume 4 of the 
56th (1902), in volume 2 of the 57th (1903), in volume 4 of the 58th (1904), in volume 2 
of the 59th (1905), in volume 1 of the 60th (1906), in volume 2 of the 61st (1907), 62d 
(1908), 63d (1909), 64th (1910), 65th (1911), v. 2 of the 66th (1912) reports. The descriptions 
and illustrations of ‘edible and unwholesome species contained in the 4oth, 51st and 52d reports 
have been revised and rearranged, and, combined with others more recently prepared, constitute 
Museum Memoir 4. 


Museum bulletins 1887-date. 8vo.° To advance subscribers, $2 a year, or $1 
a year for division (1) geology, economic geology, paleontology, mineralogy; 
50c each for division (2) general zoology, archeology, miscellaneous, (3) botany, 
(4) entomology. 


Bulletins are grouped in the list on the following pages according to divisions. 
The divisions to which bulletins belong are as follows: 


1 Zoology 59 Entomology 117 Archeology 
2 Botany 60 Zoology 118 Geology 
3 Economic Geology 61 Economic Geology I19 Economic Geology 
4 Mineralogy 62 Miscellaneous 120 i 
5 Entomology 63 Geology 121 Director’s report for 1¢07 
6 a 64 Entomology 122 Botany 
7 Economic Geology 65 Paleontology 123 Economic Geology 
8 Botany 66 Miscellaneous 124 Entomology 
9 Zoology 67 Botany 125 Archeology 
10 Economic Geology 68 Entomology 126 Geology 
II & 69 Paleontology 127 Geology 
12 a 70 Mineralogy 128 a 
13 Entomology 71 Zoology 129 Entomology 
14 Geology 72 Entomology 130 Zoology 
15 Economic Geology 73 Archeology 131 Botany 
16 Archeology 74 Entomology 132 Economic Geology 
17 Economic Geology 75 Botany 133 Director’s report for 1908 
18 Archeology 76 Entomology 134 Entomology 
19 Geology 77 Geology 135 Geology 
20 Entomology 78 Archeology 136 Entomology 
21 Geology 79 Entomology 137 Geology 
22 Archeology 80 Paleontology 138 . 
23 Entomology 81 Geology 139 Botany 
24 ¢ 82 ne I40 Director’s report for 1909 
25 Botany 83 ue TAI Entomology 
26 Entomology 84 f I42 Economic Geology 
27 cS 85 Economic Geology I43 3 
28 Botany 86 Entomology 144 Archeology 
29 Zoology - 87 Archeology 145 Geology 
30 Economic Geology 88 Zoology 146 i 
31 Entomology 89 Archeology 147 Entomology 
32 Archeology 90 Paleontology 148 Geology 
33 Zoology 91 Zoology I49 Director’s report for 1910 
34 Geology 92 Paleontology 150 Botany 
35 Economic Geology 93 Economic Geology I51 Economic Geology 
36 Entomology 94 Botany : 152 Geology 
37 i 95 Geology 153 
38 Zoology 06 ne 154 te 
39 Paleontology 97 Entomology 155 Entomology 
40 Zoology 98 Mineralogy 1560 a 
4t Archeology 99 Paleontology 157 Botany 
42 Geology 100 Economic Geology 158 Director’s report for 1911 
43 Zoology ; tor Paleontology 159 Geology 
44 Economic Geology 102 Economic Geology 160 : 
45 Paleontology 103 Entomology 161 Economic Geology 
46 Entomology I04 i; 162 Geology 
AT iB 105 Botany 163 Archeology 
48 Geology 106 Geology 164 Director’s report for 1912 
49 Paleontology 107 Geology and Paleontology 165 Entomology 
50 Archeology 108 Archeology 166 Economic Geology 
51 Zoology 109 Entomology - 167 Botany 
52 Paleontology IIo a 168 Geology 
53 Entomology ~— Irzr Geology 169 is 
54 Botany Ir2 Economic Geology ~- 170 i: 
55 Archeology 113 Archeology 17 ie i 
56 Geology I14 Geology 172 ae 
57 Entomology IIs uD 173 Director’s report fo ~9 3 


58 Mineralogy 116 Botany 174 Economic Geolo ty 


MUSEUM PUBLICATIONS 


175 Entomology 186 Entomology 197 Botany 
176 Botany 187 Director’s report for I915 198 Entomology 
177 Director’s report for 1914 188 Botany 199 Geology 
178 Economic Geology 189 Geology 200 Entomology 
179 Botany I90 201 Economic Geology 
180 Entomology IOL te 202 Entomology 
181 Economic Geology 192 c 203-204. Economic Geology 
182 Geology 193 e 205-206 Botany 
183 Geology 194 Entomology 207-208 Director’s report for 
184 Archeology 195 Geology IQI7 
185 Geology 196 Director’s report for 1916 
Bulletins are also found with the annual reports of the museum as follows: 
Bulletin Report Bulletin Report Bulletin Report Bulletin Report 
12-15 48, v. I 78 See I17 60, v. 3 165-67 6GsivzN2 
Ow 17 50, v. I 79 Bila Wa lg ite 4 1aee) 60, v.I 168-70 66, v. I 
18, 19 Sit, 37 2 80 iq We iq jotnalt I19Q-21 OlenvVanie i7t—710 67 
20-25 2 even L 81, 82 58, v. 3 122 61, v.2 177-80 68 
26-31 SY Nias 1b 83, 84 58, v. I 123 OLA Vent Cir 690, v. 2 
32-34 RAM ven 85 58, v. 2 I24 Olg Vaz) 182 ses OOsnvanL 
35, 36 54, Vv. 2 86 58, Vv. 5 125 OAs ii Butea 690, v. 2 
37-44 5A, Vv. 3 87-89 58, v.4 126-28 OZFAVAN TOS 690, v. I 
45-48 Bile Vg Ll 90 58, v. 3 129 ODF ivi 2 SO 60, v. 2 
49-54 55 91 58, v. 4 130 62,Vv.3 187 69, v. I 
55 56, v. 4 92 58, v. 3 THs 2 OL vee 188 69, v. 2 
56 BOm Vie 93 58, v. 2 133 O2iva LE r8o 60, v. I 
57 56, v- 3 94 58, v. 4 134 62,v.2 190 69, v. 2 
58 BOsvene 95, 96 Savant 135 OR, Wo i 
59, 60 56, v. 3 907 58, Vv. 5 136 63, v.2 Memoir 
I 6), Wo. at 98, 99 Be) Wo 2B RG, 13ks} O85 445 hw 49, ZandesOlvere 
62 56, v.4 100 590, v- I 139 OB Wo Bo By Zt B35 Wo 2 
63 SOnaver2 IOI 50, v. 2 I40 OB Ao Le Ss © So Wo B 
64 Op Wo 6 102 Onnvienl I4I-43 Of 2 57,V-.4 
65 56, v. 2 103-5 SOmvene I44 OAR WA 2) Ss pte OuvenS 
66, 67 56, v.4 106 59, v. I TAKAO MOAN Vania Se pt) 2 Oy Wo Zl 
SOUS 107 60, v. 2 TAT UAC OAT Ale Olp Gal 60, v. 4 
69 5Ouvere 108 60, v. 3 149 OA Vela Os pbe2 62,v.4 
70, 7 B75 So iy 1 HOG, UUO) OO Wo i U5O=G4, OAL Wo BO 60, v. 5 
72 Ry Wo Uy (OB Bo aes 60, v. 2 USS=57/ (O55 Wo @. iit OIivens 
73 Ral ie 2 I12 OOtnVeL LE URS00) OS, Wo Asie OB. jt 2 
74 RIA AS Ry 11s HIER} 60, v. 3 161 O52 Ubi A Cows 3 
75 Hanis BZ II4 60, v. I 162 OH, Wo ie 363} Bs Wo Zl 
76 B75 Nie ey fo A was 60, v. 2 163 CON VAIZ ELAR Van EO SPnVenS 
77 Bp Wo Tp iors 2h Cie) 60, v. I 164 COM Veen WAsp Vero OS Mayan) 


The figures at the beginning of each entry in the following list indicate its number as a 
museum bulletin. 


Geology and Paleontology. 14 Kemp, J. F. Geology of Moriah and West- 
port Townships, Essex Co., N. Y., with notes on the iron mines. 38p. 
1eV7 pl. 2 maps: sept. 1895. Livec: 

19 Merrill, F. J. H. Guide to the Study of the Geological Collections of 
the New York State Museum. 164p. 119 pl. map. Nov. 1898: Out of print. 

21 Kemp, J. F. Geology of the Lake Placid Region. 24p. Ipl. map. Sept. 
MAQGen0 Tee. 

34 Cumings, E. R. Lower Silurian System of Eastern Montgomery County; 
Prosser, C. S. Notes on the Stratigraphy of Mohawk Valley and Sara- 
toga County, N. Y. 74p.14pl.map. May 1900. I5c. 

39 Clarke, J. M.; Simpson, G. B. & Loomis, F. B. Paleontologic Papers 1. 
72p. il. 16pl. Oct. 1900. ,15¢. 


Contents: Clarke, J. M. A Remarkable Occurrence of Orthoceras in the Oneonta Beds of 
the Chenango Valley, N. Y 


Paropsonema cryptophya; a Peculiar Echinoderm from the Intumescens-zone 

(Portage Beds) of Western New York. 
—— Dictyonine Hexactinellid Sponges from the Upper Devonic of New York. 
—— The Water Biscuit of Squaw Island, Canandaigua Lake, N. Y. 
Simpson, G. B. Preliminary Descriptions of New Genera of Paleozoic Rugose Corals. 
Loomis, F. B. Siluric Fungi from Western New York. 

42 Ruedemann, Rudolf. Hudson River Beds near Albany and Their Taxo- 
nomic Equivalents. 116p.2pl.map. Apr.1901. 265c. 

45 Grabau, A. W. Geology and Paleontology of Niagara Falls and Vicinity. 
286p. il. 18pl. map. Apr. 1901. 65c; cloth, 90c. 

48 Woodworth, J. B. Pleistocene Geology of Nassau County and Borough 
of Queens. 58p.il. 8pl.map. Dec. 1901. Out of print. 

49 Ruedemann, Rudolf; Clarke, J.M. & Wood, Elvira. Paleontologic 
Papers 2. 240p. 13pl..) Dec. r901.- Out of print. 


THE UNIVERSITY OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK 


Contents: Ruedemann, Rudolf. Trenton Conglomerate of Rysedorph Hill. 

Clarke, J. M. Limestones of Central and Western New York Interbedded’ with Bitumi- 
nous Shales of the Marcellus Stage. 

Wood, Elvira. Marcellus Limestones of Lancaster, Erie Co., N. Y. 

Clarke, J. M. New Agelacrinites. 

—— Value of Amnigenia as an Indicator of Fresh-water Deposits during the Devonic of 
New York, Ireland and the Rhineland. 


e2 Clarke, J. M. Report of the State Paleontologist 1901. 280p. il. t1opl. 
map, 1 tab. July 1902. 4oc. 

56 Merrill, F. J. H. Description of the State Geologic Map of I901. 4a2p. 
2 maps, tab. Nov. 1902. Free. 

63 Clarke, J. M. & Luther, D. D. Stratigraphy of Canandaigua and Naples 
Quadrangles. 78p. map. June 1904. 25c. 

65 Clarke, J. M. Catalogue of Type Specimens of Paleozoic Fossils in the 
New York State Museum. 848p. May 1903. $1.20, cloth. 

69 —— Report of the State Paleontologist 1902. 464p. 52pl. 7 maps. Nov. 
1903. $1, cloth. 

77 Cushing, H. P. Geology of the Vicinity of Little Falls, Herkimer Co. 
g8p. il. 15pl.2 maps. Jan. 1905. 30c. 

80 Clarke, J. M. Report of the State Paleontologist 1903. 396p. 2gpl. 
2 maps. Feb. 1905. 85c, cloth. 

81 Clarke, J. M. & Luther, D. D. Watkins and Elmira Quadrangles. 32p. 
map. Mar. 1905. 265c. . 
82 —— Geologic Map of the Tully Quadrangle. gop. map. Apr. 1905. 20c. 
83 Woodworth, J. B. Pleistocene Geology of the Mooers Quadrangle. 62p. 

25pl.map. June 1905. 25c. 

84 —— Ancient Water Levels of the Champlain and Hudson Valleys. 206p. 
il. rrpl.18 maps. July 1905. 465c. 

go Ruedemann, Rudolf. Cephalopoda of Beekmantown and Chazy For 
mations of Champlain Basin. 224p. il. 38pl. May 1906. 785c, cloth. 

92 Grabau, A. W. Guide to the Geology and Paleontology of the Schoharie 
Region. 314p. il. 26pl. map. Apr. 1906. 75Cc, cloth. 

95 Cushing, H. P. Geology of the Northern Adirondack Region. 188p. 
I5pl. 3 maps. Sept. 1905. 30c. 

96 Ogilvie, 1. H. Geology of the Paradox Lake Quadrangle. 54p. il. 17pl. 
map. Dec. 1905. 30c. 

99 Luther, D. D. Geology of the Buffalo Quadrangle. 32p. map. May 
1906. 20c. 

101 —— Geology of the Penn Yan-Hammondsport Quadrangles. 28p. map. 
July 1906. Out of print. 

106 Fairchild, H. L. Glacial Waters in the Erie Basin. 88p. 14pl. 9 maps. 
Feb. 1907. Out of print. 

107 Woodworth, J. B.; Hartnagel, C. A.; Whitlock, H. P.; Hudson, G. H.; 
Clarke, J. M.; White, David & Berkey, C. P. Geological Papers. 388p. 
54pl. map. May 1907. 90¢, cloth. 

Contents: Woodworth, J. B. Postglacial Faults of Eastern New York. 
Hartnagel, C. A. Stratigraphic Relations ot the Oneida Conglomerate. 

Upper Siluric and Lower Devonic Formations of the Skunnemunk Mountain Region 

Whitlock, H. P. Minerals from Lyon Mountain, Clinton Co. 

Hudson, G. H. On Some Pelmatozoa from the Chazy Limestone of New York. 

Clarke, J. M. Some New Devonic Fossils. 

An Interesting Style of Sand-filled Vein. 

—— Eurypterus Shales of the Shawangunk Mountains in Eastern New York. 

White, David. A Remarkable Fossil Tree Trunk from the Middle Devonic of New York. 


Berkey, C. P. Structural and Stratigraphic Features of the Basal Gneisses of the High- 
lands. 


111 Fairchild, H. L. Drumlins of New York. 6op. 28pl. 19 maps. July 
1907. Out ‘of print. 

114 Hartnagel, C. A. Geologic Map of the Rochester and Ontario Beach 
Quadrangles. 36p. map. Aug. 1907. 20c 

=r5 Cushing, “cll Geology torn tae Long Lake Quadrangle. 88p. 2opl. 
OAHOG AOS LOO7/a. Le 

118 Clarke, J. M. & Luther, D. D. Geologic Maps and Descriptions of the 
Portage and Nunda Quadrangles including a map of Letchworth Park. 
op. 16pl.4 maps. Jan. 1908. 35c. 


MUSEUM PUBLICATIONS 


126 Miller, W. J. Geology of the Remsen Quadrangle. 54p. il. 11pl. map. 
Jan. 1909. 25c. 

127 Fairchild, H. L. Glacial Waters in Ceatral New York. 64p. 27pl. 15 
maps. Mar. 1909. 40>. 

128 Luther, D. D. Geology of the Geneva-Ovid Quadrangles. 44p. map. 
Apr. 1909. 20c. 

135 Miller, W. J. Geology of the Port Leyden Quadrangle, Lewis County, 
Nees 1629) teri plamap:. jan. foro. 125¢: 

137 Luther, D. D. Geology of the Auburn-Genoa Quadrangles. 36p. map. 
Var Toros | 20c: 

138 Kemp, J. F. & Ruedemann, Rudolf. Geology of the Elizabethtown 
and Port Henrv Quadrangles. 176p.. il. 2opl. 3 maps. Apr. I9QI0., 40c. 

msecushines He Pr (Rairchild)) Hb.) Riuedemann, Rudolf’ & Smyth, C9 He 
Geology of the Thousand Islands Region. trg4p. il. 62pl. 6 maps. Dec. 
1910. $1, cloth. 

146 Berkey, C. P. Geologic Features and Problems of the New York City 
(Catskill) Aqueduct. 286p. il. 38pl. maps. Feb. t911. 75c; $1, cloth. 

148 Gordon, C. E. Geology of the Poughkeepsie Quadrangle. 122p. il. 
Zope Maps APL etoile .30C- 

152 Luther, D. D. Geology of the Honeoye-Wayland Quadrangles. 3op. 
mapa Oct. LOlls: 20c. 

153 Miller, William J. Geology of the Broadalbin Quadrangle, Fulton- 
Saratoga Counties, New York. 66p. il. 8pl. map. Dec. I91I. 25¢. 

154 Stoller, James H. Glacial Geology of the Schenectady Quadrangle. 44p. 
@plemap-. Dec. 1911.  20e. 

159 Kemp, James I*. The Mineral Springs of Saratoga. 8op. il. 3pl. Apr. 
TOMS, TSC. 

160 Fairchild, H. L. Glacial Waters in the Black and Mohawk Valleys. 48p. 
il. 8pl.14 maps. May 1912. 50c. 

162 Ruedemann, Rudolf. The Lower Siluric Shales of the Mohawk Valley. 
M2 Poles le WAS TOD. 5c: 

168 Miller, William J. Geological History of New Yok State. 1I30p. 43pl. 
io maps. Dec. 1913. 40c. 

169 Cushing, H. P. & Ruedemann, Rudolf. Geology of Saratoga Springs and 
Vicinity. 178p. il. 2opl.map. Feb. 1914. 40c. 

170 Miller, William J. Geology of the North Creek Quadrangle. gop. il. r4pl. 
Heb wrong. (25¢: 

171 Hopkins, T. C. The Geology of the Syracuse Quadrangle. 8op. il. 2opl. 
map. - July 1914. 25c. 

172 Luther, D. D. go celeey of the Attica and Depew Quadrangles. 32p. map. 
August 1914. I5 

182 Miller, Willian i. The Geology of the Lake Pleasant Quadrangle. 56p. 
HeLOpl map: | Heb) 19onG. 925¢- 

183 Stoller, James H. Glacial Geology of the Saratoga Quadrangle. 5p. il. 
re pieiniap | Vat ty holon 25c: 

185 Martin, James C. The Precambrian Rocks of the Canton Quadrangle. 
PZ p. 11. 20pl. map: - May 1; 1916. 30c: 

189 Ruedemann, Rudolf. Paleontologic Contributions from the New York State 
Museum. 225p.il. 36 pl. Sept. 1916. 5oc. 

191 Cushing, H. P. Geology of the Vicinity of Ogdensburz. ae il. 6pl. map. 
Nov. 1916. °25¢: 

192 Miller, William J. Geology of the Blue Mountain Quadrangle. 68p. il. 
Bipl. map. DWecr1o16:-.25¢: 

193 the Adirondack Mountains: Yo7p. i) Zopl 2maps Jans 1917.  35e: 

195 Fairchild, H. L. Postglacial Features of the Upper Hudson Valley. 22p. 
map. Mar 1, 1917. -25¢. 

Crosby, W.O. Geology of Long Island. In preparation. 

Stoller, J. H. Glacial Geology of the Cohoes Quadrangle. Jn press. 

Chadwick, George H. Paleozoic Rocks of the Canton Quadrangle. In press. 

Luther, D. D. Geology of the Phelps Quadrangle. In preparation. 

—— Geology of the Eden-Silver Creek Quadrangles. Prepared. 

—— Geology of the Brockport-Hamlin and Albion-Oak Orchard Quadrangles. 
Prepared, 


THE UNIVERSITY OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK 


Geology of the Medina-Ridgeway and Lockport-Olcott Quadrangles. 

Prepared. 

Geology of the Caledonia-Batavia Quadrangles. Prepared. 

Smyth, C. H., jr., & Buddington, A. F. Geology of the Lake Bonaparte Quad- 
rangle. In press. 

Miller, W. J. Geology of the Lake Placid Quadrangle. In press. 

Geology of the Schroon Lake Quadrangle. In press. 

Fairchild, H. L. Pleistocene Marine Submergence of the Hudson, Champlain 
and St Lawrence Valleys. In press. 

Ruedemann, R. The Utica and Lorraine Formations of New York. In 
preparation. 


Whitnall, H.O. Geology of the Morrisville Quadrangle. Prepared. 

Hudson, G. H. Geology of Valcour Island. . In preparation. 

Economic Geology. 3 Smock, J.C. Building Stone in the State of New York. 
154p. Mar. 1888. 30c. 

First Report on the Iron Mines and Iron Ore Districts in the State 
of New York. 78p. map. June 1889. 25c. 

10 Building Stone in New York. 210p. map, tab. Sept. 1890. 4oc. 

tz Merrill, F. J. H. Salt and Gypsum Industries of New York. 94p. 12pl. 
2rMaps, wl) tabs. vA pr TOOs ISOC: ’ 

12 Ries, Heinrich. Clay Industries of New York. 174p. il. ipl. map. Mar. 
1895. 30c. 

15 Merrill, F. J. H. Mineral Resources of New York. 240p. 2. maps. 
Sept. 1895. [50c] 

Road Materials and Road Building in New York. 52p. 14pl 

2 maps. | Oct. 1897. | 15e: 

30 Orton, Edward. Petroleum and Natural Gas in New York. 136p. il. 
3 maps. Nov. 1899. 1I5c. 

35 Ries, Heinrich. Clays of New York; Their Properties and Uses. 456p. 
140pl.map. June 1900. §$1, cloth. 

Lime and Cement Industries of New York; Eckel, E. C. Chapters 

on the Cement Industry. 332p. 1oIpl. 2 maps. Dec. 1901. 8§c, cloth. 

61 Dickinson, H. T. Quarries of Bluestone and Other Sandstones in New 
York. TIP: 18pl. 2 maps. Mar. 1903. 35c. 

85 Rafter, G. W. Hydrology of New York State. 902p. il. 44pl. 5 maps. 
May ey $1.50, cloth. 

93 Newland, D. H. Mining and Quarry Industry of New York. 78p 
July 1905. Out of print. 

too McCourt, W. E. Fire Tests of Some New York Building Stones. 4op. 
26pl. Feb. 1906. 15¢c. 

102 Newland, D. H. Mining and Quarry Industry of New York 1905. 
162p. June 1906 25c: 

112 Mining and Quarry Industry of New York 1906. 82p. July 
1907. Out of print. 

119 —— & Kemp, J. F. Geology of the Adirondack Magnetic Iron Ores 
with a Report on the Mineville-Port Henry Mine Group. 184p. 14pl. 
8 maps. Apr. 1908. 35c. 

120 Newland, D. H. Mining and Quarry Industry of New York 1907. 82p. 
July 1908. 15¢c. 

123 & Hartnagel, C. A. Iron Ores of the Clinton Formation in New 
York State. 76p.il. 14pl.3 maps. Nov. 1908. 25c. 

132 Newland, D.H. Mining and Quarry Industry of New York 1908. 98p. 
July 1909. 15¢c. 

142 Mining and Quarry Industry of New York for 1909. 98p. Aug. 
TOTO: ase: 

143 —— Gypsum Deposits of New York. 94p.20pl.4 maps. Oct. 1910. 35c. 


17 


44 


I51 Mining and Quarry Industry of New Yorki1910. 82p. JuneI9QII. 15¢c. 

161 Mining and Quarry Industry of New York I911I. 114p. July 1912. 20c. 

166 Mining and’ Quarry Industry of New York 1912. 114p. Aug. 1913. 
20¢. 

1'74 Mining and Quarry Industry of New York 1913. 1It1p. Dec. 1914 


20¢€. 


MUSEUM PUBLICATIONS 


178 —— Mining and Quarry Industry of New York 1914. 88p. Nov. 1915. 15c. 
181 —— The Quarry Materials of New York. 212p. 34pl. Jan. 1916. 40c. 
190 —— Mining and Quarry Industry of New York 1915. 92p. Oct.1916. 15c. 


—— Mining and Quarry Industry of New York 1916 (see Mus. Bul. 196). 

199 Alling, Harold L. The Adirondack Graphite Deposits. 15o0p.il. July 1, 
O07:  30C: 

201 Smyth, C. H., jr. Genesis of the Zinc Ores of the Edwards District, St 
iwawrence county, Ney. 1322p: 12pls) Sept. 1, 1917. . 20c. 

203-204 Colony, R. J. High Grade Silica Materials for Glass, Refractories 
andeAbrasives: 21 p,al. Nov.—Dee. 1917. -c. 

Newland, D. H. Mining and Quarry Industry of New York 1917. In 
preparation. 


‘Mineralogy. 4 Nason, F. L. Some New York Minerals and Their Localities 
22 pst pl. Ais: 1888. Free. 

58 Whitlock, H. P. Guide to the Mineralogic Collections of the New York 
State Museum. 150p. il. 39pl. 11 models. Sept. 1902. 40c. 

70 —— New York Mineral Localities. r1op. Oct. 1903. 20c. 

98 —— Contributions from the Mineralogic Laboratory. 38p. 7pl. Dec 
1905. Out of print. 


Zoology. 1 Marshall, W. B. Preliminary List of New York Unionidae . 
20p. Mar. 1892. Free. 

9 Beaks of Unionidae Inhabiting the Vicinity of Albany, N. Y. 3op. 
Ipl. Aug. 1890. Free. 

29 Miller, G. S., jr. Preliminary List of New York Mammals. 124p. Oct 
1899. I5c. 

33 Farr, M.S. Check List 0° New York Birds. 224p. Apr. 1900. 25c. 

38 Miller, G. S., jr. Key to the Land Mammals of Northeastern North 
America. Toop. Oct; 1900:. 15e¢: 

40 Simpson, G. B. Anatomy and Physiology of Polygyra albolabris and 
Limax maximus and Embryology of Limax maximus. 82p. 28pl. Oct. 
TOOL) | 25C. 

43 Kellogg, J. L. Clam and Scallop Industries of New York. 36p. 2pl. 
map. Apr. Igor. Free. 

51 Eckel, E. C. & Paulmier, F. C. Catalogue of Reptiles and Batrachians 
of New York. 64p.il. rpl. Apr. 1902. Out of print. 


Eckel, E. C. Serpents of Northeastern United States. 
Paulmier, F.C. Lizards, Tortoises and Batrachians of New York. 


eee sa H. Catalogue of the Fishes of New York. 784p. Feb. 1903 

I, clot 

71 Kellogg, J. L. Feeding Habits and Growth of Venus mercenaria. 30p 
4pl. Sept: 1903. Free. 

88 Letson, Elizabeth J. Check List of the Mollusca of New York. 116p. 
May 1905. 20c. 

gt Paulmier, F. C. Higher Crustacea of New York City. 78p. il. June 
1905. 20¢. 

13) Shufeldt, R. W. Osteology of Birds. 382p. il. 26pl. May 1909. 5oc. 


Entomology. 5 Lintner, J. A. White Grub of the May Beetle. 34p. il. 
Nov. 1888. Free. 

6 Cut-worms. 38p.il. Nov. 1888. Free. 

13 San José Scale and Some Destructive Insects of New York State. 
54p. 7pl. Apr. 1895. 15¢c. 

20 elt, E. P. Elm Leaf Beetle in New York State. A6p. il) Spl june 
1898. Free. 


See 57. 


14th Report of the State Entomologist 1898. 4150p. il. gpl. Dec. 
1898. 20c. 

Memorial of the Life and Entomologic Work of J. A. Lintner Ph.D. 
State Entomologist 1874-98; Index to Entomologist’s Reports 1-13. 316p. 
Ipl. Oct. 1899. 35¢c. 

Supplement to 14th report of the State"Entomologist. 


THE UNIVERSITY OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK 


26 —— Collection, Preservation and Distribution of New York Insects. 
36p. il. Apr. 1899. Out of print. 
27 Shade Tree Pests in New York State. 26p. il. 5pl. May 1899. Out 


of print. 
31 —— 15th Report of the State Entomologist 18)9. 128p. June I900 


I5¢c. 

36 —— 16th Report of the State Entomologist 1900. 118p. 16pl. Mar. 
1901s 25c: 

37 —— Catalogue of Some of the More Important Injurious and Beneficial 
Insects of New York State. 54p.il. Sept. 1900. Free. 

46 —— Scale Insects of Importance and a List of the Species in New York 
State. 94p.il. 15pl. Jume 1901. 25Cc. 

47 Needham, J. G. & Betten, Corne'ius. Aquatic Insects in the Adiron- 
dacks. 234p. il. 36pl. Sept. 1901. 45¢c. 

53 Felt, E. Pi 17th Report of the State Entomologist Toor, 232 eile sGple 
Aug. 1902. Out of print. 

57 —— Elm Leaf Beetle in New York State. 46p. il. 8pl. Aug. 1902. 
Out of print. 
This is a revision of Bulletin 20 containing the more essential facts observed since that 

was prepared. 


59 —— Grapevine Root Worm. 4op. 6pl. Dec. 1902. 15c. 

See 72. 

64 —— 18th Report of the State Entomologist 1902. t11op. 6pl. May 
1903. 20C. 


68 Needham, J. G. & others. Aquatic Insects in New York. 322p. 5apl. 
Aug. 1903. 80c, cloth. 

72 Felt, E. P. Grapevine Root Worm. 58p.13pl. Nov. 1903. 20c. 
This is a revision of Bulletin 59 containing the more essential facts observed sin e that 

was prepared. 

74 & Joutel, L. H. Monograph of the Genus Saperda. 88p. r4pl- 
junesioo“ 2 5c: 

76 Felt, E. P. roth Report: of the State Entomologist 1903) 5epaep: 
1904. 15¢C. 

79 —— Mosquitos or Culicidae of New York. 164p. il. 57pl. tab. Oct. 


1904. 40c. 
86 Needham, J. G. & others. May Flies and Midges of New York. 352p. 
il. 37pl. June 1905. 80c, cloth. 
97 Felt, E. P. 20th Report of the State Entomologist 1904. 246p. il. 1gpl 
Nov. 1905. 40c. 
103 Gipsy and Brown Tail Moths. 44p.1opl. July 1906. Out of print. 
104 21st Report of the State Entomologist 1905. 144p. Iopl. Aug. 
1906. 25c. 


109 Tussock Moth and Elm Leaf Beetle. 34p. 8pl. Mar. 1907. Out 
of print. 

110 22d Report of the State Entomologist 1906. 3152p. 3pl. June 
1907. 25¢. 

124 23d Report of the State Entomologist 1907. 542p. il. 44pl. Oct. 
1908. 75c. 

129 —— Control of Household Insects. 48p.il. May 1909. Out of print. 

134 24th Report of the State Entomologist 1908. 208p. il. 17pl 
Sept. 1909. 35c. 

136 —— Control of Flies and Other Household Insects. 56p. il. Feb 
I91IO. I15¢. : 


This is a revision of Bulletin 129 containing the more essential facts observed since 
that was prepared. 
141 Felt, E. P. 25th Report of the State Entomologist 1909. 178p. il. 22pl. 


july 1o1ro. s25e: 
147 26th Report of the State Entomologist 1910. 182p. il. 35pl. Mar. 


TOMI a3 5C: . 
155 27th Report of the State Entomologist 1911. 198p. il. 27pl. Jan. 


I9I2. 40C. 


MUSEUM PUBLICATIONS 


156 —— Elm Leaf Beetle and White-Marked Tussock Moth. 35p. 8pl. Jan. 
nO 2c: 

163 —— 28th Report of the State Entomologist 1912. 266p.14pl. July 1913 
40c. 

175 —— 29th Report of the State Entomologist 1913. 258p. 16pl. April 
MOMs 45) | 

180 —— 30th Report of the State Entomologist 1914. 336p. il. I9pl. Jan. 
1916. 50c. 

186 —— 31st Report of the State Entomologist 1915. 215p. tl. 18pl. June 
Ie eho a5C: 

194 —— Household and Camp Insects. 84p.il. Feb.1, 1917. I5c. 

198 32d Report of the State Entomologist 1916. 276p. il. 8pl. June.1, 
MOM. WAC: 

200 Key to American Insect Galls. 31op. il. 16pl. August, 1917. Out 
of print. 

202 33d Report of the State Entomologist 1917. 240p. il. 12pl. 


35¢. 
Betten, Cornelius. Report on the Aquatic Insects of New York. Jn press. 


Botany. 2 Peck, C. H. Contributions to the Botany of the State of New 
More 72 ps 2plem Mayi1ss 7) 6 20c: 


8 —— Boleti of the United States. 98p. Sept. 1889. Out of print. 

25 —— Report of the State Botanist 1898. 76p. 5pl. Oct. 1899. Out of print. 

28 —— Plants of North Elba. 206p. map. June 1899. 20¢. 

54 —— Report of the State Botanist 1901. 58p. 7pl. Nov. 1902. 40c. 

67 —— Report of the State Botanist 1902. 196p. 5pl. May 1903. 50c. 

75 —— Report of the State Botanist 1903. 7op. 4pl. 1904. 40c. 

94 —— Report of the State Botanist 1904. 60p. 10pl. July 1905. 4oc. 
105 —— Report of the State Botanist 1905. . I108p. 12pl. Aug. 1906. 50c 
116 —— Report of the State Botanist 1906. 120p.6 pl. July 1907. 365c. 
122 —— Report of the State Botanist 1907. 178p. 5pl. Aug. 1908. 40c. 
131 —— Report of the State Botanist 1908. 202p. 4pl.. July 1909. 4oc. 
139 —— Report of the State Botanist 1909. 116p. 1opl. May 1910. 45c. 
150 —— Report of the State Botanist 1910. 1100p. 5pl. May I91I. 30c. 
157 —— Report of the State Botanist 1911. 140p.9pl. Mar. 1912. 35c. 
167 —— Report of the State Botanist 1912. 138p. 4pl. Sept. 1913. 30c. 
176 —— Report of the State Botanist 1913. 78p.17pl. June 1915. 20c. 
179 —— Report of the State Botanist 1914. 108p.1pl. Dec. 1915. 20c. 


188 House, H.'D. Report of the State Botanist 1915. 118p. il. a4pl. Aug. 1, 
TOLGs 30C. 
1907 INepOrtsOnbnessratceboOtanisy JOLoy 122). ripl. May 1, 197.) 306: 


House, H. D. Report of the State Botanist 1917. In press. 


Archeology. 16 Beauchamp, W. M. Aboriginal Chipped Stone Implements 
of New York. “86p. 23pl. Oct. 1897. 25¢c. 


18 —— Polished Stone Articles Used by the New York Aborigines. 104p 
35pl. Nov. 1897. 25c. 

22 —— Earthenware of the New York Aborigines. 78p. 33pl. Oct. 1898. 
ZC: 

32 —— Aboriginal. Occupation of New York. 190p. 16pl. 2 maps. Mar 
1900. 30c. 

41 —— Wampum and Shell Articles Used by New York Indians. 166p 


28pl. Mar. 1901. Out of print. 


50 Horn and Bone Implements of the New York Indians. 1112p. 43pl. 
Mar. 1902. Out of print. 

55 —— Metallic Implements of the New York Indians. g4p. 38pl. June 
1902. 25¢. 

73 —— Metallic Ornaments of the New York Indians. 122p. 37pl. Dec. 


1903. Out of print. 

History of the New York Iroquois. 340p. 17pl. map. Feb. 1905. 
Out of print. 

87 —— Perch Lake Mounds. 84p.12pl. Apr. 1905. 20¢. 


78 


THE UNIVERSITY OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK 


89 —— Aboriginal Use of Wood in New York. tgop. 35pl. June 1905. 
Out of print. 

108 —— Aboriginal Place Names of New York. 336p. May 1907. Out of 
print. ‘ 


II3 Civil, Religious and Mourning Councils and Ceremonies of Adop- 
One) TLSPs pl. ume moO7an 25c: : 

117 Parker, A.’ C: (An Erie Indian Village and Burial (site), aoepaeesprr 
Decw190 72 BOC: 

125 Converse, H. M. & Parker, A. C. Iroquois Myths and Legends. 1096p. 
1: Tip Dee 19038.) e50e 

144 Parker, A. C. Iroquois Uses of Maize and Other Food Plants. 120p. 
il. 31pl. Nov. 1910. Out of print. 

163 —— The Code of Handsome Lake. 144p. 23pl. Nov. 1912. Out of print. 

184 The Constitution of the Five Nations. 158p. 8pl. April 1, 1916. 


Boe: 
—— The Archeologic History of the State of New York. In press. 


Miscellaneous. 62 Merrill, F. J. H. Directory of Natural History Museums 
in United States and Canada. 236p. Apr. 1903. .30c. 

66 Ellis, Mary. Index to Publications of the New York State Natural 
History Survey and New York State Museum 1837-1902. 418p. June 
TOOZs P75 Cn CLOLe. 


Museum memoirs 1889-date. 4to. 

1 Beecher, C. E. & Clarke, J. M. Development of Some Silurian Brachi- 
opoda. 96p. 8pl. Oct. 1889. $1. 

2 Hall, James & Clarke, J. M. Paleozoic Reticulate Sponges. 35o0p. il. 7opl. 
1898. $2, cloth. . 

3 Clarke, J. M. The Oriskany Fauna of Becraft Mountain, Columbia Co., 
ING ies onopl Oct 1900.8 1S0c- 

4 Peck, ©. H. N. Y. Edible Pungi, 1895-99. 106p. 25p!. Nov. 1900emase- 


This includes revised descriptions and illustrations of fungi reported in the 4oth, 51st and 
52d reports of the State Botanist. 


5 Clarke, J. M. & Ruedemann, Rudolf. Guelph Formation and Fauna of 
New York State. 1196p. 2Ipl. July 1903. $1.50, cloth. 

6 Clarke, J. M. Naples Fauna in Western New York. 268p. 26pl. map. 
1904. $2, cloth. 

7 Ruedemann, Rudolf. Graptolites of New York. Pt 1 Graptolites of the 
Lower Beds. 350p.17pl. Feb. 1905. $1.50, cloth. 

8 Felt, E. P. Insects Affecting Park and Woodland Trees. v.1. 46op. 
il. a8pl. Feb. 1906. $2.50, cl_th; v. 2. 548p. il. 22pl. Feb. 1907. $2, cloth. 
$4 for the two volumes. — 

9 Clarke, J. M. Early Devonic of New York and Eastern North America. 
Pt 1. 366p. il. 7opl. 5 maps. Mar. 1908. $2.50, cloth; Pt 2. 250p. il. 36pl. 
Amaps. Sept. 1909. $2, cloth. 

1o Eastman, C. R. The Devonic Fishes of the New York Formations 
2326S pl LOOse sal 25 eNcl OL: 

tr Ruedemann, Rudolf. Graptolites of New York. Pt 2 Graptolites of 
the Higher Beds. 584p. il. 31pl. 2 tab. Apr. 1908. $2.50, cloth. 

12 Eaton, &. Ho Birds of (New York. | v. 1. 501p, 112 “2p eaprememar 
$3, cloth; v.2,719p.il. 64pl. July 1914. $4, cloth. $6 for the two volumes. 
106 colored plates in portfolio $1. 

13 Whitlock, Hi. P: ) Galeitesor New York Toop. 1l5 27 pla, Octane 
cloth. 

14 Clarke, J. M. & Ruedemann, Rudolf. The Eurypterida of New York. v. 1. 
Text. 4gop. il. v.2 Plates. 188p. 88pl. Dec. 1912. $4, cloth. 

15 House, Homer D. Wild Flowers of New York. Jn press. 

Goldring, W. Monograph of the Devonian Crinoids of New York. In 
preparation. 

Pilsbry, H. L. Monograph of the Land and Fresh Water Mollusca of the State 
of New York. In preparation. . 


inn 


MUSEUM PUBLICATIONS 


Natural History of New York. 30 v. il. pl. maps. 4to. Albany 1842-94. 

DIVISION I ZOOLOGY. De Kay, James E. Zoology of New York; or, The 
New York Fauna; comprising detailed descriptions of all the animals 
hitherto observed within the State of New York with brief notices of 
those occasionally found near its borders, and accompanied by appropri- 
ate illustrations. 5v. il. pl. maps. sq. 4to. Albany 1842-44. Out of prant. 
Historical introduction to the series by Gov. W. H. Seward. 178p. 


v.10 ptr Mammalia. 131 + 46p. 33pl. -1842. 


300 copies with hand-colored plates. 
v. 2 pt2 Birds. 12 +- 380p. 141pl. 1844. 
Colored plates. 


. 3.pt3 Reptiles and Amphibia. 7 + 98p. pt 4 Fishes. 15 + 415p. 1842 
pt3-4 bound together. 


v. 4 Plates to accompany v. 3. Reptiles and Amphibia. 23pl. Fishes- 
7opl. 1842. 


300 copies with hand-colored plates. 


Ves pts Wiollusea: 4) 2271p) 40pl. \pt.o) Crustacea. 7Op. r3pl. 1843-44" 
Hand-colored plates; pt5—6 bound together. 4 


DIVISION 2 BOTANY. ‘Torrey, John. Flora of the State of New York; com- 
prising full description; of all the indigenous and naturalized plants hith- 
erto discovered in the State, with remarks on their economical and medical 
properties. 2v. il. pl. sq. 4to. Albany 1843. Out of print. 

v. I Flora of the State of New York. 12 + 484p. 72pl. 1843. 


300 copies with hand-colored plates. 


v. 2 Flora of the State of New York. 572p. 89pl. 1843. 


300 copies with hand-colored plates. 


DIVISION 3 MINERALOGY. Beck, Lewis C. Mineralogy of New York; com- 
prising detailed descriptions of the minerals hitherto found in the State 
of New York, and notices of their uses in the arts and agriculture. il. pl. 
sq. 4to. Albany 1842. Out of print. 

v. I ptr Economical Mineralogy. pt2 Descriptive Mineralogy. 24 + 536p. 
1842. 

8 plates additional to those printed as part of the text. 


DIVISION 4 GEOLOGY. Mather, W. W.; Emmons, Ebenezer; Vanuxem, Lard- 
ner & Hall, James. Geology of New York. gv. il. pl. sq. 4to. Albany 
1842-43. Out of print. 

v. I ptr Mather, W. W. First Geological District. 37 + 653p. 46pl. 1843. 


Vaz eanmons. yl benezer. | second) Geological District. 10) 4-437: 
17pl. 1842. : 

v. 3 pt3 Vanuxem, Lardner. Third Geological District. 306p. 1842. 

v. 4 pt4 Hall, James. Fourth Geological District. 22 + 683p. t1gpl. 
mapa ESA.) 


DIVISION 5 AGRICULTURE. Emmons, Ebenezer. Agriculture of New York; 
comprising an account of the classification, composition and distribution 
of the soils and rocks and the natural waters of the different geological 
formations, together with a condensed view of the meteorology and agri- 
cultural productions of the State. 5v. il. pl. sq. gto. Albany 1846-54. 
Out of print. 

v. I Soils of the State, Their Composition and Distribution. 11 + 37Ip. 2Ipl 
1846. 

v. 2 Analysis of Soils, Plants, Cereals etc. 8 + 343 + 46p. 42pl. 1849. 
With hand-colored plates. 

v. 3 Fruitsetc. 8 +/340p. 1851. 

v. 4 Plates to accompany v. 3. 95pl. 1851. 

Hand-colored. 

v. 5 Insects Injurious to Agriculture. 8 + 272p. 5opl. 1851. 

With hand-colored plates. 


THE UNIVERSITY OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK 


DIVISION 6 PALEONTOLOGY. Hall, James. Paleontology of New York. 8v 
il. pl. sq. 4to. Albany 1847-94. Bound in cloth. 

v. I Organic Remains of the Lower Division of the New York System. . 
23 + 338p. ogopl. 1847. Out of print. 

v. 2 Organic Remains of Lower Middle Division of the New York System. 
ne + 362p. trIo4pl. 1852. Out of print. 

3 Organic Remains of the Lower Helderberg Group and the Oriskany 

deena: pti, text. 12 + 532p. 1859. [$3.50] 

—— pt2 142pl. 1861. [$2.50] 

v. 4 Fossil Brachiopoda of the Upper Helderberg, Hamilton, Portage and 
Chemung Groups. 11 + 1 + 428p. 69p!. 1867. $2.50. 

v. 5 pt 1 Lamellibranchiata 1. Monomyaria of the Upper Helderberg, 
Hamilton and Chemung Groups. 18 + 268p. 45pl. 1884. $2.50. 

—— Lamellibranchiata 2. Dimyaria of the Upper Helderberg, Ham- 

ilton, Portage and Chemung Groups. 62 + 293p. 51pl. 1885. $2.50. 

pt 2 Gasteropoda, Pteropoda and Cephalopoda of the Upper Helder- — 
berg, Hamilton, Portage and Chemung Groups. 2v. 1879. Vv. 5, (text: 
15 + 492p.; v.2. 1I20pl. $2.50 for 2 v. 

—— & Simpson, George B. v. 6 Corals and Bryozoa of the Lower and Up- 
per Helderberg and Hamilton Groups. 24 + 2098p. 67pl. 1887. $2.50. 

—— & Clarke, John M. v. 7 Trilobites and Other Crustacea of the Oris- 
_kany, Upper Helderberg, Hamilton, Portage, Chemung and Catskill 
Groups. 64 + 236p. 46pl. 1888. Cont. supplement to v. 5, pt 2. Ptero- 
poda, Cephalopoda and Annelida. 42p. 18pl. 1888. $2.50. 

—— & Clarke, John M. v. 8 pt 1: Introduction to the Study of the Genera 
of the Paleozoic Brachiopoda. 16 + 367p. 44pl. 1892. $2.50. 

& rae John M. v. 8 pt 2 Paleozoic Brachiopoda. 16 + 394p. 64pl. 

1894. $2.50. 


Catalogue of the Cabinet of Natural History of the State of New York and 
of the Historical and Antiquarian Collection annexed thereto. 242p. 8vo. 
1853. Out of print. 


Handbooks 1893-date. 

New York State Museum. 52p. il. 1902. Out of print. 
Outlines history and work of the museum with list of staff 1902. 

Paleontology. 12p. 1899. Out of print. 


Brief outline of State Museum work in paleontology under heads: Definition; Relation to 
biology; Relation to stratigraphy; History of paleontology in New York. 


Guide to Excursions in the Fossiliferous Rocks of New York 124p. 1899. 
Free. 


Itineraries of 32 trips covering nearly the entire series of Paleozoic rocks, prepared specially 
for the use of teachers and students desiring to acquaint themselves more intimately with the 
classic rocks of this State. 


Entomology. 16p. 1899. Out of print. 

Economic Geology. 44p. 1904. Out of print. 

Insecticides and Fungicides. 20p. 1909. Free. 

Classification of New York Series of Geologic Formations. 32p. 1903. Out 
of print. Revised edition. 96p. 1912. Free. 


Geologic maps. Merrill, F. J. H. Economic and Geologic Map of the 
State of New York; issued as part of Museum Bulletin 15 and 48th Museum 
Report, v.12" 59 x67 ems (16804. Scale 14) miles tom inehe se 

—— Map of the State of New York Showing the Location of Quarries of 
Stone Used for Building and Road Metal. 1897. Out of print. 

—— Map of the State of New York Showing the Distribution of the Rocks 
Most Useful for Road Metal. 1897. Out of print. 

Geologic Map of New York. tr901. Scale 5 miles to 1 inch. In atlas 

form $2. Lower Hudson sheet 50c. 

The lower Hudson sheet, peologically colored, comprises Rockland, Orange, Dutchess, 

Putnam, Westchester, New York, Richmond, Kings, Queens and Nassau counties, and parts 


of Sullivan, Ulster and Suffolk counties; also northeastern New Jersey and part of western 
Connecticut. 


MUSEUM PUBLICATIONS 


Map of New York Showing the Surface Configuration and Water Sheds: 
MQOle ss OcAle 12 miles tO 1 inch.) a1 5c: 

~+-— Map of the State of New York Showing the Location of Its Economic 
Deposits. 1904. Scale 12 miles to I inch. I65c. 

Geologic maps on the United States Geological Survey topographic base. 
Scale I in. == 1 m. Those marked with an asterisk have also been pub- 
lished separately. 

Albany county. 1898. Out of print. 

Area around Lake Placid. 1898. : 

Vicinity of Frankfort Hill [parts of Herkimer and Oneida counties]. 1899. 

Rockland county. 1899. 

Amsterdam quadrangle. 1900. 

*Parts of Albany and Rensselaer counties. Igor. Out of print. 

*Niagara river. I90I. 25c. 

Part of Clinton county. Igot. 

Oyster Bay and Hempstead quadrangles on Long Island. got. 

Portions of Clinton and Essex counties. 1902. 

Part of town of Northumberland, Saratoga co. 1903. 

Union Springs, Cayuga county and vicinity. 1903. 

*Olean quadrangle. 1903. Free. 

*Becraft Mt with 2 sheets of sections. (Scale 1 in. ==4m.) 1903. 20c. 

*Canandaigua-Naples quadrangles. 1904. 20c. 

*Little Falls quadrangle. 1905. Free. 

*Watkins-Elmira quadrangles. 1905. 20c. 

*Tully quadrangle. 1905. Free. 

*Salamanca quadrangle. 1905. Out of print. 

*Mooers quadrangle. 1905. Free. 

Paradox Lake quadrangle. 1905. 

*Buffalo quadrangle. 1906. Out of print. 

*Penn Yan-Hammondsport quadrangles. 1906. 20c. 

*Rochester and Ontario Beach quadrangles. 1907. 20c. 

*Long Lake quadrangle. 1907. Free. 

*Nunda-Portage quadrangles. 1908. 20c. 

*Remsen quadrangle. 1908. Free. 

*Geneva-Ovid quadrangles. 1909. 20c. 

*Port Leyden quadrangle. tIg10. Free. 

*Auburn-Genoa quadrangles. I910. 20¢. 

“Elizabethtown and Port Henry quadrangles. 1910. I5c. 

*Alexandria Bay quadrangle. 1910 Free. 

*Cape Vincent quadrangle. i910. Free. 

*Clayton quadrangle. 1910. Free. 

*Grindstone quadrangle. tIg10. Free. 

*Theresa quadrangle. i910. Free. 

*Poughkeepsie quadrangle. 1911. Free. 

*Honeoye-Wayland quadrangles. I9II. 20c. 

*Broadalbin quadrangle. «1911. Free. 

*Schenectady quadrangle 1911. Free. 

*Saratoga-Schuylerville quadrangles. 1914. 20¢. 

*North Creek quadrangle. 1914. Free 

*Syracuse quadrangle. 1914. Free. 

*Attica-Depew quadrangle:. 1914. 20c¢. 

*Lake Pleasant quadrangle. 1916. Free. 

*Saratoga quadrangle. 1916. Free. 

*Canton quadrangle. 1916. Free. 

*Brier Hill, Ogdensburg and Red Mills quadrangles. 1916. 15C¢c. 

*Blue Mountain quadrangle. 1916. Free. 

*Glens Falls, Saratoga, Schuylerville, Schenectady and Cohoes quadrangles. 
LOI7. « 20C. 


. 
| 
| 
| 


sy Y Leet we 
Sona MN tev 
pesagre! 


i 


ro = 
! Ae 


. 
= 


ah 
cl 
ae 


rt 
i ae iy, ; 
, 


ee 


Aaa nee le 
i 


! ‘ Sy ; ass mein 
: ; ei =, My i i : ii ee 
ot DIRE Msg etn (ae es Mey UE Mi ay Say fa) a fu Tate yh yh yl ey, Che fh dt 
aoe NY SEA of fap Sinet-a oe Hy eae A a Ny oth al Oe SE A aM UN 


“A 


wk 
ie 


cht e cties 
CPi WM Emel, 
ay 


“Seal A ua